GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Monterey Peninsula Water Management District GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16010 PAGE-1

SECTION 16010

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Description

A. Work included: Provide all required labor, project equipment and materials, tools, construction equipment, safety equipment, transportation, and test equipment, and satisfactorily complete all electrical and associated work shown on the Drawings, included in these Specifications, or required for a complete Building Phase facility. In addition, provide wiring for the equipment that will be provided under other Divisions of these Specifications. Building Phase work shall include, but not be limited to, the following items:

1. Accept the following District supplied equipment as indicated below.

Utility Meter/Main Switchboard (SWBD)

Motor Control Center (MCC)

Variable Frequency Drive (2 ea.) (VFD)

Main PLC Control Panel

a. The Contractor shall inspect all District supplied equipment upon its arrival onsite or within 1 week of mobilization if the equipment is already onsite.

b. Any damage or items not in compliance with the approved manufacturer's drawings issued with these specifications shall be recorded on the Acceptance forms in Attachment 16010A.

c. Contractor shall complete all items and information requested on the Acceptance forms and submit a signed and dated copy to the District, indicating their acceptance of responsibility for the equipment.

d. Any physical damage or missing equipment found after submittal of the Acceptance forms shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to correct.

2. Install the above District supplied equipment as shown on the Drawings.

3. Protect in place all existing conduits and cables.

4. Extend PG&E 480V feeder conduit from PG&E transformer to SWBD as shown on the Drawings. Installation of power conductors shall be by PG&E. All installations shall be in accordance with PG&E requirements and specifications whether shown on the Drawings or not.

5. Demolish existing temporary power equipment as shown on drawings. Dispose of equipment per the District’s direction.

6. Extend existing conduits from building to ASR wells #3 & #4 as shown in the Drawings.

7. Furnish & install conduit and wiring systems from the new SWBD, MCC, VFDs to all motor loads, lighting and receptacles, and all instrument loads as shown on the Drawings and required by these Specifications.

8. Furnish & install instrument conduit systems and wiring for all instruments and devices as shown on the Drawings and required by these Specifications.

a. Conduits shall be terminated in the PLC Control panel enclosure. Cables shall be pulled into the control panel, labeled, with a minimum of 10 feet of cable for termination by Others.

9. Furnish & install new transformers and panels as shown on the Drawings and required by these Specifications.


10. Furnish and install lighting, receptacles and associated conduit, wiring and foundations/structural bases at the well sites as shown on the Drawings and required by these Specifications.

11. Furnish & install AC system disconnect, conduit and wiring and all associated equipment as shown on the Drawings and required by these Specifications.

12. Furnish & install grounding system extension to the well sites as shown on the Drawings and required by these Specifications.

13. Provide system testing and commissioning as required by these specifications.

14. Provide clean-up of equipment and site as specified herein.

B. Safety: Conduct operations in accordance with NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workspaces.

1.2 Quality Assurance A. Codes: All electrical equipment and materials, including installation and testing, shall conform to the

following applicable codes:

1. National Electrical Code (NEC), latest edition;

2. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), latest edition;

3. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) standards;

4. Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems, International Electrical Testing Association (NETA), latest edition.

B. Variances: In instances where two or more codes are at variance, the most restrictive requirements shall apply.

C. Standards: Equipment shall conform to applicable standards of American National Standards Institute (ANSI), Electronics Industries Association (EIA), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), and National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). The revisions of these standards in effect on the date of issuance of the Contract Documents shall apply.

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing is required for all equipment and materials where such listing is offered by the Underwriters Laboratories. Safety labeling and listing by other organizations, such as ETL Testing Laboratories, or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) may be substituted for UL labeling and listing if acceptable to the authority having code enforcement jurisdiction. Provide service entrance labels for all equipment required by the NEC to have such labels.

E. Contractor's Expense: Obtain and pay for all required bonds, insurance, licenses, permits and inspections, and pay all taxes, fees and utility charges that will be required for the electrical construction work.

1.3 Drawings A. Drawings: The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic; exact locations of electrical products shall be

verified in the field with the Engineer. Except where special details are used to illustrate the method of installation of a particular piece or type of equipment or material, the requirements or descriptions in this Specification shall take precedence in the event of conflict.

1. Locations of equipment, inserts, anchors, motors, panels, pull boxes, conduits, and fittings, are approximate unless dimensioned; verify locations with the Engineer prior to installation.

2. Field verify scaled dimensions on Drawings.


3. Existing utilities are shown diagrammatically where known. Contractor shall field verify location of all existing utilities and facilities. Contractor shall be responsible for repair of any damage to existing equipment caused by his construction.

4. Review the Drawings and Specification Divisions of other trades and perform the electrical work that will be required for the installations.

5. Should there be a need to deviate from the Electrical Drawings and Specifications, submit written details and reasons for all changes to the Engineer for review and approval before proceeding.

6. Resolution of conflicting interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be per the standard specifications.

B. As-Built Drawings:

1. Maintain a complete and accurate record set of Drawings for the electrical construction work.

2. Record all work that is installed differently than shown on the Drawings.

3. Upon completion of the work, transfer all marked changes to a clean set of full-size Drawings with red ink. Mark the Drawings "AS-BUILT DRAWINGS" and submit them to the Engineer when the electrical work is completed.

4. Upon completion of the work, provide the as-built cable/conductor numbering schedule as required in Section 16124. Provide hard copies of the schedule in accordance with the general specifications and on magnetic media satisfactory to the Engineer.

1.4 Submittals A. Shop Drawings:

1. General: Submit Product Review or Product information shop drawings for materials and equipment as required by Section 01080 of these Specifications and under each of the individual specification sections.

B. As-Built Shop Drawings: Revise manufacturer's shop drawings to show any construction changes. Prior to final acceptance, deliver one complete set to the Engineer for his favorable review. After such review, provide copies of all CAD produced drawings on magnetic media satisfactory to the Engineer in AutoCAD Drawing format.

C. Manuals:

1. Furnish manuals for equipment where Manuals are specified in the equipment Specifications. Submit manuals in accordance with the general specifications.

2. In each manual, include equipment descriptions, record shop drawings, operation and maintenance instructions, parts ordering data and ratings for the equipment furnished for this project.

3. If manuals are not available, provide equipment data sheets (cutsheets) for all equipment provided.

D. Spare Parts: For each piece of equipment, submit a list of recommended spare parts with quantities. Include part numbers and the name, address, and telephone number of the supplier.

1.5 Factory Tests Submit reports of factory tests and adjustments performed by equipment manufacturers to the Engineer prior to field testing and adjustment of the equipment. These reports shall identify the equipment and show dates, results of tests, measured values and final adjustment settings. Provide factory tests and adjustments for equipment where factory tests are specified in the equipment Specifications.


1.6 Inspections A. The Engineer may inspect the fabricated equipment at the factory before shipment to job site. Provide

the Engineer with a minimum of 5 days prior notice so that an inspection can be arranged at the factory.

B. Inspection of the equipment at the factory by the Engineer will be made after the manufacturer has performed satisfactory checks, adjustments, tests and operations.

C. Favorable review of the equipment at the factory only allows the manufacturer to ship the equipment to the project site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation and satisfactory start-up operation of the equipment to the satisfaction of the manufacturer and the Engineer.

1.7 Coordination A. Coordinate the electrical work with the other trades, code authorities, utilities, and the District.

B. Where connections must be made to existing installations, properly schedule all the required work, including the power shutdown periods. Schedule and carry out shutdowns with the Engineer so as to cause the least disruption to operation of the plant and privately owned facilities.

C. When two trades join together in an area, make certain that no electrical work is omitted.

1.8 Job Conditions A. Construction Power:

1. Make all arrangements for the required construction power.

2. When required, provide all equipment, materials and wiring in accordance with the applicable codes and regulations.

3. CONTRACTOR shall submit plans for review and approval by the DISTRICT for the temporary construction power system.

a. CONTRACTOR plans shall include the maximum power that the temporary construction power system will require.

4. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any electrical building permits required for the temporary construction power system.

5. Upon completion of the project, remove all temporary construction power equipment, material and wiring from the site as the property of the Contractor.

B. Storage: Provide weatherproof storage for all equipment and materials including District supplied equipment which will become part of the completed facility so that it is protected from weather, dust, water, or construction operations. Equipment space heaters shall be energized at all times during storage to prevent moisture from damaging the equipment.

1.9 Electrical Services A. Contractor shall submit plans for approval for any shut downs or proposed modifications of the

existing service a minimum of three weeks before the shutdown or modification is needed. Coordinate all work with PGE, obtain the required inspections, and notify PGE when service is required after work is completed. The Owner’s representative shall be notified a minimum of 24 hours prior to any PGE inspections, and 7 days prior to service shut down.

1.10 Damaged Products A. Notify the Engineer in writing in the event that any equipment or material is damaged.

B. Obtain prior favorable review by the Engineer before making repairs to damaged products.


1.11 Optional Equipment A. Optional or substituted equipment must be approved by the Engineer in writing prior to being ordered

by the Contractor. Contractor shall submit detailed reasons for the substitution, cost impacts resulting from the substitution and impacts from the substitution.

B. Any substituted or optional equipment ordered before written approval may be rejected by the Engineer at no cost to the District.

C. Costs for any modifications to other equipment or the facility required and/or resulting from Contractor substituted equipment is the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Any re-design must be approved by the Engineer in writing prior to installation.

1.12 Locations A. General: Use equipment, materials and wiring methods U.L. listed as suitable for the types of

locations in which they are located, as defined in the NEC and Paragraph B, below.

B. Definitions of Types of Locations:

C. Dry Locations: Indoor locations such as MCC or control rooms

D. Wet Locations: Outdoor locations exposed to the weather or with only a roof covering with no walls.

E. Damp Locations: Outdoor locations with roofs and shielded on three sides, dry pit areas.

F. Corrosive Locations: (Non-corrosive locations on site.)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Standards of Quality

A. Products that are specified by manufacturer, trade name or catalog number establish a standard of quality and do not prohibit the use of substitute products of other manufacturers provided they are favorably reviewed by the Engineer prior to the ordering of the equipment.

B. It is the intent of these Specifications and Drawings to secure high quality in all materials and equipment in order to facilitate operation and maintenance of the facility. All equipment and materials shall be new and the products of reputable suppliers having adequate experience in the manufacture of these particular items. For uniformity, only one manufacturer will be accepted for each type of product. All equipment shall be designed for the service intended and shall be of rugged construction, of ample strength for all stresses which may occur during fabrication, transportation, erection, and continuous or intermittent operation. All equipment shall be adequately stayed, braced and anchored and shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Appearance and safety, as well as utility, shall be given consideration in the design of details.

C. All components and devices installed shall be standard items of Industrial grade, unless otherwise noted, and shall be of sturdy and durable construction suitable for long, trouble-free service. Light-duty, fragile and competitive grade devices of doubtful durability shall not be used.

2.2 Nameplates A. For each piece of electrical equipment, provide a manufacturer's nameplate showing his name,

location, the pertinent ratings and the model designation.

B. Identify each piece of equipment and related controls with a rigid laminated engraved 2-ply UV stable plastic nameplate. Engrave nameplates with the equipment number, inscriptions indicated on the Drawings and, if not so indicated, with the equipment name and with the lighting panel and circuit number or equipment it is fed from. Securely fasten nameplates in place using a minimum of two


stainless steel screws. Where no Inscription is indicated on the Drawings, furnish nameplates with an appropriate inscription furnished by the Engineer upon prior request by the Contractor.

C. Each control device, including pushbuttons, control switches, and indicating lights, shall have an integral legend plate or nameplate indicating the device function. These shall be inscribed as indicated on the Drawings or as favorably reviewed by the Engineer.

2.3 Fasteners A. Fasteners for securing equipment to walls, floors and the like shall be either hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication or stainless steel. Provide stainless steel fasteners in Corrosive Locations. When fastening to existing walls, floors, and the like, provide capsule anchors, not expansion shields. Size capsule anchors to meet load requirements. Minimum size capsule anchor bolt is 3/8-inch.

2.4 Painting A. Equipment: Refer to each electrical equipment section of these Specifications for painting

requirements of equipment enclosures. Repair any final paint finish that has been damaged or is otherwise unsatisfactory, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.5 Enclosures A. Unless otherwise noted, provide enclosures as follows:

1. Dry Locations: NEMA Type I with gaskets

2. Wet Locations: NEMA Type 4

3. Damp Locations: NEMA Type 12

4. Corrosive Locations: NEMA Type 4X

See additional requirements below In Paragraph 3.06, METAL PANELS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Requirements

A. All electrical installations shall conform to the codes and standards outlined in this section.

3.2 3.02 Workmanship A. Assign a qualified representative who shall supervise the electrical construction work from beginning

to completion and final acceptance.

B. Perform all labor using qualified craftsmen, who have had a minimum of 3 years experience on similar projects, and after January 1, 2005 are licensed by the State of California. Provide first-class workmanship for all installations.

C. Ensure that all equipment and materials fit properly in their installations. Conduit shall be installed perpendicular or parallel to structural members wherever possible.

D. Perform any required work to correct improperly fit installations at no additional expense to the District.

3.3 Conductor Identification A. Identify all wires and cables in conformance with the requirements of Sections 16120, LOW

VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE. This requirement applies to all equipment provided under this contract, regardless of Division, as well as to all conductors provided or worked on during this contract.


3.4 Installing Equipment A. Provide the required inserts, bolts and anchors, and securely attach all equipment and materials to

their supports.

B. Install all floor-mounted equipment on raised reinforced concrete pads. The Contractor, suppliers, and fabricators shall take this requirement into consideration when designing, fabricating, and installing panels, motor control centers, and other enclosures so that height above the floor of the operating handles of electrical devices meets the requirements of these Specifications and applicable codes.

3.5 Cutting, Drilling, and Welding A. Provide any cutting, drilling, and welding that is required for the electrical construction work.

B. Structural members shall not be cut or drilled, except when favorably reviewed by the Engineer. Use a core drill wherever it is necessary to drill through concrete or masonry.

C. Provide the required welding for equipment supports. Conduits and fittings shall not be welded to structural steel.

D. Perform patch work with the same materials as the surrounding area and finish to match.

3.6 Metal Panels A. All metal panels which are mounted on or abutted to concrete walls in damp locations or mounted on

any outside walls shall be mounted 1/4-Inch from the wall, and the back sides of the panels shall be painted with a high build epoxy primer Film thickness shall be 10 mils minimum.

3.7 Field Tests A. Perform tests in accordance with applicable procedures as described in NETA Acceptance Testing

Specifications.

B. Contractor shall submit a testing procedure to the District for review and approval within 1 month of receipt of Contract.

1. Procedure shall outline, in detail, the tests proposed for each piece of electrical equipment and the anticipated testing schedule.

2. Test procedure shall reference the applicable NETA section specifying that test.

C. Provide a minimum of 48 hours notice to the Engineer prior to any test to permit witnessing the test.

D. Provide the services of a Contractor and pay all costs of performing the inspections and tests as specified herein.

E. The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, labor and technical supervision to perform such tests and inspections. It is the intent of these tests to ensure that all electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer's instructions. The tests and inspections shall determine the suitability for energization.

1. The Contractor shall have a calibration program which maintains all applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy. Instruments shall be calibrated within the last 12 months.

2. Date calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.

F. Where testing pursuant to NETA requirements is required in these specifications, submit a test report which includes the following:

1. Name of project, name of person performing test, and date of test

2. Description of equipment tested

3. Description of test


4. List of test equipment used and calibration date

5. Test results

6. Conclusions and recommendations

7. Appendix, Including appropriate test forms

The test report shall be bound and its contents certified. Submit the completed report directly to the Engineer no later than thirty (30) days after completion of the test unless directed otherwise. Four reports shall be submitted for review.

G. Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to, the following requirements:

1. Occupational Safety and Health Act, OSHA.

2. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, Latest Edition, National Safety Council.

3. Applicable state and local safety operating procedures.

4. District Safety Regulations.

H. All field tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized except where otherwise specifically required by Section 8 (or current section number, if changed) of the latest Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems published by NETA. The Contractor shall have a designated safety representative who shall be present on the project and supervise operations with respect to safety.

I. Electrical equipment and materials furnished and installed by the Contractor, and the testing equipment listed below shall be tested in accordance with the "Inspection and Test Procedures" and "System Function Tests" (Section 8 or current section number, if changed) of the latest Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems published by NETA. Tests shall not include any tests listed as optional in the aforementioned NETA Specifications unless specifically noted in respective equipment specifications for this project.

J. Retesting will be required for all unsatisfactory tests after the equipment or system has been repaired. Retest all related equipment and systems if required by the District. Repair and retest equipment and systems which have been satisfactorily tested but later fail, until satisfactory performance is obtained.

K. Putting Equipment and Cables into Service: Submittal and favorable review of the specified factory and field tests shall occur before the Contractor is permitted to place the respective equipment or cable into service.

L. Miscellaneous Tests

1. Insulation Resistance, Continuity, Rotation: Perform routine insulation resistance, continuity and rotation tests for all distribution and utilization equipment including all motors 1/2 horsepower and larger prior and in addition to tests performed by the Contractor specified herein. Notify the Engineer one day prior to when equipment becomes available for acceptance tests. Work shall be coordinated to expedite project scheduling. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing all final settings and adjustments on protective devices. Any system material or workmanship which is found defective on the basis of acceptance tests shall be reported directly to the Engineer. The Contractor shall maintain a written record of all tests and upon completion of project, assemble and certify a final test report.

2. Motor Current: Measure and record current in each phase for each new motor. Include measurement of the motor terminal voltages (if motor terminals are inaccessible, i.e. submersible motors, take voltage reading at the motor controller) and motor currents when the motor is being operated at normal operating loads. For motors which are part of adjustable frequency use true-RMS-reading instruments in making the measurements.


3. Operational Tests: Operationally test all circuits to demonstrate that the circuits and equipment have been properly installed, adjusted and are ready for full time service. Demonstrate the proper functioning of circuits in all modes of operation, including alarm conditions, and demonstrate satisfactory interfacing with the control panel.

3.8 Equipment Protection A. Exercise care at all times after installation of equipment, motor control centers, etc., to keep out

foreign matter, dust, dirt, debris, or moisture. Use protective sheetmetal covers, canvas, heat lamps, etc., as needed to ensure equipment protection.

3.9 Cleaning Equipment B. Thoroughly clean all soiled surfaces of installed equipment and materials.

A. Clean out and vacuum all construction debris from the bottom of all equipment.

B. Provide and touch-up to original condition any factory painting that has been marred or scratched during shipment or installation, using paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer.

3.10 Cleanup A. During the course of construction and upon completion of the electrical work, remove all surplus

materials, rubbish, and debris that accumulated during the construction work. Leave the entire area neat, clean, and acceptable to the Engineer.

** END OF SECTION **


SECTION 16110 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

PART 4 - GENERAL

4.1 Description

Provisions: Applicable provisions of Section 16010 become a Part of this section as if repeated herein.

4.2 Reference Standards

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:

A. C80.1 Specification for Zinc Coated Rigid Steel Conduit

B. C80.3 Specifications for Zinc Coated Electrical Metallic Tubing

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publications:

A. RN1 Polyvinyl Chloride Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing

B. TC2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit

C. TC3 PVC Fittings for Use with PVC Tubing and Conduit

Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards:

A. 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit

B. 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Electrical Conduit

C. 651 Schedule 40 or 80 PVC Conduit and Tubing

4.3 Submittals

Submit material or equipment data in accordance with Section 01080 and Section 16010 of these Specifications.

4.4 Locations

Refer to Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, for definitions of types of locations.

PART 5 - PRODUCTS

5.1 Conduit, Raceways


General: Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be used in all conduit systems, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings, or where flexible conduit is required. The minimum size raceway shall be 3/4-inch unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (RGS) shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. Couplings shall be threaded type. Where PVC coated rigid steel conduit is called for, it shall be hot-dip galvanized, conforming to NEMA RN 1, with factory-applied PVC coating 40 mils thick.

PVC conduit shall be manufacturer from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound with inert modifiers for UV and heat resistance. Conduit shall be UL listed for use with 90 degree Celsius rated conductors. PVC conduits shall be tested and conform to the requirements of NEMA TC-2, NEMA TC-3, UL-651 and UL-514.

Flexible Conduit: Flexible metal conduit shall be liquid-tight, shall have a moisture- and oil-proof PVC jacket extruded over a galvanized, flexible steel conduit, and shall conform to UL 360.

5.2 Conduit Supports

Supports for individual conduits shall be galvanized malleable iron one-hole type with conduit back spacer, unless specified otherwise on the Drawings.

Supports for multiple conduits shall be hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel Unistrut or Superstrut channels, or equal, as called for on the Drawings. All associated hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel if called for on the Drawings.

All channels, strut, threaded rods, nuts and clamps in corrosive areas shall be of epoxy resin reinforced fiberglass material. Provide Robroy, Superstrut, or equal.

5.3 Fittings

Fittings for use with rigid steel shall be hot dipped galvanized steel or galvanized cast ferrous metal; access fittings shall have gasketed cast covers and be Crouse-Hinds Condulets, Appleton Unilets, or equal. Provide threaded-type couplings and connectors.

Fittings for flexible conduit shall be Appleton Type ST, O-Z Gedney Series 4Q, or equal.

Union couplings for conduits shall be the Erickson type and shall be Appleton Type EC. O-Z Gedney 3-piece Series 4, or equal. Threadless couplings shall not be used.

Bushings:

A. Bushings shall be the Insulated type.

B. Bushings for rigid steel shall be hot dip galvanized insulated grounding type, O-Z Gedney Type HBLG, Appleton Type GIB, or equal.

Conduit seals, when required, shall have zinc electroplate and shall be Crouse-Hinds Type EYS or EZS; Appleton Type EYS, ESU, or EY series; or equal. Sealing compounds shall be provided by the same manufacturer as the seals and approved for use with the seals provided.

A. After all cables have been installed, the seals shall be packed per manufacturer’s instructions.


B. After the system has been satisfactorily tested, the Engineer shall be notified a minimum of 24 hours prior to pouring the seals to allow for inspection.

C. Poured seals shall be painted red after inspection and approval by the Engineer.

Fittings in corrosive areas shall be:

A. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, minimum coating 40 mils. thick, compatible with the conduit supplied, or

B. Schedule 40 PVC, if called for on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer.

5.4 Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters

General. Wireways shall consist of a prefabricated channel-shaped trough with hinged or removable covers, associated fittings, and supports. Straight sections shall not be longer than 5 feet. Cross-sectional dimensions shall be per the NEC. Fittings shall consist of elbows, tees, crosses, and closing plates as required.

Interior Locations: All components shall be constructed from sheet steel not less than 16 gauge and coated with a corrosion-resistant gray paint. Covers shall be held closed with screws.

Exterior Locations: Wireway and associated fittings shall meet NEMA 3R/12 classifications, with gasketed closing end plates and gasketed hinged covers.

Corrosive Locations: In corrosive locations provide enclosure type boxes for use as wireways. Enclosures and associated fittings shall meet NEMA 4X classifications and shall be manufactured from reinforced injection molded fiberglass or formed and welded stainless steel, and shall have gasketed closing plates and hinged and gasketed covers with spring loaded latches.

5.5 Conduit Sealants

Moisture Barrier Types: Sealant shall be a non-toxic, non-shrink, non-hardening, putty type hand applied material providing an effective barrier under submerged conditions.

Fire Retardant Types: Fire stop material shall be a reusable, non-toxic, asbestos-free, expanding, putty type material with a 3-hour rating in accordance with UL 1479. Provide products indicated by the manufacturer to be suitable for the type and size of penetration.

PART 6 - EXECUTION

6.1 Conduit, Raceway and Fitting Installation

From pull point to pull point, the sum of the angles of all of the bends and offsets shall not exceed 270 degrees.

For power, control and signal circuits, provide conduit per the Drawings. Conduit entry locations are on hold pending manufacturer submittal drawings. Final conduit entry locations will be included in Issue for Construction drawings. Contractor shall include all labor, conduits & material to stub-up conduits into final entry locations.


At all boxes and equipment, provide insulated type metallic grounding bushings for metallic conduits. Bond together all conduits to provide continuity of the equipment grounding system. Size bonding conductor per the NEC.

Provide flexible conduit in lengths of not more than 18 inches, unless approved by the Engineer, at connections to motors, valves and any equipment subject to vibration or relative movement.

Conduit Supports: Properly support all conduits as required by the NEC. Run all conduits exposed except where the Drawings Indicate that they are to be embedded in the floor slab, walls, or ceiling, or to be installed underground.

A. Exposed Conduits: Support exposed conduits within one foot of any outlet and at intervals not exceeding NEC requirements or 10 feet; wherever possible, group conduits together and support on common supports. Support exposed conduits fastened to the surface of the concrete structure by one-hole clamps, or with channels. Use conduit spacers with one-hole clamps. Coordinate conduit locations with piping, equipment, fixtures, and with structural and architectural elements. Conduits attached to walls or columns shall be as unobtrusive as possible and shall avoid windows. Run all exposed conduits parallel to building lines. Group together exposed conduits in horizontal runs located away from walls and support on trapeze hangers, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Arrange such conduits uniformly and neatly. Trapeze hangers shall consist of channels of adequate size, suspended by means of rods or other suitable means from the ceiling or from pipe hangers. Install such runs so as not to interfere with the operation of valves or any other equipment. Treat cut surfaces or damaged ends with corrosion-resistant coatings such as “Devcon Z”, prepared by Subox Coatings; "Galvanox Type I", prepared by Pedley-Knowles; or equal. Application shall follow manufacturer's recommendation.

Raceways: After completing a conduit run between handholes, or pullboxes, prove the integrity of the conduit run. Use an air compressor to blow in a pull-line, then use the pull-line to pull a mandrel through the entire conduit run.

Spare Raceways: Install a new 3/16-inch nylon, 800 pound test pull-line which has tape measure marking every foot to indicate length. Plug the ends of the conduit, with conduit cap plugs. Taping the conduit ends is not acceptable.

All penetrations through walls into or out of corrosive locations, as defined in Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be made gas tight. In concrete walls, pour concrete after the conduit is in place, if possible. If not, core drill concrete or CMU walls, Install conduit and caulk around it with non-shrink grout. Install conduit seal in each conduit near the penetration, or as shown on the drawings.

All conduit penetrations through interior walls and floors shall be sealed with fire retardant type conduit sealant.

Conduit Identification: In each handhole, pullbox, cabinet, motor control center or other equipment enclosure, identify each conduit: using a conduit number system acceptable to the Engineer, by means of a stamped stainless steel tag affixed with stainless steel wire; where affixing a tag is not feasible, identify conduits by stenciling. Stencil all exposed conduits for identification at least once in each room.

Conduit Seals:


A. Moisture Seals: Provide in all conduit penetrations going outside the building, in accordance with NEC requirements and in all underground conduits entering vaults.

6.2 Wireway Installation

Straight sections and fittings shall be solidly bolted together to be mechanically rigid and electrically continuous. Dead ends shall be closed. Unused conduit openings shall be plugged.

Wireways shall be supported every five feet.

Wireways and auxiliary gutters shall not contain wiring or control devices and shall not extend over 80 feet in length.


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16110 PAGE-1

SECTION 16110

CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Description

A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Section 16010 become a Part of this section as if repeated herein.


A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:

1. C80.1 Specification for Zinc Coated Rigid Steel Conduit

2. C80.3 Specifications for Zinc Coated Electrical Metallic Tubing

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publications:

1. RN1 Polyvinyl Chloride Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing

2. TC2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit

3. TC3 PVC Fittings for Use with PVC Tubing and Conduit

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards:

1. 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit

2. 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Electrical Conduit

3. 651 Schedule 40 or 80 PVC Conduit and Tubing

1.3 Submittals

A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with Section 01080 and Section 16010 of these Specifications.

1.4 Locations

A. Refer to Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, for definitions of types of locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Conduit, Raceways


A. General: Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be used in all conduit systems, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings, or where flexible conduit is required. The minimum size raceway shall be 3/4-inch unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

B. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (RGS) shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. Couplings shall be threaded type. Where PVC coated rigid steel conduit is called for, it shall be hot-dip galvanized, conforming to NEMA RN 1, with factory-applied PVC coating 40 mils thick.

C. PVC conduit shall be manufacturer from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound with inert modifiers for UV and heat resistance. Conduit shall be UL listed for use with 90 degree Celsius rated conductors. PVC conduits shall be tested and conform to the requirements of NEMA TC-2, NEMA TC-3, UL-651 and UL-514.

D. Flexible Conduit: Flexible metal conduit shall be liquid-tight, shall have a moisture- and oil-proof PVC jacket extruded over a galvanized, flexible steel conduit, and shall conform to UL 360.

2.2 Conduit Supports

A. Supports for individual conduits shall be galvanized malleable iron one-hole type with conduit back spacer, unless specified otherwise on the Drawings.

B. Supports for multiple conduits shall be hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel Unistrut or Superstrut channels, or equal, as called for on the Drawings. All associated hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel if called for on the Drawings.

C. All channels, strut, threaded rods, nuts and clamps in corrosive areas shall be of epoxy resin reinforced fiberglass material. Provide Robroy, Superstrut, or equal.

2.3 Fittings

A. Fittings for use with rigid steel shall be hot dipped galvanized steel or galvanized cast ferrous metal; access fittings shall have gasketed cast covers and be Crouse-Hinds Condulets, Appleton Unilets, or equal. Provide threaded-type couplings and connectors.

B. Fittings for flexible conduit shall be Appleton Type ST, O-Z Gedney Series 4Q, or equal.

C. Union couplings for conduits shall be the Erickson type and shall be Appleton Type EC. O-Z Gedney 3-piece Series 4, or equal. Threadless couplings shall not be used.

D. Bushings:

1. Bushings shall be the Insulated type.

2. Bushings for rigid steel shall be hot dip galvanized insulated grounding type, O-Z Gedney Type HBLG, Appleton Type GIB, or equal.

E. Conduit seals, when required, shall have zinc electroplate and shall be Crouse-Hinds Type EYS or EZS; Appleton Type EYS, ESU, or EY series; or equal. Sealing compounds shall be provided by the same manufacturer as the seals and approved for use with the seals provided.

1. After all cables have been installed, the seals shall be packed per manufacturer’s instructions.


2. After the system has been satisfactorily tested, the Engineer shall be notified a minimum of 24 hours prior to pouring the seals to allow for inspection.

3. Poured seals shall be painted red after inspection and approval by the Engineer.

F. Fittings in corrosive areas shall be:

1. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, minimum coating 40 mils. thick, compatible with the conduit supplied, or

2. Schedule 40 PVC, if called for on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer.

2.4 Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters

A. General. Wireways shall consist of a prefabricated channel-shaped trough with hinged or removable covers, associated fittings, and supports. Straight sections shall not be longer than 5 feet. Cross-sectional dimensions shall be per the NEC. Fittings shall consist of elbows, tees, crosses, and closing plates as required.

B. Interior Locations: All components shall be constructed from sheet steel not less than 16 gauge and coated with a corrosion-resistant gray paint. Covers shall be held closed with screws.

C. Exterior Locations: Wireway and associated fittings shall meet NEMA 3R/12 classifications, with gasketed closing end plates and gasketed hinged covers.

D. Corrosive Locations: In corrosive locations provide enclosure type boxes for use as wireways. Enclosures and associated fittings shall meet NEMA 4X classifications and shall be manufactured from reinforced injection molded fiberglass or formed and welded stainless steel, and shall have gasketed closing plates and hinged and gasketed covers with spring loaded latches.

2.5 Conduit Sealants

A. Moisture Barrier Types: Sealant shall be a non-toxic, non-shrink, non-hardening, putty type hand applied material providing an effective barrier under submerged conditions.

B. Fire Retardant Types: Fire stop material shall be a reusable, non-toxic, asbestos-free, expanding, putty type material with a 3-hour rating in accordance with UL 1479. Provide products indicated by the manufacturer to be suitable for the type and size of penetration.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Conduit, Raceway and Fitting Installation

A. From pull point to pull point, the sum of the angles of all of the bends and offsets shall not exceed 270 degrees.

B. For power, control and signal circuits, provide conduit per the Drawings. Conduit entry locations are on hold pending manufacturer submittal drawings. Final conduit entry locations will be included in Issue for Construction drawings. Contractor shall include all labor, conduits & material to stub-up conduits into final entry locations.


C. At all boxes and equipment, provide insulated type metallic grounding bushings for metallic conduits. Bond together all conduits to provide continuity of the equipment grounding system. Size bonding conductor per the NEC.

D. Provide flexible conduit in lengths of not more than 18 inches, unless approved by the Engineer, at connections to motors, valves and any equipment subject to vibration or relative movement.

E. Conduit Supports: Properly support all conduits as required by the NEC. Run all conduits exposed except where the Drawings Indicate that they are to be embedded in the floor slab, walls, or ceiling, or to be installed underground.

1. Exposed Conduits: Support exposed conduits within one foot of any outlet and at intervals not exceeding NEC requirements or 10 feet; wherever possible, group conduits together and support on common supports. Support exposed conduits fastened to the surface of the concrete structure by one-hole clamps, or with channels. Use conduit spacers with one-hole clamps. Coordinate conduit locations with piping, equipment, fixtures, and with structural and architectural elements. Conduits attached to walls or columns shall be as unobtrusive as possible and shall avoid windows. Run all exposed conduits parallel to building lines.

Group together exposed conduits in horizontal runs located away from walls and support on trapeze hangers, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Arrange such conduits uniformly and neatly. Trapeze hangers shall consist of channels of adequate size, suspended by means of rods or other suitable means from the ceiling or from pipe hangers. Install such runs so as not to interfere with the operation of valves or any other equipment. Treat cut surfaces or damaged ends with corrosion-resistant coatings such as “Devcon Z”, prepared by Subox Coatings; "Galvanox Type I", prepared by Pedley-Knowles; or equal. Application shall follow manufacturer's recommendation.

F. Raceways: After completing a conduit run between handholes, or pullboxes, prove the integrity of the conduit run. Use an air compressor to blow in a pull-line, then use the pull-line to pull a mandrel through the entire conduit run.

G. Spare Raceways: Install a new 3/16-inch nylon, 800 pound test pull-line which has tape measure marking every foot to indicate length. Plug the ends of the conduit, with conduit cap plugs. Taping the conduit ends is not acceptable.

H. All penetrations through walls into or out of corrosive locations, as defined in Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be made gas tight. In concrete walls, pour concrete after the conduit is in place, if possible. If not, core drill concrete or CMU walls, Install conduit and caulk around it with non-shrink grout. Install conduit seal in each conduit near the penetration, or as shown on the drawings.

I. All conduit penetrations through interior walls and floors shall be sealed with fire retardant type conduit sealant.

J. Conduit Identification: In each handhole, pullbox, cabinet, motor control center or other equipment enclosure, identify each conduit: using a conduit number system acceptable to the Engineer, by means of a stamped stainless steel tag affixed with stainless steel wire; where affixing a tag is not feasible, identify conduits by stenciling. Stencil all exposed conduits for identification at least once in each room.

K. Conduit Seals:


1. Moisture Seals: Provide in all conduit penetrations going outside the building, in accordance with NEC requirements and in all underground conduits entering vaults.

3.2 Wireway Installation

A. Straight sections and fittings shall be solidly bolted together to be mechanically rigid and electrically continuous. Dead ends shall be closed. Unused conduit openings shall be plugged.

B. Wireways shall be supported every five feet.

C. Wireways and auxiliary gutters shall not contain wiring or control devices and shall not extend over 80 feet in length.


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District LOW VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16120 PAGE-1

SECTION 16120

LOW VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE


A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Section 16010 become a part of this section as if repeated herein.

B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: All 17000 Sections.

1.2 Reference Standards A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. B3-74 Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

2. B8-77 Specification for Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

3. B173-71 Specification for Rope Lay Stranded Copper Conductors Having Concentric Stranded Members

B. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):

1. S-66-524 Cross-Linked Thermosetting Polyethylene Insulated Wire and Cable

C. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA);

1. ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards:

1. 44 Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable

2. 62 Flexible Cords and Fixture Wire

3. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

4. 510 Insulating Tape

5. 719 Non-Metallic Sheath Cable

6. 1063 Stranded Conductors for Machine Tool Wire

1.3 Submittals Submit material or equipment data in accordance with Section 01080 and Section 16010 of these Specifications.

1.4 Locations A. Refer to Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, for definitions of types of

locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Conductors

A. General: All conductors shall be copper [unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings or in the circuit schedule]. Wire or cable not specifically shown on the Drawings or specified, but required,


shall be of the type and size required for the application and in conformance with the applicable code. All insulated conductors shall be identified with printing colored to contrast with the insulation color.

B. Power and Control Conductors, 600 Volts and below:

1. Stranded copper wire shall be 600 volt Type THWN, Class B stranding, sizes #14 AWG and larger.

C. VFD Cable

1. VFD cable shall be provided by the District from one of the manufacturers shown on the drawings.

2.2 Splices and Terminations of Conductors A. Splices:

1. Wire and Cable Splicing Materials and Applications:

a. All Equipment: Crimp type connectors shall be insulated type, suitable for the size and material of the wires and the number of wires to be spliced and for use with either solid or stranded conductors. They shall be UL listed.

b. Division 16 Equipment and Power Conductors: Bolted pressure connectors shall be suitable for the size and material of the conductors to be spliced. They shall be UL listed and of the split bolt or bolted split sleeve type in which the bolt or set screw does not bear directly on the conductor.

c. Provide Terminal Cabinets (J-boxes) as shown on the Drawings. Termination system shall include Insulated, crimp-type connectors. Coordinate the lug and boards for correct fit. All terminations shall include marker sleeves.

B. Terminations:

1. Low Voltage Terminations:

a. Crimp type terminals shall be UL listed, self-insulating sleeve type, with ring or rectangular type tongue, suitable for the size and material of the wire to be terminated, and for use with either solid or stranded conductors.

b. Terminal lugs shall be UL listed and of the split bolt or bolted split sleeve type in which the bolt or set screw does not bear directly on the conductor. Tongues shall have NEMA standard drilling.

c. Crimp with manufacturer recommended ratchet-type tool with calibrated dyes. Hand crimping tools are not acceptable.

C. Tape used for splices and terminations shall be compatible with the insulation and jacket of the cable and shall be of plastic material. Tape shall conform with UL 510.

D. Wire markers shall be heat shrink type (Raychem, T&B, or approved substitute. Wire numbers shall be permanently imprinted on the markers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Conductor Installation

A. Provide the following types and sizes of conductors for the uses Indicated for 600 volts or less:


1. Stranded Copper. Size #14 AWG and Larger, Individual Conductors or multi-conductor: As shown on the Drawings for the control of motors or other equipment. Size #14 shall not be used for power supplies to any equipment.

2. Stranded Copper. Sizes #12 AWG and Larger: As shown on the drawings for motors and other power circuits.

B. Color Coding: Provide color coding for all circuit conductors. Insulation color shall be white for neutrals and green for grounding conductors. An isolated ground conductor shall be identified with an orange tracer in the green body. Ungrounded conductor colors shall be as follows:

1. 120/208 Volt, 3 Phase: Red, black and blue.

2. 277/480 Volt, 3 Phase: Yellow, brown and orange.

3. 120/240 Volt, I Phase: Red and Black.

Color coding shall be in the conductor insulation for all conductors #10 AWG and smaller; for larger conductors, color shall be either in the insulation or in colored plastic tape applied at every location where the conductor is readily accessible (e.g., enclosures, pullboxes, and junction boxes).

C. Exercise care in pulling wires and cables into conduit or wireways so as to avoid kinking, putting undue stress on the cables or otherwise abrading them. No grease will be permitted in pulling cables. Only UL listed pulling compound will be permitted. The raceway construction shall be complete and protected from the weather before cable is pulled into it. Swab and mandrel conduits before installing cables and exercise care in pulling, to avoid damage to conductors.

D. Cable bending radius shall be per applicable code. Install feeder cables in one continuous length.

E. Provide an equipment grounding conductor, whether or not it is shown on the Drawings, in any flexible conduit or any raceway in which all or any portion of a run consists of non-metallic duct or conduit. For flexible conduit, an external bonding jumper is an acceptable alternative.

F. In panels, bundle incoming wire and cables, No.6 AWG and smaller, lace at intervals not greater than 6 inches, neatly spread into trees and connect to their respective terminals. Allow sufficient slack in cables for alterations in terminal connections. Perform lacing with plastic cable ties. Where plastic panel wiring duct is provided for cable runs, lacing is not necessary when the cable is property installed in the duct.

G. For cables crossing hinges, utilize extra flexible stranded wire, make up into groups not exceeding 12, and arrange so that they will be protected from chafing and excess flexing when the hinged member is moved. Cover cables crossing the hinge with plastic spiral sleeves.

H. VFD Cable Installation - In addition to the above cable pulling requirements, the following requirements shall apply to the VFD cable installation, or existing VFD cable re-routing.

1. Manufacturer's installation recommendations shall be followed.

2. Contractor shall use cable pulling lubricant per VFD cable manufacturers’ recommendation.

3. VFD Cable shall be pulled from the building to the well site.

4. Pulling eyes shall be used to pull in the cable. Cable basket grips are shall not be used.

5. Cable shall not be pulled continuously through the pullboxes. Cable tension shall be relieved at the pullbox and re-fed into the box for the next segment of the pull.

6. Cable tension shall be monitored and recorded during each pull. Pulling tension records shall be submitted to the District.

7. After installation, cable shields shall be checked for continuity using an ohmmeter. Resistance records shall be submitted to the District.


3.2 Conductor Splices and Terminations A. Splices: install all conductors without splices unless necessary for installation, as determined by the

District. Splices, when permitted, and terminations shall be in accordance with the splice or termination kit manufacturer's instructions. Splice or terminate wire and cable as follows:

B. Terminations:

1. Terminate stranded #14 wire using crimp type terminals where not terminated in a box lug type terminal. Terminals must be coordinated with type of terminal board where provided.

2. VFD cable shall be terminated with termination kits as shown on the Drawings. Terminal lugs shall be designed for extra flexible stranded conductors. Conductors shall not be trimmed or strands removed to fit into a lug or termination.

3.3 Conductor Identification A. Except for interior lighting and receptacle circuits, identify each wire or cable at each termination and

in each pullbox, junction box, handhole, and manhole using numbered and lettered wire markers. All electrically common conductors shall have the same number. Each electrically different conductor shall be uniquely numbered. Identify panelboard circuits using the panelboard identification and circuit number. Identify motor control circuits using the equipment identification number assigned to the control unit by the motor control center manufacturer and the motor control unit terminal number. Identify other circuits as shown in the circuit schedule or as favorably reviewed by the District.

B. Conductors between terminals of different numbers shall have both terminal numbers shown at each conductor end. The terminal number closest to the end of the wire shall be the same as the terminal number.

3.4 Field Tests A. Insulation Resistance Tests: For all circuits 150 volts to ground or more and for all motor circuits over

1/2 horsepower, test cables per NETA. The insulation resistance shall be 20 megohms or more. Any cable with insulation resistance less than 20 megohms shall be replaced. Submit results for review. See also Section 16010, 3.7 FIELD TESTS.

B. VFD Cable Insulation Resistance Tests: Test VFD cables prior to pulling & prior to termination. Megger test each vfd cable prior to pulling. Megger cables between conductors, conductors to grounds, and conductors to shield. Test results shall be submitted to the District per specifications.

C. VFD Cable Shield Continuity Test: Disconnect shield at both ends of cable. Megger from shield to ground to confirm not shorts. Use ohmmeter to confirm continuity end to end. Test results shall be submitted to the District per specifications.

D. Phase Rotation: The phase rotation of all circuits shall be clockwise in sequence. The Contractor shall verify that each three-phase service, feeder and branch circuits meet this requirement. A record shall be kept at each circuit tested and, on completion, given to the District for review.


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District SIGNAL CABLE Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16124 PAGE-1

SECTION 16124

SIGNAL CABLE



B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:

C. Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements: Section 17010.

1.2 Reference Standards A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. B8 Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft, Specification for

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

1. 383 Shielded Instrumentation Cable, Specifications for

C. Rural Electrification Administration (REA):

1. PE 39 Specification for Filled Telephone Cables

D. Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated (UL):

1. 13 Power Limited Circuit Cable Class 2, Specifications for (Bulletin)

2. 83 Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables

1.3 Submittals Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the Product Information category of the General Conditions and the submittal requirements of Section 16010.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Twisted Shielded Pairs (TSP) Cable shall conform to IEEE 383, UL 13, and UL 83 and shall be type PLTC cable suitable for direct burial. Each TSP shall consist of two #16 AWG, 7 strand copper conductors per ASTM B8 with 15 mils PVC insulation unless noted otherwise on drawings. Conductors shall be twisted with 2 inch or shorter lay, with 100% foil shielding and tinned copper drain wires. Each pair shall have a 35 mil thick outer jacket. Cable shall be rated at 90°C and for operation of 300 volts, as noted on the Drawings. Provide Belden, Alpha, Dekoron, or equal.

2.2 Multiple (Twisted) Shielded Pair (MSP) Cables Each MSP cable shall conform to IEEE 383, UL 13, and UL 83 and shall consist of the number of pairs shown on the Drawings, of #20 AWG, 7 strand copper conductors per ASTM B8. Conductors shall have 15 mil PVC insulation and shall be twisted in 2 inch or shorter lay. Each pair shall have a 100% foil shield and a tinned copper drain wire. The MSP cable itself shall have, in addition, an overall foil shield, tinned copper


drain wire, and an outer PVC jacket. Thickness of the jacket shall be 50 mils for 8 or fewer pairs, 60 mils for 10 to 16 pairs, and 70 mils for 18 or more pairs. Provide Belden, Alpha, Dekoron, or equal.

2.3 Telephone Cable (TC) Telephone cable shall consist of [6, 12, 18, 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300 pair] [the number of pairs shown on the Drawings] with [#16, #19, #22, #26, #26] AWG conductors of solid, soft bare copper. Conductors shall have a thermoplastic compound and shall be color coded per telephone industry standards. Insulated conductors shall be twisted into pairs having varying lengths of lay. This cable core shall be covered with a non-hygroscopic core tape and a 0.005 inch copper tape shield. Shield and tape shall be covered with a petrolatum-polyethylene compound for filling all cable interstices and providing a positive moisture barrier. Filling compound shall be non-toxic and shall not irritate the skin. Cable shall have an outer jacket of black, high molecular weight polyethylene jacket resistant to abrasion, moisture, weather and environmental cracking. Cable shall be suitable for installation in ducts or direct burial and shall be manufactured to REA Specification PE 39. Provide Belden Alpha; equivalent Brand-REX; or equal.

2.4 Special Cables A. Use only coaxial cable recommended for specific applications such as radio antenna systems and

computer networks as required by the manufacturer or system supplier. Due to wide differences in electrical ratings and physical characteristics between cable types, any deviations from manufacturers recommended cable is not acceptable.

B. Special cables such as triaxial (coax), twin-axial and low capacitance computer grade cables shall be supplied where shown on the Drawings or as required by the manufacturer or supplier. Deviations must be favorably reviewed by the Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Cable Installation

A. Signal cable shall be installed by personnel who have had a minimum of 3 years experience in terminating and splicing twisted shielded conductors and co-axial cables.

B. Adequate care shall be exercised by the installers to prevent cable damage or sheath distortion. Bending radius shall not be less than 10 times the cable O.D.

C. Cables shall be continuous from initiation to termination without splices except where specifically indicated.

D. Cable shielding shall be grounded at one end only of the cable. Bonding shall be to a single ground point only. Bonding from cable to cable in multiple run installations shall not be permitted.

E. Heat shrinkable sleeving shall be installed on all cables to insulate shielding at the ungrounded cable terminations.

F. Where installed in control consoles containing power circuits, cables shall be routed a minimum of 2 inches distant. Color coding shall be strictly observed throughout the installation.

G. Manufacturer's cable pulling tension shall not be exceeded.

3.2 Conductor Splices and Terminations A. Splices: Install all conductors without splices unless necessary for installation, as approved by the

Engineer. Splices, when permitted, and terminations shall be in accordance with the splice or termination kit manufacturer's instructions. Splice cables as follows:


1. Watertight Splices: Splices in concrete pullboxes, for any type of cable or wire, shall be watertight. Make splices in low voltage cables using epoxy resin splicing kits rated for application up to 600 volts.

2. Terminal Cabinets: When splices are permitted by the Engineer, a terminal cabinet shall be installed. Terminal system shall include insulated, crimp-type connectors and barrier-type terminal boards. Coordinate the lug and boards for correct fit. All terminations shall include marker sleeves.

Shields shall be handled as a separate conductor. Use manufacturer's compression sleeve and insulated pigtail. Keep pigtail as short as possible. Terminate pigtail with marker sleeve and tug.

3. No splicing is acceptable for coaxial cables.

B. Terminations:

1. Crimp-type terminals shall be UL listed, self-insulating, sleeve type with ring or rectangular tongue, suitable for size and material of the wire to be terminated and for use with either stranded or solid wire. Spade type lugs are acceptable with telephone (TC) cable systems only.

2. Crimp with manufacturer's recommended ratchet-type tool with calibrated dyes. Hand crimping tools are not acceptable.

3. Coaxial cable and connectors shall be terminated in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Use manufacturer's recommended solder. The Contractor shall prevent misapplication of solder and termination.

3.3 Conductor Identification A. Identify each wire or cable at each termination, in each pullbox, and in each handhole using

numbered and lettered wire markers. All electrically common conductors shall have the same number. Each electrically different conductor shall be uniquely numbered. Identify panelboard circuits using the panelboard identification and circuit number. Identify motor control circuits using the equipment identification number assigned to the control unit by the motor control center manufacturer and the motor control unit terminal number. Identify other circuits as shown in the circuit schedule or as favorably reviewed by the Engineer. Conductor numbering shall be coordinated with the Interconnection Diagrams specified in Section 17010.

B. Conductors between terminals of different numbers shall have both terminal numbers shown at each conductor end. The terminal number closest to the end of the wire shall be the same as the terminal number.

3.4 Field Tests A. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on all circuits. Make these tests

before any equipment has been connected. Test the insulation with a 500 Vdc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The insulation resistance shall be 20 megohms or more. Any Cables with insulations resistance less than 20 megohms shall be replaced. Submit results for review.


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District BOXES Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16130 PAGE-1

SECTION 16130

BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Description

A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, become part of this section as if repeated herein.

B. Work Included:

1. Installation of all necessary outlet boxes for wiring devices, lighting fixtures, and signal equipment as noted on the Drawings.

2. Installation of junction boxes as required for the consolidation of conduit runs.

3. Installation of pull boxes as necessary to aid in pulling in conductor.


A. American Society for `Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publication:

1. A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products Federal Specifications (FS):

2. W C 586 Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies, and Entrance Caps, Electrical, Cast Metal

3. W J 800 Junction Box, Extension, Junction Box Cover, Junction Box (Steel, Cadmium or Zinc Coated)

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:

1. Electrical Cabinets and Boxes

2. Outlet Boxes and Fittings

3. Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings

1.3 Submittals

A. Submit material data for all fittings in accordance with the submittal requirements of Section 16010.

1.4 Locations



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Outlet, Junction And Pull Boxes

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: Sheet metal boxes shall conform to UL 50, with a hot-dipped galvanized finish conforming to ASTM A123. Outlet boxes and switch boxes shall be designed for mounting flush wiring devices. Boxes and box extension rings shall be provided with knockouts. Boxes shall be formed in one piece from carbon-steel sheets. Outlet boxes shall not be less than 4 inches square and 1 1/2 inches deep. Ceiling boxes shall withstand a vertical force of 200 pounds for 5 minutes. Wall boxes shall withstand a vertical downward force of 50 pounds for 5 minutes. Gangable and through-wall types are not acceptable. Boxes shall conform to FS W J 800D and UL 514.

1. Cast Metal Boxes: Box bodies and cover shall be cast or malleable iron with a minimum wall thickness of 1/8 inch at every point, and not less than 1/4 inch at tapped holes for rigid conduit. Bosses are not acceptable. Mounting lugs shall be provided at the back or bottom corners of the body. Covers shall be secured to the box body with No. 6 or larger brass or bronze flathead screws. Boxes shall be provided with neoprene cover gaskets. Where only cast aluminum is available for certain types of fixture boxes, an epoxy finish shall be provided. Outlet boxes shall be of the FS types. Boxes shall conform to FS W C 586C and UL 514.

2. Non-metallic Boxes: Non-metallic boxes shall be hot-compressed fiberglass, one-piece, molded with reinforcing of polyester material, with minimum wall thickness of 1/8 inch.

3. Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes: Except where NEMA 4X fiberglass or stainless steel boxes are called for, all boxes shall be fabricated from carbon steel per UL 50. Boxes shall be welded construction with all seams or joints closed and reinforced. Boxes shall be galva¬nized after construction. Boxes intended for outdoor use shall be cast metal with threaded hubs and neoprene gasketed covers, or shall be of the fiberglass reinforced polyester type of 1/8 inch minimum thickness. Cover retention shall be by corrosion resistant stainless steel screws.

B. All boxes for wiring operating at 601 volts or higher shall be constructed without hinges and shall be padlockable.

C. All boxes and cabinets shall be securely fastened to building structural members so as to prevent movement in any direction. Boxes shall not be supported by lighting fixtures, suspended ceiling support wires or freely hanging rods.

1. Covers of boxes and cabinets mounted in horizontal plane (top or bottom) shall either weigh not more than 40 pounds or shall require not more than 40 pounds of force to open or close.

2. Covers of boxes and cabinets mounted in vertical plane (front, back, sides) shall either weigh not more than 60 pounds or shall require not more than 60 pounds of force to open or close. All covers over 30 pounds shall be furnished with angle support at bottom to carry weight of cover for assembly.

3. Covers of boxes and cabinets weighing more than 30 pounds shall be provided with lifting handles or some means of grasping other than edges.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

A. Outlet Boxes:

1. Provide fixture outlets with proper fixture connectors.

2. Box mounting height shall be dictated by the wiring device enclosed.

3. Blanking covers shall be installed on all unused openings.

4. Sheet metal boxes shall be used in dry non-corrosive locations where the conduit system is routed concealed in the walls and ceilings.

5. Cast metal or molded non-metallic surface mounted boxes shall be used in exterior and/or in all wet locations.

6. Bonding jumpers shall be used around all concentric or eccentric knockouts.

7. Boxes shall be securely mounted to the building structure independent of conduits entering or exiting the boxes.

B. Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes:

1. Boxes shall be installed where required and where indicated on the Drawings.

2. Boxes shall be readily accessible.

3. Boxes shall not be installed in finished areas.

4. Pull boxes shall be provided at least every 150 feet on long straight conduit runs. Spacing shall be reduced by 50 feet for each 90 degree bend. See Section 16110 for maximum bends in conduit systems.

5. Box dimensions shall be in accordance with size and quantity of conductors and conduits entering and leaving box per NEC Article 314 requirements.

6. All boxes, both new and existing, for medium voltage systems shall be permanently marked "High Voltage" on all surfaces with red letters which are at least four inches high.


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District ELECTRICAL WIRING DEVICES Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16140 PAGE-1

SECTION 16140 ELECTRICAL WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Description

A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, become part of this section as if repeated herein.

1. Related Work: Section 16130 – Boxes

B. Work Included: This Section includes wiring devices generally consisting of switches and receptacles as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.


A. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet.

B. FS W-S-896 - Switch, Toggle.

C. NEMA WD 1 - General-Purpose Wiring Devices.

D. NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices.

1.3 Submittals

A. Submit material data for all devices to be furnished in accordance with the submittal requirements of Section 16010.

B. Locations

C. Refer to Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, for definitions of types of locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Wall Switches

A. Wall switches for lighting circuits AC general use snap switch with toggle handle, rated 20 amperes and 120-277 volts AC. Handle: plastic and colored to match existing in area.

2.2 Receptacles And Plugs

A. General use duplex receptacles shall be NEMA type 5-15R, grounding type, 15 amp, 120 volt rating. Where a single duplex receptacle is wired to a dedicated 20 ampere, 120 volt circuit, provide NEMA type 5-20R grounding type 20 ampere receptacles. Color to match others in area.


2.3 Wall Plates

A. Provide wall plates for wiring devices, with ganging and cutouts as indicated on the drawings, with metal screws for securing plates to devices. Screw heads colored to match finish of plate.

B. Cover-plates shall be of plastic, non-combustible, mar-proof thermosetting material, minimum 0.100” are required for flush mounted devices. Color of plates shall be to match others in area or beige if no other plates are in the area.

C. Device plates for surface mounted type FS or FD boxes are to be type FSK galvanized steel covers.

D. Device plates shall be corrosion resistant plastic with stainless steel screws for corrosive areas.

E. Provide telecommunications outlet faceplates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Inspection

A. Examine areas and conditions under which wiring devices are to be installed and notify DISTRICT in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 Installation

A. Install light switches and receptacles at standard elevations unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA’s “Standard of Installation,” and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

C. Before installing receptacles and switches, clean electrical boxes of dirt and debris.

D. Do not use terminals on wiring devices (hot or neutral) for feed-through connections, looped or otherwise. Make circuit connections via wire connectors and pigtails.

E. Install gasket plates for devices or system components having light emitting features, such as switches with pilot lights. Where installed on rough textured surfaces, seal plates with black self adhesive poly-foam.

F. Ground receptacles with an insulated green ground wire from device ground screw to a bolted outlet box connection. Route a continuous green equipment grounding conductor with branch circuit conductors serving isolated ground receptacles. Terminate the equipment ground on the ground bus in panelboards.


G. Wrap two layers of electrical tape around the terminals of all switches and receptacles after completion of wiring connections.

H. Install devices and wall plates flush and level.

I. Install receptacles vertically with ground slot down or where indicated on the drawings, horizontally with ground slot to the left.

J. Provide separate circuit for utility outlets.

3.3 Testing

A. Provide operational testing for all devices. Test receptacles with Hubbell 5200, Woodhead 1750, or equal, for correct polarity, proper ground connection, and wiring faults.


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District PROTECTIVE DEVICES AND SWITCHES Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16180 PAGE-1

SECTION 16180 PROTECTIVE DEVICES AND SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Description


B. Work Included: Provide all necessary labor, tools and material to install circuit protective devices as shown on the Drawings and as described in these Specifications.


A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publication:

1. Z55.1 Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publications:

1. ICS 3 Industrial Systems

2. ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

3. 250 Type 1 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)

C. Federal Specifications (FS):

1. W C 375 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Series Service, Series Trip

2. W F 1726 Class H Cartridge Fuses

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards:

1. 50 Electrical Cabinets and Boxes

2. 198C Fuses, High-Interrupting-Capacity-Current Limiting Types

3. 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Enclosures

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publication:

1. 70 National Electric Code

1.3 Submittals

A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the Product Review category of the General Conditions and the submittal requirements of Section 01300 and Section 16010.


1.4 Locations


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Fusible Switches

A. Fusible switches shall be heavy duty safety switches with the voltage ratings, current ratings, and number of poles as indicated by the Drawings. The switches shall be horsepower rated. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings. Stationary contacts shall be equipped with arc chutes. Fuse clips shall accept only Class J current limiting cartridge fuses. Where indicated on the Drawings, units shall have service entrance labels and shall be equipped with an insulated neutral lug. Switches shall be Square D, Type HU; or equal.

B. Enclosures shall be as follows:

1. Dry Locations: NEMA Type 1.

2. Corrosive Locations: NEMA Type 4X.

3. Wet locations: NEMA Type 4.

C. Nameplates: Provide an engraved plastic nameplate for each disconnect switch identifying the equipment it protects.

2.2 Fuses:

A. General: Provide one complete set of fuses of each ampere rating shown on the Drawings plus one spare set for each size shown.

B. Fuse Type: Units shall be Class J current limiting, 700 volt, in the ampere ratings shown. Plug fuses are unacceptable. Barrels shall be non-hygroscopic with brass knurled ferrules.

C. Fuses shall conform to FS W F 1726 and UL 198B, and shall carry labels showing UL class, interrupting rating, time delay characteristics, and voltage rating.

2.3 Enclosed Circuit Breakers

A. Units shall be thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers in surface mounted non-ventilated enclosures conforming to the appropriate articles of NEMA 250, as follows:

1. Indoor, Dry, Clean Locations: NEMA Type 1.

2. Outdoor, Unprotected Locations: NEMA Type 3R/12.

3. Wet Locations: NEMA Type 4.



B. Each unit shall have an external operating handle with a cover interlocking mechanism which will prevent opening of the enclosure when the operating handle is in the "ON" position. The handle shall be capable of being padlocked in either the "ON" or the "OFF" position. A breaker "tripped" position shall be clearly indicated between the "ON" and the "OFF" position.

C. Where indicated on the Drawings, enclosed breakers used as service entrance equipment shall be so labeled for such service and shall contain an insulated neutral lug. The complete unit shall conform to UL 489.

D. The circuit breakers shall be of the voltage, number of poles, frame size and ampere rating shown on the Drawings. Units shall be manually operated, trip-free, thermal-magnetic, molded case, front mounted circuit breakers.

E. Frame sizes larger than 100 amperes shall have adjustable instantaneous magnetic elements. Minimum interrupting rating shall not be less than 30,000 amps asymmetrical and the breaker shall conform to FS W C 375. Multiple breakers shall have a common trip single operating handle with three positions of indication. Circuit breaker shall be calibrated at 40°C (104°F).

F. Each breaker shall be completely enclosed in a molded case with the calibrated sensing element factory sealed to prevent tampering.

2.4 Disconnect Switches

A. Disconnect switches shall be heavy duty safety switches with the voltage ratings, current ratings, and number of poles as indicated by the Drawings. The switches shall be 600 volt type and horsepower rated. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Switches shall be Square D Type HU, H22 or equal. Enclosures shall be as follows:

1. Dry Locations: NEMA Type 1.


3. Wet Locations: NEMA Type 3R or 4X.

C. Nameplates: Provide an engraved plastic nameplate for each disconnect switch identifying the motorized equipment it controls.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

A. Install units plumb within 1/8 inch of vertical, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make sure that fuse ratings and breaker trip settings are as shown on the Drawings.

B. Mounting Heights

1. Fusible switches, switches and enclosed circuit breakers shall be centered 5' 0" above the floor in electrical rooms. Roof mounted units shall be installed so the top of the enclosure is below the top of the equipment it is supplying.


3.2 Field Tests

A. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on circuits to be energized with a line-to-neutral voltage of 120 volts or more. Make these tests after all equipment has been connected, except that equipment which may be damaged by the test voltage shall not be connected. Test the insulation with a 500 Vdc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The insulation resistance shall be 20 megohms or more. Submit results for review.

B. Continuity Tests: Perform circuit continuity tests from a low powered dc test source to operate a buzzer or bell. Tests shall be made prior to energizing the protected circuit.

C. Operating Tests: Demonstrate that the protected circuit can be manually controlled by the installed equipment.


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16400 PAGE-1

SECTION 16400 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Description A. This specification covers requirements for installing a factory built, prototype tested, field tested,

complete and operable 2 section Motor Control Center (MCC). B. The MCC will be supplied by the DISTRICT. C. Work Included: Provide all necessary labor, tools and materials, including miscellaneous lugs,

connectors, and mounting hardware, to install the MCC as shown on the Drawings and as described in these Specifications.

D. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Section 16010 become a part of this section as if repeated herein.

1.2 Reference Standards A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publications:

1. ICS-18-2001 Motor Control Centers B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards:

1. 845 Motor Control Centers C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publication:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Motor Control Center Construction A. The MCC is a free standing, totally metal enclosed NEMA 1 2 section MCC, U.L. listed. B. See the manufacturer's drawings in the Appendix.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install the motor control center level and plumb, and secure to a housekeeping concrete pad in

conformance with UBC seismic mounting requirements. Doors shall swing freely and close tightly. B. Carefully repair any damage to the structure, components or finish to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Clean all nameplates. C. Exercise care at all times after installation of motor control center to keep foreign matter, dust, dirt,

debris, and moisture out of the control center. D. Lace incoming and outgoing power conductors to resist short circuit forces. Follow manufacturer's

instructions. E. Install all labels and nameplates required by these specifications including the Arc Flash Warning

label per Appendix C.

3.2 FIELD TEST A. Test the motor control center per NETA requirements.

Monterey Peninsula Water Management District MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16400 PAGE-2

ATTACHMENT 16400A Motor Control Center Arc Flash Label


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District GROUNDING Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16450 PAGE-1

SECTION 16450 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING


A. This specification covers requirements for furnishing all labor, material, equipment, tools and services necessary for the installation, connection and testing of all grounding as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.

B. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Section 16010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, become a part of this section as if repeated herein.

C. Reference Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publication:

a. B228 Copper Clad Steel Conductors Specification 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70 National Electric Code (NEC) 3. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) Publication:

a. ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Equipment for Power Systems

1.2 Submittals Submit material or equipment data in accordance with Section 01080, Section 17010 and Section 16010 of these Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 General

A. The grounding systems shall consist of the grounding conductors, ground bus, ground fittings and clamps, ground rods, and bonding conductors to provide a complete ground system as shown on the Drawings and required by the NEC.

2.2 System Components A. Ground Conductors: Ground conductors shall be soft drawn copper, insulated when run inside

raceways, or shown on the Drawings. Sizes over No.6 AWG shall be stranded. B. Coat all ground connections except the exothermic welds with electrical joint compound, non-

petroleum type, UL listed for copper and aluminum applications. C. Ground Connections: Lugs for attachment of cables to steel enclosures shall be of the binding post

type with a 3/8 x 31/32” stud, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation

A. Ground all equipment for which a ground connection is required per NEC whether or not the ground connection is specifically shown on the Drawings.

B. Ground separately derived electrical system neutrals to the metallic water piping and structural steel, in addition to the system driven ground, per NEC requirements.

C. Provide a ground wire in every conduit as shown on the Drawings.

3.2 Testing A. Conduct ground resistance tests using a ground megohm-meter with a scale reading of 25 ohms

maximum.

Monterey Peninsula Water Management District GROUNDING Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16450 PAGE-2

B. Test methods shall conform to NETA Standard ATS using the three electrode method. Conduct tests only after a period of not less than 48 hours of dry weather.

C. Furnish to the Engineer a signed test report with recorded data for all ground cables stubbing up into the building .

D. Ground resistance shall be 25 ohms or less at each of the connection points tested above.


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District SERVICE MAIN SWITCHBOARD Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16480 PAGE-1

SECTION 16480

SERVICE MAIN SWITCHBOARD


A. This specification covers requirements for installing a factory built, prototype tested, field tested, complete and operable service main switchboard.

B. The service main switchboard will be supplied by the DISTRICT.

C. Work Included: Provide all necessary labor, tools and materials, including lugs, connectors, and mounting hardware, to install the main switchboard as shown on the Drawings and as described in these Specifications.

D. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Section 16010 become a part of this section as if repeated herein.

1.2 Reference Standards A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publications:

1. PB-2 Dead-Front Distribution Switchboards

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards:

1. 891 Dead-Front Switchboards

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publication:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Service Meter/Main Switchboard

A. The Main Switchboard is a free standing, totally metal enclosed NEMA 1 switchboard, U.L. listed for use as service entrance equipment.

B. See the manufacturer's drawings in the Appendix.


A. Install units plumb within 1/8-inch of vertical, and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Secure to a 3-inch high housekeeping concrete pad in conformance with the Drawings. Doors shall swing freely and close tightly.

B. Set circuit breaker trip function in accordance with the settings provided by the Engineer.

C. Carefully repair any damage to the structure, components or finish to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Clean all nameplates.

D. Lace incoming and outgoing power conductors to resist short circuit forces. Follow manufacturer's instructions.

E. Install all labels and nameplates required by these specifications including the Arc Flash Warning label per Appendix C.

Monterey Peninsula Water Management District SERVICE MAIN SWITCHBOARD Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16480 PAGE-2

F. Exercise care at all times after installation of switchboard to keep foreign matter, dust, dirt, debris, and moisture out of the switchboard.

G. Clean all surfaces and vacuum all sections just prior to energizing the equipment.

3.2 Field Tests A. Test per NETA standards, including the following (See Section 16010):

1. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on circuits to be energized with a line-to-neutral voltage of 120 volts or more. Make these tests after all equipment has been connected, except that equipment which may be damaged by the test voltage shall not be connected. Test the insulation with a 500 Vdc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The Insulation resistance shall be 20 megohms or more. Submit results for review and approval before energizing equipment.

2. Verify tightness of all accessible bolted connections, including cable terminations, by calibrated torque-wrench method per manufacturer’s published data.

3. Operating Tests: Demonstrate that the protected circuit can be manually controlled by the installed equipment.

4. Trip Calibration and Testing: Calibrate and demonstrate that breakers trip per the approved breaker settings as shown in Appendix C. If sequential tripping is used in the switchboard Test shall be by primary or secondary current injection in accordance with NETA standards.

5. Provide written documentation of all tests.

6. Confirm all interlocks, both electrical and key, work properly.

B. Customer Meter Test:

1. Confirm operation of the customer meter per manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Confirm communication and calibrate input from the meter to the PLC by secondary current injection and monitoring readings at the PLC.

3. After motor start-up, confirm meter is accurately reading current, kW, kVAR by comparison of meter reading with a calibrated power analyzer.

4. Provide written documentation of all tests.


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16483 PAGE-1

SECTION 16483

VARIABLE (ADJUSTABLE) FREQUENCY DRIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE A. This specification covers requirements for installing a factory built, prototype tested, field tested,

complete and operable three-phase, variable (adjustable) frequency drive (VFD) and associated output filter for the following application:

1. 1 - 600 HP, 1.15 service factor, 460V AC, 3 phase, 60 cycle, WPII vertical motor (Motor data is shown in Part 3.)

2. Service: Line shaft pump.

B. The VFD will be supplied by the DISTRICT and installed by the Contractor.

C. Work Included: Provide all necessary labor, tools and materials, including lugs, connectors, and mounting hardware, to install the main switchboard as shown on the Drawings and as described in these Specifications.

D. The DISTRICT will provide the services of a factory representative for commissioning and start-up of the unit.

E. The Contractor shall provide a qualified electrician to assist during the commissioning and start-up.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. .The adjustable frequency drives and all components is designed, manufactured and tested in

accordance with the latest applicable standards of IEC, UL, CUL, ANSI, and NEMA.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publication:


4. 70E Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Testing procedure per Section 16010, 3.07., Field Tests

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VFD CONSTRUCTION

A. See the manufacturer's drawings in the Appendix.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install the VFD and filter level and plumb, and secure to the floor in conformance with the Drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. Doors shall swing freely and close tightly.

B. VFD grounding and bonding shall be as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer.

Monterey Peninsula Water Management District VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16483 PAGE-2

C. Install all labels and nameplates required by these specifications including the Arc Flash Warning label per Attachment 16483A.

D. Carefully repair any damage to the structure, components or finish to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Clean all nameplates.

E. Exercise care at all times after installation of VFD and filters to keep foreign matter, dust, dirt, debris, and moisture out of the equipment.

F. Install all labels and nameplates required by these specifications including the Arc Flash Warning label per Appendix C.

3.2 FIELD TEST A. Test the VFD per NETA and manufacturer's requirements.

B. Assist the factory representative with start-up and commissioning of the VFD.

C. VFD shall be operated over the entire speed range to confirm pump speed verses flow operation. Data points shall be recorded at a minimum of 5 speeds from minimum to full speed.

PART 4 - MOTOR DATA

Horsepower 600

Volts 460

Frequency 60

RPM at Full Load 1780

Efficiency at Full Load 95.8

Power Factor at Full Load 88.5

Amps at Full Load 663

Service Factor 1.15

Efficiency at S. F. 95.7

Power Factor at S.F. 88.8

Amps at S.F. 761

Locked Rotor Amps 4948

Lock Rotor Code H

** END OF SECTION *

Monterey Peninsula Water Management District LIGHTING Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 16500 PAGE-1

SECTION 16500

LIGHTING


A. This specification covers requirements for furnishing a lighting system complete, including fixtures, lamps, standards, bases, hangers, reflectors, glassware, lenses, auxiliary equipment, ballasts, sockets, and photoelectric cells as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.

B. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Section 16010 become a part of this section as if repeated herein.

1.2 Reference Standards A. Federal Regulations

1. Title 21 Performance Standards for Light Emitting Products CFR 1040

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards

1. 57 Electric Lighting Fixtures

1.3 Submittals A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the Product Review category of the General

Conditions and the submittal requirements of Section 16010.

B. Submit photometric curves for each fixture configuration proposed. Substitutions will not be considered unless the photometric distribution curve indicates the proposed fixture is equal to or exceeds the specified luminaire.

C. Submit shop drawings showing proposed methods for mounting interior lighting fixtures which are not attached directly to the ceiling or wall.

D. Submit certification that fixture mountings meet seismic zone 4 requirements.

1.4 Guarantee Lamps that fail within 90 days after acceptance by the District shall be replaced at no cost to the District.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Fixtures

A. Fixtures shall be of the types, wattages and voltages shown on the Drawings, comply with UL 57, and be UL classified and labeled for intended use.

B. Luminaire wire, and the current carrying capacity thereof, shall be in accordance with the NEC.

C. Luminaires and lighting equipment shall be delivered to the project site complete, with suspension accessories, aircraft cable, stems, canopies, hickeys, castings, sockets, holders, ballasts, diffusers, louvers, frames, recessing boxes and related items, including supports and braces.

2.2 Ballasts A. Fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be Underwriters Laboratories "P" rated. Ballasts shall be CBM

certified and bear the UL label. [Ballasts shall be certified by the California Energy Commission.] Ballasts shall be General Electric Maxi-Miser II, Advance Mark II, or equal.


B. Solid State Electronic Ballasts: where specifically indicated on the Drawings, provide high frequency electronic Class P ballasts. Input watts shall not exceed 72 with "E" rated 3,700 lumen lamps operated at 25,000 Hertz. Sound rating shall be "A". Crest Factor shall be 1.6. Ballast Factor shall be 0.78. Unit shall be FCC Certified and UL listed. Minimum lamp starting temperature shall be 50°F. An internal MOV shall provide transient protection and a 3 year extended warranty shall be provided.

C. Ballasts in luminaires for exterior use shall provide reliable starting of lamps at 0°F at 90% of the nominal line voltage. All locations, other than totally enclosed rooms, shall be considered exterior.

D. Ballasts producing excessive noise (above 36 dB) or vibration will be rejected and shall be replaced at no expense to the District.

2.3 Lamps A. General: Lamps shall be new at the time of acceptance and shall be General Electric, or equal.

B. Fluorescent lamps shall be the rapid start type, high efficiency, 3,500 Kelvin in color. F40 lamps shall be General Electric Watt-Miser II, Sylvania Super Saver, or equal.

C. Type "E" Fluorescent Lamps: where 25,000 Hertz electronic ballasts are specified, 40 watt Type FE40 lamps shall be used having a rated life of 15,000 hours, an initial lumen output of 3,700 and a color temperature of 4,200 Kelvin.

D. High pressure sodium lamps shall have an outer bulb with a diffuse finish and shall be suitable for burning in any position.

E. Metal halide lamps shall conform to 21CFR 1040.30.


A. General:

1. All fixtures and luminaires shall be clean and lamps shall be operable at the time of acceptance.

2. Install luminaires in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, complete with lamps, ready for operation as indicated.

3. Align, mount, and level the luminaires uniformly.

4. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for equipment. Where an indicated position conflicts with equipment locations, change the location of the luminaire by the minimum distance necessary.

5. Outdoor fixtures and luminaires shall be positioned to minimize glare and light from impacting on adjacent properties. If required by the District additional hoods or shields shall be provided for the fixtures or luminaires.

B. Mounting and Supports:

1. Mounting heights shall be as shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise shown, mounting height shall be measured to the centerline of the outlet box for a wall mounted fixture and to the bottom of the fixture for all other types. Construct light fixture foundation as shown on the plans.

2. For suspended luminaires, the mounting heights shall provide clearances between the bottoms of the luminaires and the finished floors as indicated.

3. Luminaire supports shall be anchored to the structural slab or structural members as indicated. Supports shall maintain the luminaire positions after relamping and cleaning.


4. Surface mounted fixtures shall be rigidly bracketed from mounting surfaces. Luminaires installed in rows shall have a non-cumulative dimensional alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Nipples carrying wiring between luminaires shall be water-tight.

5. Pendant luminaires shall be provided with 7/32 inch aircraft cable to assure a plumb installation and shall have a minimum 25 degree clear swing from horizontal in all directions.

C. Mount fluorescent fixtures level and securely support from the ceiling. Provide earthquake clips for fixtures mounted in suspended ceilings.

D. Pendant Fixture Mounting:

1. In building areas with level ceilings, provide stems and canopies to match fixtures.

2. In building areas with sloping ceilings, provide flexible fixture mounting canopies and stems to match fixtures.

3. In other areas, provide flexible fixture hangers, Crouse-Hinds Type ARB, Appleton Type GS, or equal.

E. All circuits shall be checked for shorts and grounds before the system is energized. All test results shall be recorded and transmitted to the Engineer.

3.2 Inspection A. If site power is not available, Contractor shall provide temporary power to the transformer feeding the

lighting.

B. All switches shall be operated to confirm they operate properly.

C. A night walk through shall be performed by the District to review the adequacy of the lighting for the station. Contractor shall reposition fixtures to correct any deficiencies found.


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

Electrical Equipment Installation Project GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 17010

PAGE-1

0BSECTION 17010

1BINSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - 2BGENERAL

1.1 5BScope

Work Included:

1. Provide all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and be responsible for all labor required to

complete the installation, startup and operational testing of a complete and operable

Instrumentation and Control (I&C) System as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

2. Provide all the necessary equipment components and interconnections along with the services of

manufacturers' engineering representatives necessary to ensure that the District receives a

completely integrated and operational I&C system as herein specified.

3. Provide all terminations for wiring at field mounted instruments, equipment enclosures, alarm and

status contacts.

4. Provide all Instrumentation and Control wire required for a fully functioning Instrumentation and

Controls System as shown on the Drawings except for wire specifically specified in Division 16.

See Section 16010, Paragraph 1.1.

5. See Section 16010 for the facilities to be included in the contract.

Work Specified in Other Divisions:

1. Process piping, installation of inline instrumentation, and other mechanical work and equipment

as specified in Divisions 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15.

2. Instruments and controls which are not directly used for process control, i.e., those provided as

part of a package system, such as the HVAC system, etc. as specified in Divisions 11, 12, 13, 14,

15, or 16.

3. Division 16 work, including all instrumentation and controls conduit, and only that wire specified

in Division 16. Refer to Division 16 Specifications for specific requirements for wire, conduit,

grounding, and other electrical equipment.

1.2 6BReference Standards

A. Instrumentation Society of America (ISA) Publications:

1. S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams

2. S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary

Elements and Control Valves

1.3 7BSystem Responsibility

A. General: The I&C equipment as specified in this Division shall be considered an integrated system.

Entire system installation including calibration, verification, startup, operation testing, and training

shall be performed by qualified personnel, possessing all the necessary equipment, and who have had

experience performing similar installations. Instrumentation and control systems drawings are

diagrammatic only; it is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain technical data, determine

performance requirements, develop instrumentation detail installation designs, and coordinate the

selection of specified equipment with Contractor supplied equipment to meet the design conditions

stated.



SECTION 17010

PAGE-2

Compatibility: The Contractor shall be responsible to see that all components of the instrumentation system,

including equipment specified under other Divisions, are completely compatible and function properly as a

system. Provide such additional equipment, accessories, etc., as are necessary to meet these objectives at no

cost to the District.

B. Coordination: For control components, devices, and systems shown on the Instrumentation

Drawings, the Contractor shall:

1. Verify the correctness of installation of all instruments.

2. Verify that the proper type, size, and number of control wires with their conduits are provided.

3. Verify that proper electric power circuits provided for all components and systems.

4. Supervise final electric signal connections to all process instrumentation and control equipment.

5. Contractor shall tag and record all cables at the control cabinet end. Termination will be by

Others.

6. Adjust, startup, and test all process instrumentation and control equipment.

7. Provide specified documentation and training.

1.4 8BQuality Assurance

Standard of Quality: The Contractor shall provide equipment of the types and sizes specified which

has been demonstrated to operate successfully. Provide equipment which is new and of recent proven

design.

1.5 9BDrawings

A. Drawings: The Instrumentation Drawings are diagrammatic; exact locations of instrumentation

products shall be determined in the field with the District. Except where special details are used to

illustrate the method of installation of a particular piece or type of equipment or material, the

requirements or descriptions in this Specification shall take precedence in the event of conflict.

1. Locations of equipment, inserts, anchors, instruments, panels, junction boxes, pull boxes,

manholes, conduits, stub-ups, fittings, power and convenience outlets, and ground wells are

approximate unless dimensioned; verify locations with the District prior to installation. Field

verify scaled dimensions on Drawings.

2. Review the Drawings and Specification Divisions of other trades and perform the instrumentation

work that will be required for the installations.

3. Should there be a need to deviate from the Instrumentation Drawings and Specifications, submit

written details and reasons for all changes to the District for favorable review and written

approval, prior to any changes being implemented.

4. Resolution of varying interpretations of the Contract Documents shall conform to the General

Specifications.

5. In addition, the Process and Instrumentation Diagrams show schematically the operating logic

(concept) of the I&C system. The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing the I&C

scheme indicated by the Drawings and specified by these specifications..

1.6 10BSubmittals

A. Submit manuals, shop drawings and cutsheets for each instrument for approval in accordance with the

General Specifications.

B. Interconnection Diagrams: Prior to installation of wire, submit point-to-point type interconnection

diagrams for each instrument. Include electric panel and circuit numbers for all sources of 120 Vac



SECTION 17010

PAGE-3

power. Show wiring interconnections between telemetry cabinet, instrument, motor control center,

motor combination starter, valve actuator, and other field-mounted device or junction box. Include

junction box terminal numbers and wire/cable numbers.

1. Show conduit pullboxes with appropriate tag names and/or numbers.

C. As-Built Drawings: Submit "As-Built" process and instrumentation diagrams for all work included in

Division 17, in accordance with the General Conditions. Submit complete schematics and wiring

diagrams or drawings to include all installed field and panel conduit routing, mounting details,

interconnection diagrams with cable, wire, and termination numbers. Interconnection diagrams shall

be coordinated with the conductor identification requirements in Sections 16120, LOW VOLTAGE

WIRE AND CABLE, and 16124, SIGNAL CABLE. Provide copies of all CAD produced drawings

on magnetic media in AutoCAD DWG format.

Furnish 3 copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, including Instruction Manuals and Part

Lists, for all equipment provided under Division 17.

1. The following information, as applicable, for each instrument, equipment, subsystem and/or

control loop shall be included:

a. Equipment/instrument number and name.

b. Specifications sufficiently detailed for reordering exact duplicates of the original items.

c. Installation instructions, procedures, sequences, tolerances, and precautions.

d. Operational procedures.

e. Shutdown procedures.

f. Maintenance, calibration, and repair instructions.

g. Parts list and spare parts recommendations.

h. Calibration curves, rating tables, and any other data showing the relationship of the variable

inputs and the calibrated output of all measuring devices and controlled equipment.

i. Manufacturer's name, local representative’s address and telephone number.

j. Bind information in standard three ring binders, in a logical sequence, with indexed tabs

between each type of instrument or equipment.

1.7 11BInstrument Index

The index of instruments in the Appendix lists all pertinent information about instruments identified for

the contract. The index is a comprehensive listing of devices but shall not be construed as a Bill of

Materials or as a complete listing. For example, equipment procured as a packaged unit or assembled in

the field to perform a standardized function (such as water seals) may contain instruments, which are not

listed. Upon request, a copy of the Spreadsheet can be provided.

PART 2 - 3BPRODUCTS

2.1 12BMaterials and Standard Specifications

Provide instruments, equipment and materials suitable for service conditions and meeting standard

specifications such as ANSI, ASTM, ISA, and SAMA. The intent of this Specification is to secure

instruments and equipment of a uniform quality and manufacture throughout the plant. All instruments in

the plant of the same type shall be made by the same manufacturer.



SECTION 17010

PAGE-4

2.2 13BNameplates

A. For each piece of equipment, provide a manufacturer's nameplate showing his name, location, the

pertinent ratings and the model designation.

Identify each piece of equipment and related controls with a rigid laminated engraved phenolic nameplate.

Engrave nameplates with the inscriptions indicated on the Drawings and, if not so indicated, with the

equipment name. Securely fasten nameplates in place using two stainless steel screws or, where favorably

reviewed by the District, with epoxy cement. Where no inscription is indicated on the Drawings, furnish

nameplates with an appropriate inscription furnished by the District upon prior request by the Contractor.

Each control device, including pushbuttons, control switches, and indicating lights, shall have an integral

legend plate or nameplate indicating the device function. These shall be inscribed as indicated on the

Drawings or as favorably reviewed by the District.

Provide CAUTION or SAFETY nameplates to alert operators of special conditions that may result in faulty

equipment operations or potential unsafe situations, such as automatic starting of equipment or foreign

voltages present.

Devices containing batteries that must be replaced periodically must be clearly identified. Nameplates are not

required if the device senses and displays a low battery warning.

2.3 14BName Tags

All instrumentation and equipment items or systems shall be identified by nametags. Field equipment

shall be tagged with the assigned instrumentation tag number listed in the Instrument Index.

Nametags shall be stainless steel with engraved or stamped black characters of 3/16 inch minimum

height. Tags shall be attached to equipment with a tag holder and stainless steel band with a worm screw

clamping device. Use 20 gauge stainless steel wire where banding is impractical. For field panels or

large equipment cases use stainless steel screws; however, such permanent attachment shall not be on an

ordinarily replaceable part.

2.4 15BEquipment Operating Conditions

All equipment shall be rated for normal operating performance with varying operating conditions over the

following minimum ranges:

A. Electrical Power: 120 volts ac ±10%, 60 Hz, unregulated, except where specifically stated otherwise

on the Drawings or in the Specifications, or when two-wire, loop-powered devices are specified.

Field Instruments:

1. Outdoor Areas:

Ambient Temperature: +32°F to +100°F

Ambient Relative Humidity: 5% to 100%

Weather: Rain

2. Indoor Unheated Areas:


Ambient Relative Humidity: 5% to 95%, non-condensing

3. Indoor Environmentally Controlled Areas:


Ambient Relative Humidity: 10% to 90%, non-condensing



SECTION 17010

PAGE-5

2.5 16BEquipment Locations

A. Provide equipment and materials suitable for the types of locations in which they are located as

defined under Division 16.

B. All equipment specified for field mounting shall be weatherproof and splash proof as a minimum.

C. If electrical or electronic components are contained within the equipment, they shall be housed in

NEMA 4 cases, NEMA 4X in corrosive locations, and NEMA 7 in hazardous locations unless noted

otherwise.

2.6 17BSignal Transmission

A. Discrete: All alarm and status signals shall be 24 VDC unless specified otherwise on the Instrument

Index or on the Drawings.

2.7 18BFasteners

A. Fasteners for securing equipment to walls, floors and the like shall be either hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication or stainless steel.

B. Provide stainless steel fasteners in corrosive or outdoor locations.

C. When fastening to walls, floors, and the like, provide capsule anchors, not expansion shields. Size

capsule anchors to meet load requirements. Minimum size capsule anchor bolt is 3/8 inch.

PART 3 - 4BEXECUTION

3.1 19BProduct Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. Box, crate, or otherwise enclose and protect instruments and equipment during shipment, handling,

and storage. Keep all equipment dry and covered from exposure to weather, moisture, corrosive

liquids and gases or any element, which could degrade the equipment.

Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage.

B. Notify the District in writing in the event that any equipment or material is damaged. Obtain prior

favorable review by the District before making repairs to damaged products.

3.2 20BInspection

A. In execution of the work defined in Section 17010, the Contractor shall be responsible for the

following services:

1. Inspection of each instrument and piece of equipment for damage, defects, completeness, and

correct operation before start-up.

2. Inspection of previously installed related work and verification that it is ready for installation of

instruments and equipment.

3.3 21BMountings

A. Mount and install equipment as indicated. Mount field instruments on pipe mounts or other similar

means in accordance with suppliers' recommendation. Where mounted in control panels, mount

according to requirements of that section. Construct equipment foundations as shown on the Plans.

Equipment specified for field mounting shall be suitable for direct pipe mounting or surface mounting

and non-inline indicators and equipment with calibration adjustments or requiring periodic inspection

shall be mounted not lower than 3 feet nor higher than 5 feet above grade, and the like. Instruments

designated to be installed below hatches shall have covers and calibration equipment accessible from

the hatch.



SECTION 17010

PAGE-6

Manufacturers of all process instrument panels and instruments shall certify that their equipment,

when installed and anchored, will safely transfer seismic forces through the equipment to the

anchorage without failure of equipment or components.

All devices shall be accessible to operators for servicing, operating, reading, etc. The Contractor shall

provide platforms or remote meters and/or control switches to assure devices are accessible for

operation.

3.4 22BField Wiring

A. Ring out signal wiring prior to termination. Verify wire number and terminations are satisfactory per

Section 16120 or 16124. The wire numbers shall be designated on the Drawing “As-Builts”.

3.5 23BElectromagnetic Interference (EMI)

A. Construction shall proceed in a manner which minimizes the introduction of noise into the I&C

System.

Cross signal wires and wires carrying ac power or control signals at right angles.

Separate signal wires from wires carrying ac power or switched AC/DC control signals within control

panels and terminal cabinets , as much as possible. Provide the following minimum separations

within such equipment unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings:

UPower Wiring CapacityU USeparation (inches)

120 volts ac or 10 amps 12



3.6 24BGrounding

A. Proper grounding of equipment and systems in this Division is critical, especially where the PLC and

associated networks and peripherals are involved. The Drawings and Division 16, Section 16450

specify safety grounding for all equipment in this Division.

Ground all signal shields, signal grounds, and power supplies at an isolated, ground single bus within

each rack or enclosure. The far ends of these signal cables must be disconnected (floated) from any

ground to prevent ground loops.

3.7 25BPreparation

A. Ensure that installation areas are clean and that concrete or masonry operations are completed prior to

installing instruments and equipment. Maintain the areas in a broom-clean condition during

installation operations.

Panels shall be protected during construction to prevent damage to front panel devices and prevent

dust accumulation in the intervals. Other protective measures (lamp, strip heaters, etc.) shall be

included as weather conditions dictate.

3.8 26BInstrument Calibration

A. Provide the services of instrumentation technicians, tools, and equipment to field calibrate each

instrument to its specified accuracy in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and

instructions for calibration.

B. Each instrument shall be calibrated at 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of span using test instruments

to simulate inputs and read outputs that are rated to an accuracy of at least 5 times greater than the

specified accuracy of the instrument being calibrated, unless waived in writing by the District.



SECTION 17010

PAGE-7

C. Submit a written report to the District on each instrument certifying that it has been calibrated to its

published specified accuracy. This report shall include a listing of the published specified accuracy,

permissible tolerance at each point of calibration, calibration reading as finally adjusted within

tolerances, defects noted, correction action required, and correction made. This report shall list

instrument readings in actual engineering units such as Gallons per Minute, Feet, psi, etc., rather than

0 to 100%.

3.9 27BSystem Verification

A. Provide the services of field experienced instrumentation technicians/electricians to verify that each

instrument is operational and performing its intended function within system tolerance.

Verification will include, but may not be limited to:

Verify that each instrument is operational and performing its intended function within manufacturer’s

tolerance. Simulate inputs at 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% of span or with on-off inputs, as

applicable.

Cause malfunctions to sound alarms or switch to standby to check system operation.

Check all systems thoroughly for correct operation.

Correction of all defects and malfunctions disclosed by tests.

Use new parts and materials as required and approved and retest.

Submit a report certifying completion of verification of each instrument system.

.

3.10 28BFinal Operational Testing and Acceptance

A. Provide the services of field experienced instrumentation technicians/electricians to assist District's

personnel during startup of the plant process. The purpose of this assistance is to support in making

final adjustments of settings on the instrument systems prior to performing the demonstration and

final operational testing.

B. The intent of this test is to demonstrate and certify the operational interrelationship of the

instrumentation systems. This testing shall include, but not be limited to, taking process variables to

their limits (simulated or process) to verify all alarms, failure interlocks, and operational interlocks.

C. If defects or malfunctions occur, immediately correct defects and malfunctions with approved

methods and materials and repeat the testing.

D. Upon completion of final operational testing, submit the test results and a certified report indicating

that all required system tests have been completed satisfactorily and the systems meet all the

functional requirements of their applicable specifications.

E. Each test shall be witnessed, documented, and signed off upon completion by the District. Notify the

District in writing a minimum of 48 hours prior to the proposed date for commencing the test.

** END OF SECTION *



SECTION 17010

PAGE-8

Monterey Peninsula Water Management District CONTROL STATIONS Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 17210 PAGE-1

SECTION 17210

CONTROL STATIONS


A. Work included: Furnish and install the well control stations and equipment foundations as shown on the drawings, and as specified herein.

1.2 Quality Assurance A. All components shall be new and of the best quality, constructed of durable materials, and designed

for long life in continuous service with a minimum of maintenance.

B. All mechanisms shall be enclosed in such a manner that they shall be protected against damage from dust, moisture, or striking by external objects.

C. Where shown in the Specifications or on the drawings, components shall comply with the referenced codes and standards.

1.3 Submittals A. Submit the following:

1. Outline dimension drawings

2. Assembly drawings

3. Shop detail drawings

4. Wiring diagrams

5. Parts lists and costs

6. Instruction manuals

7. Test and verification reports

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 General

A. Quality assurance:

1. Unless otherwise approved by the District, all panels shall be constructed with external dimensions as shown on the Drawings. The panel construction and all interior wiring shall be in strict accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC), state and local codes, and in conformance with applicable specifications of NEMA, ANSI, UL, and ICECA. Instrument arrangement shall be as shown, with minor modifications as may be required for the particular equipment furnished. Modifications shall be subject to the approval of the District.

2. All panels shall be completely fabricated, instruments installed and wired at the factory.

B. Nameplates:

1. Machine engraved laminated white or colored plastic nameplates with black lettering shall be provided for front panel mounted equipment. Nameplate engraving shall be as shown on the Drawings. Nameplates shall be attached to the panel with a minimum of two self-tapping Type 316 stainless steel sheet metal screws or with epoxy to maintain NEMA rating, if applicable. The Contractor agrees that nameplate wording may be changed without additional cost or time if


changes are identified in the review comments of the first or second submittal required under the Contract.

2. Machine-embossed, adhesive-backed nameplates shall identify tag number of instruments, terminal boards, relays, fused terminal points, and circuit breakers inside panels. Prior to mounting adhesive nameplate, the intended mounting surface shall be cleaned with lacquer thinner or alcohol. Panel-mounted devices shall have nameplates identifying tag number on the inside of the panel.

C. Control panel electrical:

1. Interior panel wiring:

a. Power and control wiring shall be single conductor stranded copper NFPA No. 70 Type MTW No. 14 AWG minimum.

b. Wiring shall be supported independently of terminations by lacing to panel support structure or by slotted flame-retardant plastic wiring channels. Wiring channels shall comply with UL 94, Type V-l. Wiring channel fill shall not exceed 40 percent of cross section area.

c. Wiring shall comply with the requirements of NEC as a minimum. Panelwork shall contain no exposed connections, and adjustments to equipment shall be made without exposing these terminals. Power and control wiring operating above 80 VAC or dc shall be carried in covered channels separate from low voltage signal circuits.

d. Terminal blocks: Terminal blocks shall meet the following requirements:

i. Provide sufficient terminations to accommodate both present and future needs. Wire all spare or unused panel mounted elements to their panels' terminal blocks. Provide the greater of 10 percent of all connected terminals or four unused spare terminals.

ii. Each terminal strip shall have a unique identifying alphanumeric code at one end and a vinyl marking strip running the entire length of the terminal strip with a unique number for each terminal. Numbers shall be machine printed and 1/8 inch high. Terminal strip codes and terminal numbers shall comply with numbers listed on the wiring and interconnection diagrams.

iii. Size all terminal block components to allow insertion of all necessary wire sizes and types. Supply terminal blocks with marking system allowing the use of preprinted or field-marked tags. Provide listed terminal blocks manufactured by suppliers as shown on the Drawings, or approved equal.

e. Field connections shall be to separate terminal blocks. Terminal blocks for field terminations shall be in a separate part of the panel close to where the field cables enter the panel.

f. Circuits shall be fused where shown. Fuses shall be 1/4 by 1-1/4 inch. Fuses for 120 VAC & 24 Vdc circuits shall be fast-acting glass tube type rated 1/8 or 1/10 amp for 4-20 and 10-50 mA loops and 3 amps for the power supply to individual instruments or as noted on drawings. Fuse holders shall be single circuit lever fusible terminal block as shown on drawings.

2. Power distribution within panels:

a. Panels shall have internal power distribution as shown on the drawings.

b. Circuit breakers and power distribution terminals and fuses shall be by manufacturers as shown on the Drawings.

3. Signal wiring: Analog signal cables shall be separated from power and control within a panel and shall cross at right angles where necessary. Signal cable shall be No. 18 AWG, 7 x 28 stranded copper twisted shielded pair or triad with a 100 percent, aluminum-polyester shield, rated 60oC.


For panels containing circuits less than 300 volts, signal cable shall be rated 300 V minimum and shall be Belden Type 8762 or 8772, or approved equal. For panels containing circuits of 300 to 600 volts, signal cable shall be rated at 600 V and shall be Belden No. 16 AWG Type 8760 or 8770, or approved equal.

4. Signal distribution within panels:

a. 4 to 20 mA signals shall be distributed within panels as 1 to 5 V signals.

b. Signals distributed outside panels shall be isolated 4 to 20 mA signals.

c. Instrument loop field wires shall terminate on panel terminal strips in the control panel. Instruments in the same loop shall be wired to panel terminal strips with spare terminal enough for one additional instrument. No looping from instrument to instrument.

d. In the event of a conflict between instrumentation manufacturer's cable specifications and this Specification, the instrumentation manufacturer's specifications shall take precedence.

5. 2-, 3-, and 4-position, selector switches:

a. Position switches shall be maintained contact type, rated 10 A minimum at 120 VAC. Control knob shall be black, NEMA 4X, and shall show clearly the control switch position.

b. Selector switch shall be complete with legend plate, and with contact blocks as shown on the drawings.

c. Acceptable products: Allen Bradley Bulletin 800H, or approved equal.

2.2 Main Control Panel A. Construction:

1. Panel enclosures shall be as specified on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Assembly

A. The installation of switches and associated components shall conform to the drawings and as specified.

B. Equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, and firmly secured to the surface on which it is mounted.

C. Control device identification:

1. All control devices, including instrumentation shall be labeled on the rear of the control panel with their proper tag numbers as shown on the wiring drawings.

D. Inspection and testing:

1. Testing shall be coordinated per the requirements of Section 17110, Part 3.

3.2 Installation A. The control panel shall be set level and plumb. Construct slab foundations as shown on the Plans.

B. Any damage to the structure, components or finish shall be carefully repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

C. Conduit entries into the panel shall facilitate separation and routing of the different voltage levels within the panel.

1. All conduit penetrations shall be weatherproof, using Meyers hubs or equal.

Monterey Peninsula Water Management District LEVEL TRANSMITTERS Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 17420 PAGE-1

SECTION 17420

LEVEL TRANSMITTERS


A. Work Included: Furnish and install level transmitters and level switches, as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. General Electrical Requirements - Section 16010

2. Instrumentation And Controls, General Requirements - Section 17010

1.2 Quality Assurance C. All components shall be of the best quality, constructed of durable materials, and designed for

long life in continuous service with a minimum of maintenance.

D. All mechanisms shall be enclosed in such a manner that they shall be protected against damage from dust, moisture, or striking by external objects.

E. All working parts shall be of corrosion resistant materials for the specific material to be measured.

1.3 Submittals A. General:

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 17010, Article 1.6 of these specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Well Level Transmitters– (Pressure Transducer)

A. General: The transducer shall sense the liquid level or pressure variation and convert these variations into a linear analog 4-20 mA output. Two transducers are required; one each for Wells ASR-3 and ASR-4

B. Required Features:

1. The liquid level or pressure shall be sensed by a pressure transducer certified by FM, UL, and CSA for installation in a non-hazardous area.

2. When specified, the level transducer shall be the vented type. The vent tube shall be integral to the signal lead cable and constructed to protect the vent tube from crushing.

3. Level ranges shall be factory set as shown on the Instrument List.

4. Static Accuracy: ±1.0 percent (includes the combined errors due to nonlinearity, hysteresis and non-repeatability on a Best Fit Straight Line basis at 25ºC per ISA S51.1).

5. The pressure sensing element shall incorporate a four active arm Wheatstone Bridge strain gage diffused directly into a titanium diaphragm.

6. The sensing element shall exhibit no measurable hysteresis, withstand overpressures up to 200 percent of range pressure and have a life expectancy of 20 million cycles.

Monterey Peninsula Water Management District LEVEL TRANSMITTERS Electrical Equipment Installation Project SECTION 17420 PAGE-2

7. The transducer shall be capable of operating from a DC supply, between 9 and 30 VDC, unregulated.

8. The transducer shall have on-board signal conditioning and include over voltage and reverse polarity protection.

9. Wetted materials shall be Titanium.

10. Transducer diameter shall be 1-inch maximum.

11. Transducer cable shall be factory-attached molded polyurethane jacketed water block cable with non-stretch stiffeners, cable shield wrap and vent tube for atmospheric reference with moisture barrier.

12. Transducer shall have an anti-snag cone to prevent cable from "hanging-up" on foreign debris.

13. Transducer cable length shall be 590 feet.

C. A Desiccant or equivalent assembly shall be provided to prevent condensation from forming in the vent tubing. The desiccant shall be mounted in a junction box with terminals for the sensor cable. See the Drawings for details.

Product and Manufacturer: The level monitoring systems shall be Druck PTX1230 as manufactured by GE. (No substitutions.)


A. Inspect each level switch for any damage and confirm specifications match with its intended use.

B. Check-out each switch to confirm it activates properly before installation.

C. After inspection and checkout, install the level instruments in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on Drawings.

D. Set operating and alarm levels as shown on the Drawings or instrument list.


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District PRESSURE SWITCHES, TRANSMITTERS Electrical Equipment Installation Project AND PRESSURE GAUGES SECTION 17510 PAGE-1

SECTION 17510

PRESSURE SWITCHES, TRANSMITTERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES


A. Furnish and install insert pressure switches and pressure gauges as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. General Electrical Requirements - Section 16010

2. Instrumentation And Controls, General Requirements - Section 17010

1.2 Quality Assurance A. The manufacturer shall have been regularly engaged in design and manufacture of pressure gauges

and switches of comparable size, type and rating for at least three years.

1.3 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 17010, Article 1.6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS ELECTRONIC

A. General: Electronic indicating type pressure transmitters shall convert a gauge or absolute pressure measurement to a 4-20 mA dc linear electrical output signal capable of transmission into at least a 600 ohm maximum load at 24 Vdc or less. Signal and power transmission shall be provided on a single pair of wires. Operating ambient temperature limits shall be at least 40° to +82°C.

B. Range shall be as indicated in the Instrument Index. Over-range protection shall be at least 1 1/2 times span without degradation of accuracy. Reference accuracy shall be ±1/2 percent or better.

C. Construction: The transmitter enclosure shall be NEMA 4X rated except where explosion proof is required as noted on the Drawings. The process connection for clean liquid service shall be 1/4 inch NPT compatible with root valve specified in the piping material section. Enclosure and wetted surface material shall be corrosion resistant and suitable for the process fluid.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rosemount Model 3051T per the instrument list

2.2 Pressure Gauges

A. Pressure gauge:

1. ANSI B40.1 Grade A accuracy:

a. +1% of span in middle half of range.

b. 2% for rest of scale.

2. Bronze bourdon tube.

3. Stainless steel case with threaded ring.

4. 1/4" NPT stem mount.

5. 3-1/2" dial. Polycarbonate face.

6. See the Instrument list for tag numbers and pressure ranges.

Monterey Peninsula Water Management District PRESSURE SWITCHES, TRANSMITTERS Electrical Equipment Installation Project AND PRESSURE GAUGES SECTION 17510 PAGE-2

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Ashcroft

2. Or approved equal.

2.3 Pressure Switches A. General -

1. Pressure switches shall be factory assembled and in accordance with the instrument list for pressure ranges and set-points.

2. Pressure switches shall be mounted on the root valves shown on the Mechanical Drawings.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Custom Control Sensors

2. Ashcroft

3. Or approved equal.


A. Install the instrumentation per the manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the drawings.

B. Conduit runs and flexible conduit connection shall be installed to prevent moisture from flowing into the instrument.

C. Contractor shall provide insulating bushings between any copper/brass valves and steel nipples connected to the pressure devices to prevent galvanic corrosion.

D. Pressure gauges and switches in chlorine service shall be mounted on diaphragm seals to prevent corrosion of the pressure diaphragm.

E. Installation, testing, calibration, validation, startup and instruction shall be in accordance with Section 17010.


Monterey Peninsula Water Management District MISC. INSTRUMENTATION & Electrical Equipment Installation Project ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SECTION 17590 PAGE-1

SECTION 17590 MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTATION & ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


A. Work included:

1. Furnish and install miscellaneous electrical equipment and instrumentation as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. Furnish miscellaneous instrumentation as specified herein.

1. Related work specified elsewhere:

a. Section 16010

b. Section 17010

C. Quality Assurance

1. All components shall be of the best quality, constructed of durable materials, and designed for long life in continuous service with a minimum of maintenance.

D. Submittals

1. See Section 16010

2. See Section 17010

E. Protection

1. All mechanisms shall be enclosed in such a manner that they shall be protected against damage from dust, moisture, or striking by external objects.

1.2 PRODUCTS

A. Provide miscellaneous electrical and instrumentation as shown on the drawings.

B. Equipment shall be by manufacturers shown on the drawings or a prior approved substitute.

1.3 EXECUTION

A. Installation

1. The installation of all electrical equipment and instrumentation and associated components shall conform to the drawings, manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified.

2. Equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, and firmly secured to the surface on which it is mounted.

3. All instruments and instrument groups shall have all internal connections factory piped and wired.

4. Terminals shall be conveniently located to facilitate external connections.

5. Install all labels and nameplates required by these specifications.


Appendix A

Allen-Bradley MCC

Square D Main Switch Board

Allen-Bradley VFD

WStone

Text Box

Appendix A Motor Control Center MCC

2

Product Overview

2

Industry-Leading Motor Control Centers Delivering Safety, Performance and Reliability

The CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center (MCC) combines rugged durability and premium quality, meeting UL and NEMA standards. CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs integrate control and power in one centralized package with a wide variety of motor control options. This industry-leading motor control center has delivered the safety, performance and reliability you need for over 35 years.

• DesignsarecertifiedtoUL845andmeetNEMAstandards

• Built-inDeviceNetwithIntelliCENTERtechnology

• HelpstoreducearcflashhazardswithArcShield

• Consistentdesignallowsforbackwardcompatibility

• ProvenCENTERLINEbusdesignforimprovedheatdissipation

• Solidgroundingsystemtohelpreduceshockhazards

• Fullyisolatedenclosuresformaximumfaultcontainment

• Spacesavingdesignsmaximizesectionusereducingyour MCC footprint

• Varietyofintelligentmotorcontroloptions

– Across-the-line starters – Soft starters – Variable speed drives

The CENTERLINE 2100 MCC uses proven technology for high quality and years of dependable service.

• Highshortcircuitwithstandratingsintype-testedenclosures

• Continuousbusbracingprovidesuniformsupport

• DurableNEMAcomponents

• Factorytestedforfasterandmoredependablestart-up

• CENTERLINE2100MCCswithIntelliCENTERTechnologyhavebuilt-innetworkingandpreconfiguredsoftwareto:

– Enhance performance through system-wide communications – Share diagnostic information for predictive maintenance – Initiate warnings before potential faults occur

Increase Uptime with Advanced Maintenance ToolsThepreconfiguredsoftwaregivesmaintenancepersonneleasyaccesstocriticalCENTERLINEMCCconfigurationinformation and process data for troubleshooting. The configurablesystemviewsgiveyousystemstatusataglance and can help keep facilities running with electronic documentation, remote diagnostics and predictive maintenance. IntelliCENTER Software allows you to significantlyreduceHMIprogrammingtimeandPLC development time with automatic tag generation and evencompletenetworkconfigurationbeforetheMCC is powered up.

Enhance Personnel SafetyEnhance your personnel’s safety with remote access to real-timedataformonitoring,configurationand troubleshooting of intelligent motor control devices. IntelliCENTER software harnesses the power of the Integrated Architecture™ system so you can access critical MCC information from anywhere in your facility.

IntelliCENTER technology increases your access to information, minimizes maintenance and troubleshooting time with real-time motor control diagnostics and increases productivity with complete packaged and pre-engineered solutions for your most challenging applications.

Industry-Leading Motor Control Centers Delivering Safety, Performance And Reliability

“We receive an alarm in the main plant control room if amperage in one pump controller is too high, and we can go directly to the problem and fix it. In some instances, the system’s predictive monitoring in the MCCs helps us address over-amperage problems before faulting.”

Bob Moreno City of Yuma, AZ – USA

5

SafetyThe standard offering of the CENTERLINE 2100 MCC provides you with improved safety. CENTERLINE MCCs are designed to enhance operation and make it safer. No other MCC manufacturer offers the same protection for personnel and equipment

• Highlevelofisolationfromhazardousvoltage

• Superiorfaultcontainment

• Solidgroundingsystem

These safety features help protect employees and keep your process up and running

• AdvanceddiagnosticsfromIntelliCENTERsoftwareprovide remote access to data and troubleshooting, minimizingyourneedtoenterthearcflash boundary zone

• IntelliCENTERsoftwareallowsyoutotroubleshoot your MCC remotely, without personal protective equipment (PPE)

• Highdegreeoffaultcontainmenthelpspreventasingle fault from cascading throughout the enclosure, limiting equipment damage

• Isolation,groundingandremotemonitoringhelpprevent accidental exposure to energized parts

• Automaticshuttersisolateverticalbuswhena unit is removed

• Continuousbusbracingprovidesmoreuniformsupport than point bracing

• Infraredwindowsallowcompletionofthermal inspection without opening doors, to minimize personnel entry in to the enclosure

• Plug-inreplacementunitsallowmaintenancetobeperformed away from energized controls

• Intelligentmotorcontroldeviceswarnofanimpendingfailure before it occurs

• NEMAcomponentshelpdeliverdependableoperation

• LockingandInterlockingfeaturesallowforeasierimplementation of your company’s lockout/tagout safety procedures

• Through-the-doorDeviceNetportgivesyouaccesstothe network without opening the unit door

• Through-the-doorviewingwindowgivesyouvisible inspection of the disconnect without opening unit door

ArcShield™

The CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center (MCC) with ArcShieldhelpsreducearcflashhazardswhileprovidingyou with increased protection against internal electrical arcingfaults.TheCENTERLINE2100MCC,thefirsttoofferarc resistant features in a low voltage design (up to 600 volts), helps improve personnel safety with a variety of built-in protective features designed to reduce and minimizearcflashhazards.Arc-containmentlatchesprovide an extra level of protection against internal arcing faults.

The CENTERLINE 2100 MCC with ArcShield meets Type2accessibilityrequirements(asdefinedbyIEEEC37.20.7-2007 – “IEEE guide for testing metal-enclosed switchgear rated up to 38kV for internal arcing faults”), helping to shield your personnel from the effects of an internal arcing fault on the front, rear and sides of the enclosure. Pairing ArcShield with IntelliCENTER technology, you can perform remote monitoring, configurationandtroubleshootingofyourMCCs,withoutenteringthearcflashboundaryzone–helpingtofurtherreduceyourexposuretoarcflashhazards.

Industry-Leading Motor Control Centers Delivering Safety, Performance And Reliability

CENTERLINE 2100 MCC with ArcShield

6

“The safety issue is one of the things that we are happiest with. The old system created hazardous troubleshooting conditions, with technicians having to test and probe and work around live wires within a confined panel space.”

Ronnie Sexton Acme Brick – USA

cmahler

Rectangle

9

CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control CentersThe CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center (MCC) combines rugged-durability and premium quality, meeting UL and NEMA standards. CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs integrate control and power in one centralized package with a wide variety of motor control options. The industry leading motor control center that has delivered the safety, performance and reliability you need for over 35 years.

Product Features

• Designed to meet NEMA and UL standards• Listed by UL as complying with MCC Standard UL 845• Built-in DeviceNet with IntelliCENTER® technology• ArcShield™ helps you reduce arc flash hazards• Consistent design allowing for backward compatibility• Proven CENTERLINE bus design with labyrinth bus support system• Solid grounding system to help reduce shock hazards • Fully isolated enclosures for maximum fault containment• Space saving designs decrease the number of sections needed, reducing your

MCC footprint• Variety of intelligent motor control options

– Across-the-line starters– Soft starters – Variable frequency drives

cmahler

Rectangle

18

StructureThe CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers structure consists of sections, wireways, doors and plug-in or frame mount units. CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs are listed by UL as complying with MCC Standard UL 845.

Sections

The rigid, free-standing sections are assembled individually. Shipping blocks are factory assembled from individual sections. Multiple section shipping blocks have continuous lifting angles, horizontal power bars, horizontal ground bus and internal mounting angle.

Fault containment is enhanced with two side sheets on every section. This helps prevent a single fault from cascading throughout the structure, limiting equipment damage.

The regid design or CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs helps ensure a longer life in all applications. Plug-in units can still be installed and removed and doors closed securely after years of dependable service.

Mounting Configurations

The MCC is available in two mounting configurations – front mounted and back-to-back mounted.

• Front mounted sections are joined and installed side-by-side. • Back-to-back mounted sections are two separate sections joined at the rear.

The two sections have separate power bus systems providing the same phasing for all units. The horizontal power bus is linked, front to rear, with a factory installed U-shaped bus splice assembly.

Back-to-back vertical sections are made up of two separate vertical sections. The front and back sections have separate horizontal and vertical power bus providing the same phasing on units, both front and back. Full usage of unit space is available for front and back section. There is no back plate between the sections. Front Mounted

Back-to-back Mounted

cmahler

Rectangle

19

Bus Design

CENTERLINE bus design means more current carrying capacity per section.• Standard vertical bus is rated twice the industry norm: 300 A above and 300 A below the horizontal bus for an

effective 600 A capacity per section• Allows more flexibility for field changes without exceeding vertical bus rating• Sections available in back-to-back design with separate front and rear vertical bus for maximum loading capacity• Continuous bus bracing provides more uniform support than commonly used standoffs

Vertical wireway contains no control or power terminations making cable installation safer. For added safety, a permanent barrier separates the vertical wireway from units. Automatic shutters available to immediately isolate vertical bus when unit is removed.

Computerized fastening system used in the assembly of horizontal to vertical bus connection:• reduces periodic maintenance• minimizes exposure to hazardous voltage

Dedicated plug-in ground bus is part of a solid grounding system.

300 A

300

A

Horizontal Bus Bars

Vertical Wireway

Vertical to Horizontal Bus Bar Connections

Horizontal Wireway

Horizontal Wireway

Plug-in Ground Bus

Manual or Automatic Shutters

300 A Symmetrical for an effective 600 A or 600 A Symmetrical for an effective 1200 A

cmahler

Rectangle

20

Section Construction

Vertical Wireway (door closed)

Vertical-to-horizontal Bus Connection

Nameplate(serial nameplate shown)

Vertical Bus Covers (automatic shutters)

Bottom Horizontal Wireway

Horizontal Power Bus

ArcShield End Closing Plate Insulator

Lift angle

Top Horizontal Wireway Baffles

Top Horizontal Wireway Pan

Top Horizontal Wireway Cover

Right Unit Support Assembly (vertical wireway)

Bus Splice Access Cover

Vertical-to-horizontal Bus Connection Access Cover

Unit Support Pan

Vertical Wireway Sealing Strap (top and bottom)

Bottom Support Angle

Bottom Horizontal Wireway Cover

Bottom End Closing Plate (two on 20” deep sections)

Horizontal ground bus, top or bottom

Center End Plate

Vertical Power Bus

Center End closing plate

Horizontal and Vertical Bus Support

Top End Closing Plate(two on 20” deep sections)

Removable Top Plate

Vertical Plug-in Ground Bus

cmahler

Rectangle

21

Section Dimensions

The standard dimensions of a vertical section are 90 in. high x 20 in. wide x 15 in. deep (2286 mm x 508 mm x 381 mm). Vertical sections are also available as 20 in. deep (508 mm). Some vertical sections may be wider than 20 in. (508 mm) due to larger equipment or optional vertical wireway.

Optional 71 in. (1791 mm) reduced height vertical sections are available. These sections can be either 15 in. (381 mm) or 20 in. (508 mm) deep and each 71 in. high vertical section accommodates standard plug-in units up to and including 4.5 space factors.

Dimensions are shown as in. (mm).

Approximate Weight

This table lists approximate weights for MCC sections. Many factors (number of units, horizontal power bus, wireway width, section depth and width) affect the weight of the sections. Weight is also added when the product is packaged for shipping.

20…35 (508…889)

15 or 20 (381 or 508)

71 or 90 (1791 or 2286)

6 (152.4)

6 (152.4)

78 (1981)

4.37 or 9.37 (111 or 238)

Section Dimensions

Height 90 in. (2286 mm) standard; 71 in. (1790 mm) available

Width 20 in. (508 mm) standard; wider sections available for larger equipment in 5 in. (127 mm) increments

Depth Front mounted 15 in. (381 mm) or 20 in. (508 mm) Back-to-back 30 in. (762 mm) or 40 in. (1016 mm)

Vertical Wireway

4.37 in. (111 mm) wide standard; 9.37 in. (238 mm) wide available

Approximate Weight

MCC Section Dimensions NEMA Type 1 , 1G or 12lb (kg) per section(1)

(1) Weights are for a typical motor control center with four units per section. Weights do not include packaging. Refer to packing slip shipped with you MCC for exact shipping weights.

15”/20” D, 20” W, 90” H 500 (227)

15”/20” D, 25” W, 90” H 575 (261)

15”/20” D, 30” W, 90” H 600 (272)

15”/20” D, 35” W, 90” H 650 (295)

cmahler

Rectangle

22

NEMA Enclosure Type

Structures are available with the following NEMA Enclosure Type ratings.

• NEMA Type 1• NEMA Type 1 with gasketing around

perimeter of unit doors• NEMA Type 12• NEMA Type 3R (non walk-in)• NEMA Type 4 (non walk-in)

Structure sheet metal has rounded edges and is tightly fitted with no visible air gaps. See Technical Standards and Certifications, page 97 for more information.

Operating Environment

The MCC is designed to operate in an ambient operating temperature range of 0…40 °C (32…104 °F) with up to 95% non-condensing humidity.

The MCC is designed to operate at altitudes up to 2000 m (6600 ft) without derating. For MCCs with variable frequency drives, the MCC may be operated at altitudes up to 1000 m (3300 ft) without derating.

Paint and Plating

Structural metal undergoes a multi-step cleaning, rinsing and painting process resulting in complete uniform-thickness, paint coverage. This process is maintained and controlled by ISO 9001 quality standards.

Unpainted surfaces for corrosion resistance.

Interior vertical wireways and unit mounting plates are painted high-visibility gloss white.

Technical Data

Standards Certifications & Listings NEMA ICS-18, UL845, CSA C22.2 No. 14 and EN 60439-1

NEMA Type 1 (IP20, IP30, IP40) 1 with gasketing around perimeter of unit doors (IP20, IP30, IP40) 12 (IP54) 3R non walk-in (IP44) 4 non walk-in (IP65)

Bus Material and Plating

Horizontal Bus Rating 600 A; 800 A; 1200 A; 1600 A; 2000 A; 2500A or 3000A

Horizontal Bus Withstand Rating

42 kA; 65 kA or 100 kA

Horizontal Bus Material Aluminum with Tin-plating; Copper with Tin-plating or Copper with Silver-plating

Vertical Bus Rating 300 A (600 A effective) or 600 A (1200 A effective)

Vertical Bus Material Copper with Tin-plating or Copper with Silver-plating (matches horizontal bus material)

Unit Design Unit Size 6.5” (165 mm) high x 14” (356 mm) wide = half space factor13” (330 mm) high x 14” (356 mm) wide = one space factorUnit designs are in 0.5 space factor increments

Maximum Space Factors per Section

6

Structural Surface Treatments

Exterior (NEMA Type 1, 1G, 12)

ANSI 49 - Medium Light Gray

Exterior (NEMA Type 3R) UV Resistant High Gloss White - Recognized by UL for outdoor use

Exterior (NEMA Type 4) Unpainted Stainless Steel

Interior ANSI 49 - Medium Light Gray; High Visibility White Gloss (vertical wireways and unit back plates)

Environment Storage Temperature 32…104 °F (0…40 °C) with up to 95% non-condensing humidity

Operating (Ambient) Temperature

32…104 °F (0…40 °C) with up to 95% non-condensing humidity

Altitude 6600 feet (2km)

MCC Finish

NEMA Enclosure Type

Exterior Finish

1, 1G, 12 ANSI 49, Medium Light Grey

3R High Gloss White (for outside use)

4 Stainless Steel

cmahler

Rectangle

23

Wireways

Each MCC has horizontal and vertical wireways for continuous dedicated wire and cable location.

Horizontal Wireways

Horizontal wireways are located at the top and bottom of each MCC section. Horizontal wireways extend the full width and depth of the MCC. The top and bottom are horizontal wireways 6 in. (152.4 mm) high. Complete wireway access from front to rear is available for back-to-back configured MCC sections.

Horizontal wireways have removable front covers that are held in place by captive screws. Openings in the side plate of the section allow access to the top and bottom horizontal wireways between joined sections. Plates are provided to cover these openings for sections located at the end of a MCC lineup.

Horizontal wireways are isolated from the power bus. Horizontal wireways for incoming line sections are reduced depth to maintain isolation from the incoming line area.

Vertical Wireway

The vertical wireway is located on the right side of each section and extends 78 in. (1981 mm), between the top and the bottom horizontal wireway. The vertical wireway is approximately 7 in. (178 mm) deep. The standard vertical wireway is 4.37 in. (111 mm) wide. Vertical wireways are also available in 9.37 in. (238 mm) widths.

The vertical wireway is isolated from power bus and is independent of unit space. Vertical wireways are not present in sections with frame-mount units.

Vertical wireways are covered with steel doors and held in place by at least three door latches.

Vertical wireway tie bars are available to help you keep your cable wireways organized.

Master Nameplate

The MCC master nameplate, when specified, measure 2.0 in. x 6.0 in. (50.8 mm x 152.4 mm) and is available with up to five lines of engraving and is located on the top horizontal wireway cover.

Continuous Horizontal Top Wireway

Continuous Horizontal Bottom Wireway

Continuous Vertical Wireway

cmahler

Rectangle

24

Incoming PowerCENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers are designed for use on three-phase, three-wire or four-wire, Wye connected power systems, rated 600V or less, 50 or 60 Hz, with a solidly grounded neutral. CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers are also suitable for the following power system configurations, however, some units and options may not be available:

• 3-phase, 3-wire, Wye systems rated 600V/347V or less, with impedance grounded neutral• 3-phase, 3-wire, ungrounded Delta systems, rated 600V or less

Power Bus and Ground BusThe CENTERLINE 2100 MCC features the time-proven Allen-Bradley CENTERLINE power bus system. The horizontal power bus is mounted near the vertical center of the structure providing optimum heat dissipation, power distribution and ease of maintenance and installation.

The vertical power bus allows power distribution both above and below the center-mounted horizontal bus, effectively doubling the capacity in each section. This feature also helps allow a virtually unrestricted unit arrangement.

Horizontal and vertical power buses are fastened together with a two bolt assembly. This two-bolt connection helps minimize the likelihood of ‘hot spots’. The factory-made horizontal to vertical power bus connection is tightened by a computerized torquing system.

The power bus system is supported, braced and isolated by a bus support molded of high strength, non-tracking glass polyester material.


The horizontal power bus is available as follows:• 600…800 A - aluminum with tin plating• 600…3000 A - copper with tin plating or copper with silver plating

The horizontal power bus is continuous in each shipping block and mounted near the vertical center of the structure providing optimum heat distribution, power distribution and ease of maintenance and splicing. The horizontal power bus is mounted on-edge in a vertical plane providing maximum strength to withstand magnetic forces present during fault conditions. It is mounted in recessed channels of the bus support to protect against accumulation of dust and tracking between phases.


Two-bolt Assembly

Vertical Power Bus

cmahler

Rectangle

25

Vertical Power Bus

Vertical power bus bars are cylindrical providing optimum contact with the unit plug-in stabs. Vertical power bus bars are continuously braced by a high strength, non-tracking glass polyester material and sandwiched by a glass filled polycarbonate molded bus cover isolating the vertical power bus from the other vertical phases and the horizontal power bus. The standard vertical power bus is a copper tube rated 300 A above and below the horizontal power bus for an effective 600 A rating. An optional copper rod rated 600 A above and below the horizontal power bus for an effective 1200 A rating is available. The vertical power bus is tin-plated or silver-plated. The plating of the vertical power bus matches the plating of the horizontal power bus.

Horizontal Neutral Bus

The horizontal neutral bus, when required for four-wire systems, is available and may be located above or below the horizontal power bus. Connections to the neutral bus are made though neutral connection plates mounted in the horizontal wireways of various vertical sections or an optional vertical neutral bus located in a 9 in. (228 mm) wide vertical wireway.

Bracing

Fully rated bus bracing is available at 42, 65 or 100 kA rms symmetrical. Series coordinated bus bracing is also available at 100 kA rms symmetrical. Series coordinated bus bracing, when used with specific current-limiting mains, provides a cost affective alternative to 100 kA fully rated bus bracing.

Horizontal Ground Bus

The horizontal ground bus is available as unplated copper or tin-plated copper and may be located in the top and/or bottom horizontal wireway. The horizontal ground bus is available as 0.25 in. x 1 in. (6.35 mm x 25.4 mm) or 0.25 in. x 2 in. (6.35 mm x 50.8 mm). The 1/4 in. x 1 in. (6.35 mm x 25.4 mm) horizontal ground bus has an effective 500 A continuous rating and the 1/4 in. x 2 in. (6.35 mm x 50.8 mm) has an effective 900 A continuous rating. The horizontal ground bus has various sized holes evenly spaced along the length for making ground connections. A pressure type mechanical lug is mounted on the horizontal ground bus in the incoming line section. An outgoing equipment ground lug can also be mounted on horizontal ground bus.

Vertical Plug-in Ground Bus

The vertical plug-in ground bus is mechanically connected to the horizontal ground bus forming a complete internal ground system in each standard vertical section. The vertical plug-in ground bus in combination with the unit ground stab establishes a first make, last break operation of the ground connection with respect to the power connects.

The 0.1875 in. x 0.750 in. (4.74 mm x 19.05 mm) vertical plug-in ground bus can be:• zinc plated steel.• unplated copper.• tin-plated copper.

cmahler

Rectangle

26

Vertical Unit Load Ground Bus

The vertical unit load ground bus is mechanically connected to the horizontal ground bus. The vertical unit load ground bus in combination with the unit load connector provides a termination point for the load ground cable at the unit. This fixed connection does not need to be removed when withdrawing the unit from the MCC.

The 0.1875 in. x 0.750 in. (4.74 mm x 19.05 mm) vertical unit load ground bus can be unplated or tin-plated copper.

Vertical Bus Plug-in Stab Opening Protection

Several options are available for covering unused plug-in stab openings:• Protective caps• Manual shutters• Automatic shutters

Automatic shutters open as plug-in units are inserted and close when the unit is removed. Automatic shutters help ensure the vertical bus is immediately isolated when a plug-in unit is removed.

Other Structure Related Options

Other options such as pull boxes, master nameplates and space heaters are available.

For more information on structure options, refer to CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Catalog, publication 2100-CA001.

http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/ca/2100-ca001_-en-p.pdf

cmahler

Rectangle

27

Space Factor

Unit size is described in space factors. Units are designed in 0.5 space factor increments. Each 0.5 space factor is 6.5 in. (165.1 mm) high. Each standard, 90 in. high MCC section can contain 6.0 space factors. Up to twelve 0.5 space factor units can be placed in a section.

Continuous Horizontal Wireway

Continuous Horizontal WirewayContinuous

Vertical Wireway

6.0 Space Factors

Total1.0 Space

Factor Unit

0.5 Space Factor Unit

2.5 Space Factor Unit

cmahler

Rectangle

28

Unit Design

Plug-in Unit Design Features

Plug-in units consist of the unit, unit support pan and unit door. Plug-in units are held securely in the section when inserted and are designed with an interlock to help ensure that units cannot be inserted or withdrawn when the disconnect means is in the ON/I position.

Frame Mounted Unit Design Features

Frame mounted units are permanently mounted in the section, all connections are made directly to the components. Fixed units range from 1 space factor to 6 space factors.

Disconnect Handle Mechanism

Flange style disconnect handles (vertical or horizontal mounted) are provided with units with disconnects.

The disconnect handle of all units is interlocked with the unit door so the disconnect means cannot be switched to the ON/I position unless the door is closed. This interlock also prevents you from opening the unit door unless the disconnect is in the OFF/O position. An externally operated defeater is provided if access to the unit is needed without interrupting service. The interlock also prevents the unit from being inserted or removed when the disconnect handle is in the ON/I position.

Unit Disconnect

Fusible disconnect switches are available in MCC units. The fusible disconnect switches have visible blade type movable contacts and supplied with Class J, R, H, L, HRCII-C or CC fuse clips. NEMA space saving starter units are limited to Bulletin 194R fusible disconnect switch with Class CC fuse clips. Fusible disconnect requirements above 400A use a bolted pressure contact switch with visible blade disconnect mechanism.

Circuit breaker disconnects are available in MCC units. Horsepower rated MCC units are provided with instantaneous circuit breakers (HMCP) or with inverse time (thermal magnetic or electronic) circuit breakers. Current rated units are provided with inverse time (thermal magnetic or electronic) circuit breakers.

Unit

Unit Door

Unit Support Pan

cmahler

Rectangle

29

Stab Assembly

The two-piece power stab housing is made of high strength, non-tracking glass polyester material and provides a separate, isolated pathway for each phase.

The power cable connection at the plug-in stab is made with a maintenance free crimp style connection. There is no exposed wiring at the back of the unit between the disconnecting means and the plug-in stabs.

Unit plug-in power stabs are rated 225 A. The stabs are made of tin-plated copper for a low resistance connection and are designed to tighten during heavy current surges.

The free-floating and self aligning unit plug-in power stabs are backed by stainless steel spring clips to provide and maintain a high pressure, four-point connection to the vertical power bus.

Pilot Devices

Pilot devices are housed in a door mounted control station. Each control station can accommodate up to three 30.5 mm or four 22.5 mm devices.

The control station is easily removed from the unit door using captive screws. If a control station is removed, closing plates are available to cover the opening in the unit door and provide isolation, allowing the control station to stay with the unit when the unit is removed.

Unit Doors

Each unit is provided with a removable door mounted on removable pin type hinges which allow the door to open at least 110 degrees. The unit doors are removable from any location in the MCC without disturbing any other unit doors. The unit door is fastened to the structure so it can be closed to cover the unit space when the unit is removed. The unit doors are held closed with ¼-turn latches. Units with overload relays have a low profile external reset button.

Unit Nameplates

Unit nameplates measuring 1.125 in. x 3.375 in. (28.58 mm x 85.73 mm) are available and can accommodate three or four lines of engraving. The following types of unit nameplates are available:

• Clear cardholders - supplied with blank cards• Engraved acrylic nameplates - white with black lettering or black with white lettering• Engraved phenolic nameplates - white with black lettering, black with white lettering or red with white lettering

Nameplates are secured using two steel self-tapping screws. Stainless steel screws are also available.

Pilot Device

cmahler

Rectangle

97

Technical Standards and Certifications

UL/cUL/CSA Marking

CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (file number E49289) as complying with Standard Safety UL 845 (UL) and either listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or certified by Canadian Standards Association (CSA) as complying with standard C22-2, No. 254-05 (cUL or CSA). CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs also meet the requirements in Mexican standard for MCCs, NMXJ-353-ANCE-2006. The MCC product, sections and units will therefore carry the respective marking unless otherwise indicated in the footnotes on the various pages in this publication.

ISO 9001 Certification

The facilities that develop and manufacture CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs are located in Milwaukee and Richland Center, Wisconsin, Cambridge, Ontario, Canada, Tecate, Mexico and Guadalupe, Mexico. All facilities have been certified to be in conformance to the requirements of Quality Management System ISO 9001. These facilities presently are certified by Det Norske Veritas to ISO 9001: 2000, certificate number CERT-9379-2004-AQ-HOU ANAB, effective May 30, 2007.

CE Marking

The European Union (EU) has established a program whereby products are tested and qualified to meet its harmonized standards and to fulfill the EN Directives. Upon completion of this testing and qualification, special documentation is required so the products may bear CE marking. Included with this program is the requirement for special instruction literature, product labeling, quality programs, and special design requirements. Generally, the CENTERLINE 2100 MCC product can fulfill these requirements, but due to the customization that is required, the CE marking of the product is available only on the Engineered delivery program. In case of variable frequency drives (as well as other solid-state devices), the EU deemed it necessary to add an EMC directive (2004/108/EC). This directive requires more stringent RF emission and immunity standards than normal. To meet these requirements and carry the CE mark, the CENTERLINE 2100 drive packages can be adapted with EMC tested RFI filters and additional shielding hardware. These special packages may require larger MCC enclosures. Note: The CE requirement is for the European Union/Community and is not a mandate for other parts of the world.

For more information about product certification, visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/

IEC 60439

The CENTERLINE 2100 structures and many units fulfill IEC 60439 type tested assembly (TTA) and unit requirements. Should custom designs and modifications be required, these can be qualified to IEC 60439 as partially pre-tested assembly (PTTA) and unit requirements.

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/

cmahler

Rectangle

98

American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)

CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs have fulfilled the requirements and are approved by the American Bureau of Shipping (certificate 99-SB55875-X). CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs do meet ABS shipping requirements, but due to required customization, ABS maritime shipping is available only on the Engineered program.

NEMA Class

NEMA—National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

The following is a description of Class I, as paraphrased from NEMA standard ICS 18-2001: Class I motor control centers shall consist of mechanical groupings of combination motor control units, feeder tap units, other units and electrical devices arranged in a convenient assembly. They include connections from the common horizontal power bus to the units. They do not include interwiring or interlocking between units or to remotely mounted devices, nor do they include control system engineering. Only diagrams of the individual units are supplied.

NEMA Class II interwiring offers the addition of interlocking and wiring between units as specifically described in overall control system diagrams supplied by the purchaser. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for availability.

NEMA Type

Class I motor control centers can be provided in NEMA Type A or B construction:• Type A—User’s power and control connections are made directly to the device within the unit.• Type B—Terminal blocks are supplied for user’s control termination within unit insert. On NEMA size 1 through 3

starter units and 30…100 A contactors units, terminal blocks are also supplied for user’s load terminations (NEMA Type BT). NEMA Space Saving units do not include power terminal blocks (NEMA Type BD).

NEMA/IEC Enclosure Comparison

The following table is a comparison of Allen-Bradley CENTERLINE 2100 MCC NEMA enclosure type numbers to IEC Standard 60529, Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures. The comparison is based on data from tests conducted on the CENTERLINE 2100 MCC enclosures and the NEMA enclosure type test requirements, which meet or exceed the IEC enclosure classification designation test requirements

NEMA Type 1 vented (with or without gasketed doors) IP20

NEMA Type 1 vented with filters (with or without gasketed doors) IP30

NEMA Type 1 non-vented (without gasketed doors) IP40

NEMA Type 1 with drip hood = NEMA Type 2 (with or without gasketed doors) IP41

NEMA Type 3R IP44

NEMA Type 12 without bottom plates IP53

NEMA Type 12 with bottom plates IP54

NEMA Type 4 IP65

cmahler

Rectangle

99

NEMA Enclosure Type Descriptions• NEMA Type 1 - Type 1 units and sections are intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection

against contact with the enclosed equipment in locations where unusual service conditions do not exist. The enclosures are designed to meet the rod entry and rust resistance design tests. The enclosure is sheet steel, treated to resist corrosion.

• NEMA Type 1 with gasketed doors (sometimes referred to as 1G) - Type 1 with gasketed unit doors are completely gasketed around the perimeter of the unit doors. All gasketing is closed cell neoprene.

• NEMA Type 12(1) - Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt and non-corrosive dripping liquids. They are designed to meet drip, dust and rust resistance tests. They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as internal condensation.

• NEMA Type 3R - Non-walk-in front mounted only. Door-within-a-door construction. Type 3R units and sections are intended for outdoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection against falling rain and to avoid damage from the formation of ice on the enclosure. They are designed to meet rod entry, rain, external icing and rust resistance design tests. They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as dust, internal condensation or internal icing.

• NEMA Type 4 - Non-walk-in front mounted only. Door-within-a-door construction. Type 4 units and sections are designed for indoor and outdoor use, primarily to provide protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing water and hose-directed water. They are also designed to remain undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. They are designed to meet hosedown, external icing, rod entry and rust-resistance design tests. The enclosures are not designed to protect against internal condensation or internal icing.

Seismic Applications

CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs meet the requirements for Uniform Building Code (UBC) Zone 4 seismic applications and comply with IBC 2000 & 2006 seismic criteria.

Actual CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center (MCC) samples have been seismically qualified by dynamic (triaxial multi-frequency testing) seismic tests per IEEE 344 Seismic Test Standards. The results of this MCC seismic testing demonstrated compliance with the 100% g level of Uniform Building Code 1997 (UBC) Zone 4 (the maximum UBC Zone) and 100% g level of the International Building Code 2006 (IBC), that is, the MCC structure, the MCC units, the MCC components or electrical functions were not compromised when subjected to a UBC Zone 4 earthquake or the IBC seismic event. Per the IEEE 344 Standard, the equipment was under power and operated before, during and after the seismic tests.

To obtain a UBC or IBC seismic withstandability, each individual CENTERLINE 2100 MCC line-up (for example, both front and back MCCs in ‘back-to-back’ applications) must be mounted on an adequate seismic foundation and installed per the seismic anchoring requirements as indicated in publication 2100-IN012, CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers User Manual.

Note: Variable frequency drive units utilizing ‘rollout’ drive configurations are not seismically certified.

(1) This publication refers to standard NEMA Type 12 design (that is, standard sheet steel). For stainless steel NEMA Type 12 enclosures, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.

cmahler

Rectangle

1

Instructions

Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers

Receiving

1. Upon delivery of the motor control center, inspect the shipment for lost items and any damage that may have occurred during transit. If the package appears to be damaged, it may be necessary to unpack the equipment and inspect it for further damage.

2. In the event that there is evidence of loss or damage, the buyer must follow the procedure outlined below:• Note on the delivery receipt that the equipment being received is

damaged.• Contact the carrier that made the delivery and schedule an

inspection.• Inform the local Rockwell Automation representative that the

equipment is damaged.• Retain all product packaging for review by the carrier’s inspector.

For further assistance, contact Rockwell Automation support at (440) 646-5800. Navigate through the call tree by selecting option 2 for Allen-Bradley products, option 5 for motor control centers, and then option 1 for hardware support.

IMPORTANT Delivery of equipment from Rockwell Automation to the carrier is considered delivery to the buyer. The carrier becomes liable for any damage that occurs during transit. It is then the buyer’s responsibility to notify the proper party if damage is found. The buyer may forfeit any right to recovery for loss or damages by failing to comply with the following steps.

Publication 2100-IN040B-EN-P - October 2002

2 Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers

Handling

The following guidelines are provided to help avoid personal injury and equipment damage during handling and facilitate moving the motor control center at the job site.

Due to varying motor control center configurations, a number of different shipping skids are used. To prevent distortion and minimize tipping of the motor control center during the moving process, the shipping skid should remain bolted to the motor control center until the motor control center is delivered to its final installation area.

Handle the motor control center carefully in order to avoid damage to the components, sections, and finish. Keep the motor control center in an upright position. The motor control center should not have been tipped or laid flat during shipment. Before moving the motor control center, make sure that the route is clear of all obstructions and that fellow workers are a safe distance away.

The motor control center should be handled by a “qualified person” as defined by NEMA standards. For this definition and other references on the handling of motor control centers, refer to NEMA standards publication number ICS 2.3, Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers.

Forklifting

Standard motor control centers, front-mounted (15” or 20” deep) in 20” through 60” widths, have shipping skids that facilitate the insertion of lift truck forks, with fork access from the narrow end.

Non-standard motor control centers have flat shipping skids. Forklift flat shipping skids from the front or broad side. When forklifting a flat shipping skid, use a pry bar (Johnson bar) to lift the skid enough to insert the forks under it.

ATTENTION

!Motor control centers are top- and front-heavy. To avoid personal injury and structural damage to the motor control center, never attempt to lift or move the motor control center by any means other than those listed in this publication.


Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers 3

Refer to and follow the forklifting procedure outlined below.

1. Ensure that the forklift truck can handle the weight and size of the motor control center safely.

2. Forklift only from underneath the shipping skid, using the skid to support the load. Carefully position the motor control center on the forks for proper balance, noting that motor control centers are top- and front-heavy. Make sure that the forks support the load. Keep the load against the carriage. Tilt the load backward toward the lift truck’s mast.

3. Use a belt to secure the motor control center to the forklift truck.

4. Start and stop the forklift truck gradually and slowly, avoiding jerky movements. When traveling with the load, drive slowly with the forks carried as low as possible, consistent with safe operation.

For further information on the use of forklift trucks, refer to National Safety Council Data Sheet I-653.

Figure 1 Forklifting a standard motor control center

Overhead lifting

Overhead lifting provides a convenient method for moving motor control centers. This handling method is recommended for motor control centers supplied with lifting angles (including NEMA Type 3R construction with optional lifting angle). Refer to Figure 2 and Figure 3 and follow the overhead lifting procedure outlined below.

DANGER

TOP HEAVY

Mast and carriage

Forklift only fromunderneath skid

Shipping skid

BELT TO FORKLIFTBEFORE LIFTINGAND MOVING



1. Attach rigging to lifting means.

2. Do not pass ropes or cables through the support holes in the lifting angle. Use slings with load-rated hooks or shackles.

3. Select or adjust the rigging lengths to compensate for any unequal weight distribution of the load and support the motor control center in an upright position.

4. Reduce tension on the rigging and compression on the lifting angle by ensuring the angle between the lifting cables and vertical plane does not exceed 45° .

ATTENTION

!Ensure that the load rating of the lifting device is sufficient to handle the load safely. Refer to the shipping weights on the packing slip enclosed in the shipment.

ATTENTION

!Some motor control centers contain heavy, mounted equipment, such as transformers, that could be adversely affected if tilted.



Figure 2 Overhead lifting a front mounted motor control center

Figure 3 Overhead lifting a motor control center with back-to-back construction



Lifting sling

Using a lifting sling is the preferred method for overhead lifting of export packaged sections, but it may be used for all types of sections, including NEMA Type 3R without lifting angle. Refer to (export packaged) and (NEMA Type 3R without lifting angle) and follow the lifting sling procedure below.

1. Place the lifting sling under the shipping platform.

2. The spreader bar must have a larger span (overhang) than the motor control center load.

3. Carefully stabilize the motor control center during handling. All rigging must be designed to support the load (refer to shipping weights) with the appropriate safety factor.

Figure 4 Lifting sling on export packaged motor control center



Figure 5 Lifting sling on NEMA Type 3R motor control center without lifting angle

Rod or pipe rollers

With the aid of pinch bars, pipe rolling provides a simple method of moving motor control centers on one floor level if there is no significant incline. This method of handling can be used for all types of sections. Refer to and follow the procedure outlined below.

1. Carefully ease the shipping platform over the pipes until the pipes support the full weight of the motor control center.

2. Roll the motor control center to its designated location. Use extreme caution to steady the load and prevent it from tipping.



Figure 6 Pipe rolling a motor control center with back-to-back construction

Storing If it is necessary to store the motor control center for any length of time, take the following precautions:

1. Wrap the motor control center in a covering of heavy-duty plastic or similar material to prevent the entry of dirt and dust.

2. Motor control centers not installed and energized immediately should be stored in a clean, dry place. Maintain a storage temperature between -30° C and +65° C. If the storage temperature fluctuates or humidity exceeds 60%, use a space heater to prevent condensation. It is preferable to store a motor control center in a heated building that offers adequate air circulation and protection from dirt and water.

3. Motor control centers that are designed for indoor applications do not have sufficient packaging for outdoor storage. If they are to be stored outdoors, install temporary electrical heating to prevent condensation and add packaging for protection from the outside elements. A space heater rated at 200 watts per section is adequate for the average motor control center. All loose packaging and flammable materials should be removed prior to energizing space heaters.

4. Unenergized motor control centers for outdoor use should be kept dry internally by installing temporary heating (see item 3 above) or energizing optional self-contained space heaters.

5. Space heater and thermostat kits (kit number 2100-NH1) may be ordered from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor.

cmahler

Rectangle

cmahler

Rectangle

WStone

Ellipse

WStone

Callout

300

cmahler

Rectangle

cmahler

Rectangle

WStone

Ellipse

WStone

Callout

INCOMING POWER IS 300 KCMIL

cmahler

Rectangle

WStone

Callout

GREEN

R

Callout

RED

WStone

Callout

GREEN

WStone

Callout

RED

For technical assistance in the U.S., call 866-405-6654 (outside the U.S., see inside back cover for directory)

ELECTRICAL SOLUTIONS

B2.Cable

Accessories

C1.Wiring

Duct

C3.Abrasion

Protection

C4.Cable

Management

D1.Terminals

D2.Power

Connectors

E1.LabelingSystems

E2.Labels

E3.Pre-Printed & Write-On

Markers

F.Index

B3.StainlessSteel Ties

C2.Surface

Raceway

E5.Lockout/Tagout

& SafetySolutions

B1.Cable Ties

A.System

Overview

D3.GroundingConnectors

E4.Permanent

Identification

Code Conductor, Two-Hole, Long Barrel Lug

‡See pages D3.62 – D3.65 for tool and die information.**Consult cable manufacturer for voltage stress relief instructions with applications greater than 2000 V.◆NEMA hole sizes and spacing.

• Long barrel maximizes number of crimps and provides premiumwire pull-out strength and electrical performance

• Color-coded barrels marked with Panduit and specified competitordie index numbers for proper crimp die selection

• Enclosed barrel prevents corrosive material from entering barrelwhen used in harsh environments

• Tin-plated to inhibit corrosion

• UL Listed and CSA Certified to 35 KV** and temperature rated to90°C when crimped with Panduit and specified competitorcrimping tools and dies

• UL Listed and CSA Certified for wide wire range-taking capabilitywhen crimped with Panduit® Uni-Die ™ Dieless Crimping Tools‡

• Tested by Telcordia – meets NEBS Level 3

• American Bureau of Shipping approved

• Available with NEMA hole sizes and spacing

For Use with Stranded Copper Conductors

Type LCC

W

HOLESPACING

L

T

B

Table continues on page D2.42

Part Number

CopperConductor

Size

StudHoleSize(In.)

StudHole

Spacing(In.)

Figure Dimensions (In.)

PanduitColorCode

PanduitDie Index

No.‡

BurndyDie Index

No.‡

T&BDie Index

No.‡

Wire StripLength

(In.)

Std.Pkg.Qty.W B T L

LCC8-10A-L

#8 AWG

#10 0.63 0.41 0.70 0.08 2.07 Red P21 49 21 3/4 50

LCC8-14A-L 1/4 0.63 0.48 0.70 0.07 2.16 Red P21 49 21 3/4 50

LCC8-14B-L 1/4 0.75 0.48 0.70 0.07 2.28 Red P21 49 21 3/4 50

LCC8-14D-L 1/4 1.00 0.48 0.70 0.07 2.53 Red P21 49 21 3/4 50

LCC8-38D-L 3/8 1.00 0.60 0.70 0.05 2.75 Red P21 49 21 3/4 50

LCC6-10A-L

#6 AWG

#10 0.63 0.46 1.07 0.08 2.47 Blue P24 7 24 1 1/8 50

LCC6-14A-L 1/4 0.63 0.48 1.07 0.08 2.56 Blue P24 7 24 1 1/8 50

LCC6-14B-L 1/4 0.75 0.48 1.07 0.08 2.68 Blue P24 7 24 1 1/8 50

LCC6-14D-L 1/4 1.00 0.48 1.07 0.08 2.93 Blue P24 7 24 1 1/8 50

LCC6-38D-L 3/8 1.00 0.62 1.07 0.06 3.15 Blue P24 7 24 1 1/8 50

LCC6-12-L 1/2 1.75 0.75 1.07 0.07 4.04 Blue P24 7 24 1 1/8 50

LCC4-14A-L#4 – #3

AWG STR,#2 AWG

SOL

1/4 0.63 0.55 1.05 0.09 2.58 Gray P29 8 29 1 1/8 50

LCC4-14B-L 1/4 0.75 0.55 1.05 0.09 2.70 Gray P29 8 29 1 1/8 50

LCC4-38D-L 3/8 1.00 0.62 1.05 0.08 3.17 Gray P29 8 29 1 1/8 50

LCC4-12-L 1/2 1.75 0.75 1.05 0.07 4.09 Gray P29 8 29 1 1/8 50

LCC2-14A-Q

#2 AWG

1/4 0.63 0.60 1.16 0.10 2.77 Brown P33 10 33 1 1/4 25

LCC2-14B-Q 1/4 0.75 0.60 1.16 0.10 2.89 Brown P33 10 33 1 1/4 25

LCC2-56B-Q 5/16 0.75 0.66 1.16 0.10 3.02 Brown P33 10 33 1 1/4 25

LCC2-56C-Q 5/16 0.88 0.66 1.16 0.10 3.14 Brown P33 10 33 1 1/4 25

LCC2-38D-Q 3/8 1.00 0.66 1.16 0.10 3.34 Brown P33 10 33 1 1/4 25

LCC2-38-Q 3/8 1.75 0.66 1.16 0.10 4.09 Brown P33 10 33 1 1/4 25

LCC2-12-Q 1/2 1.75 0.75 1.16 0.08 4.51 Brown P33 10 33 1 1/4 25

LCC1-14A-E

#1 AWG

1/4 0.63 0.70 1.36 0.11 3.00 Green P37 11 37 1 7/16 20

LCC1-14B-E 1/4 0.75 0.70 1.36 0.11 3.12 Green P37 11 37 1 7/16 20

LCC1-56B-E 5/16 0.75 0.70 1.36 0.11 3.25 Green P37 11 37 1 7/16 20

LCC1-56C-E 5/16 0.88 0.70 1.36 0.11 3.37 Green P37 11 37 1 7/16 20

LCC1-38D-E 3/8 1.00 0.70 1.36 0.11 3.57 Green P37 11 37 1 7/16 20

LCC1-12-E 1/2 1.75 0.75 1.36 0.09 4.74 Green P37 11 37 1 7/16 20

cmahler

Rectangle

cmahler

Text Box

See yellow high-lighting on next page.

ELECTRICAL SOLUTIONS

Prime items appear in BOLD.

B2.Cable

Accessories

C1.Wiring

Duct

C3.Abrasion

Protection

C4.Cable

Management

D1.Terminals

D2.Power

Connectors

E1.LabelingSystems

E2.Labels

E3.Pre-Printed & Write-On

Markers

F.Index

B3.StainlessSteel Ties

C2.Surface

Raceway

E5.Lockout/Tagout

& SafetySolutions

B1.Cable Ties

A.System

Overview

D3.GroundingConnectors

E4.Permanent

Identification

‡See pages D3.62 – D3.65 for tool and die information.**Consult cable manufacturer for voltage stress relief instructions with applications greater than 2000 V.◆NEMA hole sizes and spacing.

Code Conductor, Two-Hole, Long Barrel Lug (continued)

LTBW

Std.Pkg.Qty.

Wire StripLength

(In.)

T&BDie Index

No.‡

BurndyDie Index

No.‡

PanduitDie Index

No.‡

PanduitColorCode

Figure Dimensions (In.)

StudHole

Spacing(In.)

StudHoleSize(In.)

CopperConductor

SizePart NumberLCC1/0-14A-X

1/0 AWG

1/4 0.63 0.76 1.44 0.12 3.18 Pink P42 12 42 1 1/2 10

LCC1/0-14B-X 1/4 0.75 0.76 1.44 0.12 3.31 Pink P42 12 42 1 1/2 10

LCC1/0-56C-X 5/16 0.88 0.76 1.44 0.12 3.49 Pink P42 12 42 1 1/2 10

LCC1/0-56D-X 5/16 1.00 0.76 1.44 0.12 3.61 Pink P42 12 42 1 1/2 10

LCC1/0-38D-X 3/8 1.00 0.76 1.44 0.12 3.69 Pink P42 12 42 1 1/2 10

LCC1/0-12D-X 1/2 1.00 0.80 1.44 0.12 3.95 Pink P42 12 42 1 1/2 10

LCC1/0-12-X 1/2 1.75 0.80 1.44 0.12 4.86 Pink P42 12 42 1 1/2 10

LCC2/0-14A-X

2/0 AWG

1/4 0.63 0.85 1.50 0.13 3.38 Black P45 13 45 1 9/16 10

LCC2/0-14B-X 1/4 0.75 0.85 1.50 0.13 3.51 Black P45 13 45 1 9/16 10

LCC2/0-56D-X 5/16 1.00 0.85 1.50 0.13 3.76 Black P45 13 45 1 9/16 10

LCC2/0-38D-X 3/8 1.00 0.85 1.50 0.13 3.82 Black P45 13 45 1 9/16 10

LCC2/0-12D-X 1/2 1.00 0.85 1.50 0.13 4.07 Black P45 13 45 1 9/16 10

LCC2/0-12-X 1/2 1.75 0.85 1.50 0.13 4.98 Black P45 13 45 1 9/16 10

LCC3/0-14B-X

3/0 AWG

1/4 0.75 0.96 1.50 0.13 3.56 Orange P50 14 50 1 9/16 10

LCC3/0-38D-X 3/8 1.00 0.96 1.50 0.13 3.87 Orange P50 14 50 1 9/16 10

LCC3/0-12D-X 1/2 1.00 0.96 1.50 0.13 4.12 Orange P50 14 50 1 9/16 10

LCC3/0-12-X 1/2 1.75 0.96 1.50 0.13 5.03 Orange P50 14 50 1 9/16 10

LCC4/0-14B-X

4/0 AWG

1/4 0.75 1.06 1.56 0.14 3.66 Purple P54 15 54 1 5/8 10

LCC4/0-56D-X 5/16 1.00 1.06 1.56 0.14 3.92 Purple P54 15 54 1 5/8 10

LCC4/0-38D-X 3/8 1.00 1.06 1.56 0.14 3.99 Purple P54 15 54 1 5/8 10

LCC4/0-38-X 3/8 1.75 1.06 1.56 0.14 4.74 Purple P54 15 54 1 5/8 10

LCC4/0-12D-X 1/2 1.00 1.06 1.56 0.14 4.22 Purple P54 15 54 1 5/8 10

◆ LCC4/0-12-X 1/2 1.75 1.06 1.56 0.14 5.13 Purple P54 15 54 1 5/8 10

LCC250-38D-X

250 kcmil

3/8 1.00 1.17 1.60 0.14 4.09 Yellow P62 16 62 1 11/16 10

LCC250-12D-X 1/2 1.00 1.17 1.60 0.14 4.32 Yellow P62 16 62 1 11/16 10

◆ LCC250-12-X 1/2 1.75 1.17 1.60 0.14 5.23 Yellow P62 16 62 1 11/16 10

LCC300-38D-X300 kcmil

3/8 1.00 1.19 2.24 0.16 4.76 White P66 17 66 2 5/16 10

◆ LCC300-12-X 1/2 1.75 1.19 2.24 0.16 5.94 White P66 17 66 2 5/16 10

LCC350-14B-X

350 kcmil

1/4 0.75 1.28 2.24 0.17 4.33 Red P71 18 71 2 5/16 10

LCC350-38D-X 3/8 1.00 1.28 2.24 0.17 4.81 Red P71 18 71 2 5/16 10

◆ LCC350-12-X 1/2 1.75 1.28 2.24 0.17 5.99 Red P71 18 71 2 5/16 10

LCC400-14B-6

400 kcmil

1/4 0.75 1.39 2.30 0.18 4.44 Blue P76 19 76 2 3/8 6

LCC400-38D-6 3/8 1.00 1.39 2.30 0.18 4.92 Blue P76 19 76 2 3/8 6

◆ LCC400-12-6 1/2 1.75 1.39 2.30 0.18 6.10 Blue P76 19 76 2 3/8 6

LCC500-14B-6

500 kcmil

1/4 0.75 1.54 2.50 0.22 4.70 Brown P87 20 87 2 9/16 6

LCC500-38D-6 3/8 1.00 1.54 2.50 0.22 5.18 Brown P87 20 87 2 9/16 6

◆ LCC500-12-6 1/2 1.75 1.54 2.50 0.22 6.36 Brown P87 20 87 2 9/16 6

LCC600-38D-6600 kcmil

3/8 1.00 1.70 2.69 0.26 5.45 Green P94 22 94 2 3/4 6

◆ LCC600-12-6 1/2 1.75 1.70 2.69 0.26 6.63 Green P94 22 94 2 3/4 6

LCC750-38D-6750 kcmil

3/8 1.00 1.89 2.87 0.26 6.10 Black P106 24 106 2 15/16 6

◆ LCC750-12-6 1/2 1.75 1.89 2.87 0.26 7.04 Black P106 24 106 2 15/16 6

◆ LCC800-12-6 800 kcmil 1/2 1.75 1.95 2.94 0.29 7.13 Orange P107 25 — 3 6

LCC1000-38D-31000 kcmil

3/8 1.00 2.17 3.00 0.32 6.35 White P125 27 125 3 1/16 3

◆ LCC1000-12-3 1/2 1.75 2.17 3.00 0.32 7.29 White P125 27 125 3 1/16 3

cmahler

Highlight

cmahler

Highlight

cmahler

Highlight

cmahler

Rectangle

THIS COPY IS PROVIDED ON A RESTRICTED BASIS AND IS NOT TO BE USED IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF PANDUIT CORP.

Material

Plating

Wire Size

Wire Type

Wire Strip Length

Stud Size

UL Listed Wire Connector

UL Temperature Rating

C.S.A Certified Wire Connector

Panduit Color Code on Barrel

Panduit Die Index No. on Barrel

Alternate Industry Die Index No. () on Barrel

CERTIFIED

00 12/02 SAB DRL

REV DATE BY CHK

High Conductivity Seamless Copper Tube

Electro-Tin

300 kcmil

Stranded Copper; Class B: Compact, Compressed or Concentric, Class C: Concentric

2-5/16 in.

1/2 in.

Yes, for applications up to 35kv. Consult cable manufacturer for voltage stress relief instructions with applications greater than 2000 volts.

90 ° c

Yes

WHITE

P66

(17)

.63±.04 -~-----~- 1.75±.02

r---- .63 R Ref

::::> c z <{ a...

'------ .53±.02 DIA (2) PLS

1------------- 5.94±.06 --------------1

12.23±.041

Color coded barrel markings

eveledwire entry

.16±.01 LISTED Wire Connector

RELEASED

DESCRIPTION

10333

ECN

~[[]QDDI CORP. TINLEY PARK/ ILLINOIS

LCC300-12-X Copper Lug- Two-Hole, Long Barrel

SCALE DRAWING NO I CAD FILE N/ A LCC300-12-CUST

j

cmahler

Highlight

cmahler

Highlight

2

Description Rating Unit Features

Unit ID# 1 Qty: 1 MLUG - Main Incoming Line Lug Compartment

600A Catalog Number: 2191MB-BKC-52 Bottom Mounted Lugs Supplied: Lugs Supplied: Crimp type,CU wire, 300 kcmil Size Wire, 2 Cables Per Phase ** Panduit type LCC300-12-X to be provided separately. Neutral Lugs Supplied: None Metering Type : None

Unit ID# 2 Qty: 1 FCB - 3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB)

Dual 50A/15A

Trip

Catalog Number: 2193F-AKC-79L-3530CM Plug-In Unit, 150A, 65k at 480V (I6C Frame) Lugs Supplied: Std Mech/Lug Pads, #14- #1/0 AWG Size Wire, 1 Cable Per Phase Options : Unit Ground Load Contactor Unplated Cu (-79L)

Unit ID# 3 Qty: 1 FCB - 3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB)

Dual 30A/30A

Trip

Catalog Number: 2193F-AKC-79L-3232CM Plug-In Unit, 150A, 65k at 480V (I6C Frame) Lugs Supplied: Std Mech/Lug Pads, #14- #1/0 AWG Size Wire, 1 Cable Per Phase Options : Unit Ground Load Contactor Unplated Cu (-79L)

Unit ID# 4 Qty: 2 FVNR - Full Voltage Non-Rev Starter w/CB

10 HP Catalog Number: 2113B-BAB-3-5LGR-6XP-7FEEE-41CA-79L-85T-900-911 Size: 1 Wiring : NEMA Type B wiring Circuit Breaker : Instantaneous (MCP), 100kA at 480V (MCP Frame) Control Wiring : #16 AWG MTW(TEW) Cu Overload Relay(s) : E1 Plus (electronic) (-7FEE*), Trip setting adjustment from 5.4-27 AMPS Options : Selector Switch : HAND - OFF - AUTO (-3) Pilot Light(s) : ON-OFF Type : LED, Color(s) : Green, Red (-5LGR) Extra Capacity Control Power Transformer W/Pri Fuse (-6XP) E1 Plus (electronic) (-7FEEE) Unit Ground Load Contactor Unplated Cu (-79L) Elapsed Time Meter (-85T) 2 NO on Starter (-900) 2 NC on Starter (-911)

cmahler

Highlight

cmahler

Highlight

cmahler

Highlight

cmahler

Highlight

TECHNICAL DATA

CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control CentersInstantaneous Trip Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) in Combination NEMA Starter, Soft Starter (SMC) and Variable Frequency AC Drive Units

150A Frame Instantaneous Trip Motor Circuit Protector (MCP)

Application Motor circuit protector application is valid for the following CENTERLINE 2100 MCC products:

• Bulletin 2107 Full Voltage Reversing Combination Staters• Bulletin 2113 Full Voltage Non-Reversing Combination Starters• Bulletin 2123 Two Speed Non-Reversing Combination Starters• Bulletin 2127 Two Speed Reversing Combination Starters• Bulletin 2155 Combination Soft Starters• Bulletin 2163 Variable Frequency AC Combination Drive Units• Bulletin 2165 Variable Frequency AC Combination Drive with Manual

Isolated Drive Bypass• Bulletin 2173 Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Combination Starters

cmahler

Highlight

2 Technical Data

Publication 2100-TD001E-EN-P - October 2007

The information in this publication applies to Allen-Bradley motor circuit protectors (MCP) when they are used in NEMA (size 1 though 6) combination starter, soft starter controller, and variable frequency AC drive units. The particular motor circuit protector (trip range) supplied with a unit depends on the horsepower or kilowatt rating and voltage that was specified when the unit was ordered. Tables 1 - 11 list the various combinations of motor circuit protectors and unit ratings. When using Tables 1 - 11, be sure to use the line that applies to your equipment.

IMPORTANT: The information in this publication does not apply to inverse time circuit breakers. For

combination starter units, soft starter controller units and variable frequency AC drive units with inverse time

circuit breakers, refer to Publication 2100-TD002x-EN-P, Inverse Time Circuit Breakers in Combination NEMA Starter, Soft Starter (SMC), and Variable Frequency AC Drive Units.

Motor Circuit Protector Size and Adjustment

Rockwell Automation has made engineering evaluations for the protective device (motor circuit protector) selection, sizing, and setting range based on the protection rules/requirements and motor criteria as stipulated in NEC, CEC, NEMA, UL and CSA Standards, e.g. motor full load currents (FLC), X/R ratios, locked rotor currents, nominal utilization voltages, etc. Should the motor application have criteria that deviates from those stated in the aforementioned standards, higher FLC and/or motor inrush currents (greater than 1300% of the nominal FLC) may be experienced, e.g. special motors, non/off standard NEMA or application-rated motors, Design B energy efficient, Design E motors, IEC N motors, etc.

The motor circuit protector is shipped with the instantaneous trip arrow set to the lowest value. The motor full load current determines the magnetic trip setting of the motor circuit protector. Rockwell Automation recommends selecting an initial trip setting that is approximately ten times the motor nameplate full load current. The trip setting can be adjusted to a position which corresponds to the determined magnetic trip current: positions A through H for 150A and 600A frames, and A through I for 250A and 400A frames. To adjust the trip setting:

a. Make certain that the motor circuit protector operating handle is in the OFF/O position.

b. Depress the adjustment pointer with a small screwdriver, and turn clockwise to the determined setting. Verify that the motor circuit protector will not trip during motor starting. If the motor circuit protector trips when attempting to start the motor, turn the pointer clockwise to successively higher positions, until the motor circuit protector no longer trips when attempting to start the motor. Per the NEC, the trip setting of the motor circuit protector must not exceed 13 times the motor full-load current. The controller design is based on this requirement. Should Design B or E energy efficient motors (or IEC N motors) be utilized, it may be necessary to set the motor circuit protectors higher than 13 times the motor full-load current, but, must not exceed 17 times. For these applications consult the factory for controller and motor circuit protector sizing. Refer to the National Electrical Code (NEC) or the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) for more information.

NOTE: When the devices are energized, motor peak inrush current can randomly exceed the maximum limit set by the code.

Push-To-Trip Mechanism

The push-to-trip mechanism provides a manual means for tripping the motor circuit protector. Depress the red button on the motor circuit protector cover. When the button is pushed, a plunger rotates the trip bar causing the motor circuit protector to trip.

Publication 2100-TD001E-EN-P - October 2007

Technical Data 3

Horsepower and Kilowatt Ratings

The horsepower ratings for combination starter units, soft starter controller units, and variable frequency AC drive units listed in Tables 1 through 8 were determined from full load currents as specified by NEC/CEC.

Acceptable performance should occur when the motor full load current is within 15% of the value which corresponds to the horsepower or kilowatt ratings and voltages listed in the NEC/CEC. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or distributor if the motor full load current is not within these limits.

ATTENTION

!ATTENTION: The horsepower and kilowatt ratings and corresponding trip settings in Table 1 are only valid when the combination starter units are equipped with an Allen-Bradley electronic or solid-state overload relay or a Bulletin 592 eutectic alloy overload relay that has correctly sized heater elements.

When correctly selected, this combination of motor circuit protector and overload relay protects against short circuit and ground fault damage, and provides coordinated overcurrent protection in the motor branch circuit for continuous-duty rated motors, as defined in the NEC and CEC.

A motor circuit protector which has tripped may indicate the interruption of a high fault current. To ensure protection against fire and/or shock hazard, examine the current carrying parts of the combination starter units, soft starter controller units, and variable frequency drive AC units and replace if damaged. (Refer to NEMA Standards Publication Number ICS 2.2, Maintenance of Motor Controllers After a Fault Condition, and NEMA Standard Publication Number ICS 2, Parts ICS 2-302).

Publication 2100-TD001E-EN-P - October 2007 Publication 2100-TD001E-EN-P - October 2007

Table 1 Combination 2107, 2113, 2123, 2127 and 2173 Starter Units - Instantaneous Trip Motor Circuit Protector (MCP and MCPS)

(1) Use when a current limiter is not supplied, but any electronic or solid-state overload relay (SMP-1, SMP-2, SMP-3, E3, E1 Plus) is supplied. Also used for all NEMA Space Saving starter units.

(2) For Bulletin 2173 only

(3) Only when a current limiter is supplied (suffix letter "CC")

(4) Use when a current limiter is not supplied, regardless of overload relay type

(5) When 460V, 125 Hp or 150 Hp specified with circuit breaker catalog, suffix “CAH”, use the line for 400A, 460V, 200 Hp

(6) All bulletins except 2173

MCP Continuous

Current Rating

(Amperes)

NEMA Starter

Size

Horsepower Range Magnetic Trip Setting Magnetic Trip Setting High Interrupting Capacity

Suffix Letter “CA”

High Interrupting Capacity with

Current Limiter Suffix Letter “CC”

200V 230V 380 - 415V 460V 575V A B C D E F G H I Allen-Bradley Catalog Number

3 1 0.125 - 0.33 0.125 - 0.33 0.125 - 0.75 0.125 - 0.75 0.125 - 1 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 — 140M-I8P-B30140M-I8P-B3025107-101-10

3(1) 1 0.125 - 0.33 0.125 - 0.33 0.125 - 0.75 0.125 - 0.75 0.125 - 1 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 — 140M-I8P-B30S —

7 1 0.5 - 1 0.5 - 1 1 - 2 1 - 2 1.5-3(3) 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 — 140M-I8P-B70140M-I8P-B7025107-101-11

7(1) 1 0.5 - 1 0.5 - 1 1 - 2 1 - 2 1.5-3(4) 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 — 140M-I8P-B70S —

15 1 1.5 - 2 1.5 - 2 3 - 5 3 - 5 5 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 — 140M-I8P-C15140M-I8P-C1525107-101-12

15(1) 1 1.5 - 2 1.5 - 2 3 - 5 3 - 5 5 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 — 140M-I8P-C15S —

30 1 3 3 - 5 7.5 - 10 7.5 - 10 7.5 - 10 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 — 140M-I8P-C30140M-I8P-C3025107-101-13

30(1) 1 3 3 - 5 7.5 - 10 7.5 - 10 7.5 - 10 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 — 140M-I8P-C30S —

50 1 5 - 7.5 7.5 — — — 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 — 140M-I8P-C50140M-I8P-C5025107-101-14

50(1) 1 5 - 7.5 7.5 — — — 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 — 140M-I8P-C50S —

50 2 10 10 15 - 20 15 - 25 15 - 25 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 — 140M-I8P-C50140M-I8P-C5025107-101-14

50(1) 2 10 10 15 - 20 15 - 25 15 - 25 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 — 140M-I8P-C50S —

50 3 — — — — 30 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 — 140M-I8P-C50140M-I8P-C5025107-101-14

100

2 — 15 25 — — 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 —

140M-I8P-D10140M-I8P-D1025107-101-15

3 15 - 20 20 - 25 30 - 40 30 - 50 40 - 50 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 —

4 — — — — 60(2) 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 —

150L3 25 30 50 — — 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 —

140M-I8P-D15140M-I8P-D1525107-101-164 30 — 60 60(6) 75(6) 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 —

150H 4 40 40 - 50(6) 75 75 - 100(6) 100(6) 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 — 140M-I8R-D15140M-I8R-D1525107-101-16

2504(2)

— — — — 60(2) 500 565 625 690 750 810 875 935 1000 140M-JD8P-C80-W

— — — 60(2) 75(2) 750 840 935 1030 1125 1220 1315 1410 1500 140M-JD8P-D12-W —

— 40 - 50(2) — 75 - 100(2) 100(2) 875 980 1090 1200 1310 1420 1530 1640 1750 140M-JD8P-D14-W —

5 50 - 60 60 - 75 100 - 125 125 - 150(5) 125 - 200 1250 1405 1560 1720 1875 2030 2185 2340 2500 140M-JD8P-D20-W —

400(5) 5 75 100 150 200 — 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 140M-K8P-D40 —

600 6 100 - 150 125 - 150 200 - 300 250 - 350 250 - 400 1800 2400 3000 3600 4200 4800 5400 6000 — 140M-Q8P-D60 —

4 5

cmahler

Highlight

cmahler

Highlight

Þ«´´»¬·² ëçî

Ñª»®´±¿¼ Î»´¿§

ïóïêð©©©ò¿¾ò½±³ñ½¿¬¿´±¹ Ð®»º»®®»¼ ¿ª¿·́¿¾·́ ·¬§ ½¿¬ò ²±ò ¿®» ¾±´¼ò

Ð«¾ ·́½¿¬·±² ßïïéóÝßððïßóÛÒóÐ

ð

ï

î

í

ì

ë

ê

é

è

ç

ïð

ïï

ïî

ïí

Þ«´´»¬·² ëçîóÛÛ ëçîóÛÝï ëçîóÛÝîñÛÝí ëçîóÛÝë ëçî

Ì§°»Ûï Ð´« Û´»½¬®±²·½

Ñª»®´±¿¼ Î»´¿§Ûí Û´»½¬®±²·½ Ñª»®´±¿¼

Î»´¿§Ûí Ð´« Û´»½¬®±²·½

Ñª»®´±¿¼ Î»´¿§Ûí Ð´« Û´»½¬®±²·½

Ñª»®´±¿¼ Î»´¿§Û«¬»½¬·½ ß´´±§ Ñª»®´±¿¼

Î»´¿§

Î¿¬»¼ Ý«®®»²¬øÎ¿²¹»÷

ðòï�èðð ß ðòì�ëððð ß ðòî�îîëð ß

ÒÛÓß Ñ°»®¿¬·²¹Ê±´¬¿¹»ô Ò±³·²¿´

êððÊ

×ÛÝ Ñ°»®¿¬·²¹Ê±´¬¿¹»ô Ò±³·²¿´

êçðñïðððÊ êçðñïðððÊ �

Ñª»®´±¿¼ Ì§°» Û´»½¬®±²·½ Ó·½®±°®±½»±®óÞ¿»¼ Û«½¬»½¬·½ ß´´±§

Ì®·° Ý´¿ øÚ·¨»¼÷ � � ïðô îðô íð

Ì®·° Ý´¿øß¼¶«¬¿¾´»÷

ïðô ïëô îðô íð ë�íð �

ß³¾·»²¬Ì»³°»®¿¬«®»Ý±³°»²¿¬»¼

�

Î»»¬ Ì§°» ß«¬±³¿¬·½ ¿²¼ Ó¿²«¿´ ß«¬±³¿¬·½ ¿²¼ Ó¿²«¿´ ß«¬±³¿¬·½ ¿²¼ Ó¿²«¿´ ß«¬±³¿¬·½ ¿²¼ Ó¿²«¿´ Ó¿²«¿´ Ñ²´§

ß¼¶«¬³»²¬Î¿²¹»

ëæï ëæï ëæï ëæï �

Ð¸¿» Ô± í ß¼¶«¬¿¾´» Ü»´¿§ ß¼¶«¬¿¾´» Ü»´¿§ ß¼¶«¬¿¾´» Ü»´¿§ �

Ù®±«²¼ øÛ¿®¬¸÷Ú¿«´¬

Ñ°¬·±²¿´ � Í»²·¬·ª» Í»²·¬·ª» �

Ñª»®½«®®»²¬øÖ¿³÷ Ü»¬»½¬·±²

Ñ°¬·±²¿´ �

Í¬¿´´ Ü»¬»½¬·±² � �

Ë²¼»®´±¿¼Ü»¬»½¬·±²

� �

Ý«®®»²¬×³¾¿´¿²½»

� �

ÐÌÝ Ì¸»®³·¬±®Ó±²·¬±®·²¹

Ñ°¬·±²¿´ � �

É¿®²·²¹ Í»¬¬·²¹ � �

ÒòÝò Ì®·° Ý±²¬¿½¬

ÒòÑò ß´¿®³Ý±²¬¿½¬

� � � øÑ°¬·±²÷

Ò±ò ±º Ñ«¬°«¬ � ï î î �

Ò±ò ±º ×²°«¬ � î ì ê �

ÑÜÊßøÜ»ª·½»Ò»¬÷Ý±²º±®³¿²½»

Ñ°¬·±²¿´ �

Ê¿®·¿¾´»Ú®»¯«»²½§ Ü®·ª»øÊÚÜ÷Ý±³°¿¬·¾´»

�

Ê±´¬¿¹»Ü»¬»½¬·±²

� � � �

Ð±©»®Ó±²·¬±®·²¹

� � � �

Ð®±¼«½¬Í»´»½¬·±²

Ð¿¹» ïóïêï Ð¿¹» ïóïêí Ð¿¹» ïóïêì

Ð®±¼«½¬ Ñª»®ª·»©

Ñª»®´±¿¼ Î»´¿§

ëçîóÛÛ

Ûï Ð´« Û´»½¬®±²·½Ñª»®´±¿¼ Î»´¿§

Þ«´´»¬·² ëçî

Ûï Ð´« Û´»½¬®±²·½ Ñª»®´±¿¼ Î»´¿§

ïóïêï©©©ò¿¾ò½±³ñ½¿¬¿´±¹ Ð®»º»®®»¼ ¿ª¿·́¿¾·́ ·¬§ ½¿¬ò ²±ò ¿®» ¾±´¼ò


ð

ï

î

í

ì

ë

ê

é

è

ç

ïð

ïï

ïî

ïí

Ñª»®ª·»©ñÐ®±¼«½¬ Í»´»½¬·±²

Ûï Ð´« Û´»½¬®±²·½ Ñª»®´±¿¼ Î»´¿§

ðòï � çð ß Ý«®®»²¬ Î¿²¹»

Í·²¹´»ó ¿²¼ Ì¸®»»óÐ¸¿» Ü»ª·½»

Í»´ºóÐ±©»®»¼

Ð¸¿» Ô± Ð®±¬»½¬·±²

É·¼» ß¼¶«¬³»²¬ Î¿²¹» øëæï÷

×²»®¬óÓ±´¼»¼ Ð±©»® Ý±²²»½¬·±²

ï ÒòÑò ¿²¼ ï ÒòÝò ×±´¿¬»¼ ß«¨·´·¿®§ Ý±²¬¿½¬ øÞêðð Î¿¬»¼÷

Ô±© Û²»®¹§ Ý±²«³°¬·±² øïëð ³É÷

ß³¾·»²¬ Ì»³°»®¿¬«®» Ý±³°»²¿¬·±²

Ê··¾´» Ì®·° ×²¼·½¿¬·±²

Í»´»½¬¿¾´» Ì®·° Ý´¿ øïðô ïëô îðô ±® íð÷

Í»´»½¬¿¾´» Ó¿²«¿´ñß«¬±óÓ¿²«¿´ Î»»¬

Ì¿¾´» ±º Ý±²¬»²¬

Ð®±¼«½¬ Í»´»½¬·±² òòòòòò ¬¸· °¿¹»

ß°°®±¨·³¿¬»Ü·³»²·±²òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòò ïóïêî

ß½½»±®·»òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòò îóîïî

Í°»½·º·½¿¬·±²òòòòòòòòòòòòòò îóîïë

Í¬¿²¼¿®¼ Ý±³°´·¿²½»

×ÛÝ ÛÒ êðçìéóìóïÛÒ êðçìéóëóïÝÍß îîòîô Ò±ò ïìËÔ ëðè

Ý»®¬·º·½¿¬·±²

½ËÔ« Ô·¬»¼ øÚ·´» Ò±ò ÛïìèìðôÙ«·¼» Ò±ò ÒÕÝÎô ÒÕÝÎé÷

Ð®±¼«½¬ Í»´»½¬·±²

Þ«´´»¬·² ëçîóÛÛ � Ì¸®»» Ð¸¿» Ü»ª·½»

Í»´»½¬¿¾´» Ì®·° Ý´¿ øïðô ïëô îðô íð÷

Í»´»½¬¿¾´» Ó¿²«¿´ñß«¬±óÓ¿²«¿´ Î»»¬

Ó±«²¬ ¬± Ý±²¬¿½¬±® ß¼¶«¬³»²¬ Î¿²¹» ÅßÃ Ý¿¬ò Ò±ò

ðð

ðòï�ðòë ëçîóÛÛßÌ

ðòî�ïòð ëçîóÛÛÞÌ

ïòð�ëòð ëçîóÛÛÝÌ

íòî�ïê ëçîóÛÛÜÌ

ð�î

ðòî�ïòð ëçîóÛÛÞÝ

ïòð�ëòð ëçîóÛÛÝÝ

íòî�ïê ëçîóÛÛÜÝ

ëòì�îé ëçîóÛÛÛÝ

ç�ìë ëçîóÛÛÚÝ

íç�ìë ëçîóÛÛÚÜ

ïè�çð ëçîóÛÛÙÜ

ì íð�ïëð ëçîóÛÛØÛ

ë êð�íðð ëçîóÛÛÕÚ

ê ïîð�êðð ëçîóÛÛÓÙ

Þ«´´»¬·² ëçîÍóÛÛ � Í·²¹´»óÐ¸¿» Ü»ª·½»

Í»´»½¬¿¾´» Ì®·° Ý´¿ øïðô ïëô îðô íð÷

Í»´»½¬¿¾´» Ó¿²«¿´ñß«¬±óÓ¿²«¿´ Î»»¬

Ó±«²¬ ¬± Ý±²¬¿½¬±® ß¼¶«¬³»²¬ Î¿²¹» ÅßÃ Ý¿¬ò Ò±ò

ðð

ïòð�ëòð ëçîÍóÛÛÐÌ

íòî�ïê ëçîÍóÛÛÎÌ

ëòì�îé ëçîÍóÛÛÍÌ

ð�î

ïòð�ëòð ëçîÍóÛÛÐÝ

íòî�ïê ëçîÍóÛÛÎÝ

ëòì�îé ëçîÍóÛÛÍÝ

ç�ìë ëçîÍóÛÛÌÝ

í ïè�çð ëçîÍóÛÛËÜëòì�îé

Þ«´´»¬·² ëçîóÛÛ � Ì¸®»» Ð¸¿» Ü»ª·½»

Þ«´´»¬·² ëçî

Ûï Ð´« Û´»½¬®±²·½ Ñª»®´±¿¼ Î»´¿§

ïóïêî©©©ò¿¾ò½±³ñ½¿¬¿´±¹ Ð®»º»®®»¼ ¿ª¿·́¿¾·́ ·¬§ ½¿¬ò ²±ò ¿®» ¾±´¼ò


ð

ï

î

í

ì

ë

ê

é

è

ç

ïð

ïï

ïî

ïí

ß°°®±¨·³¿¬» Ü·³»²·±²

Ü·³»²·±² ¿®» ¸±©² ·² ³·´´·³»¬»® ø·²½¸»÷ò Ü·³»²·±² ¿®» ²±¬ ·²¬»²¼»¼ ¬± ¾» «»¼ º±® ³¿²«º¿½¬«®·²¹ °«®°±»ò

Ñª»®´±¿¼ Ý¿¬ò Ò±ò Ý±²¬¿½¬±® ß Þ Ý Ú Øï Øî Ö

ëçîóÛÛÁ Á Ý Í·¦» ð ¿²¼ ïçï

øíóçñïê÷ïçè

øéóîëñíî÷ïïì

øìóïñî÷ïïí

øìóéñïê÷ïèð

øéóïñïê÷éð

øîóíñì÷çòè

øíñè÷

ëçîóÛÛÁ Á Ý Í·¦» îïðð

øíóïëñïê÷îíí

øçóïïñêì÷ïïì

øìóïñî÷ïïç

øìóïïñïê÷îïç

øèóëñè÷èð

øíóëñíî÷çòèøíñè÷

ëçîóÛÛÁ Á Ü Í·¦» íïëëòëøêóïñè÷

ííêòéøïíóïñì÷

ïëìøêóïñïê÷

ïëðòïøëóîçñíî÷

îïçòçøèóîïñíî÷

ïíçòçøëóïñî÷

ïçòçøîëñíî÷

ëçîóÛÛÁ Á Û Í·¦» ìïèéòëøéóíñè÷

ìïçøïêóïñî÷

ïççøéóîéñíî÷

ïçèøéóïíñïê÷

íèðøïë÷

ïêðøêóïñè÷

îìøêïñêì÷

ëçîóÛÛÁ Á Ú Í·¦» ëïèéòëøéóíñè÷

ìðïòêøïëóïíñïê÷

îðìòéøèóïñïê÷

îïîòïøèóçñêì÷

íèðøïë÷

ïêðøêóïñè÷

îéòëøïóëñêì÷

ëçîóÛÛÁ Á Ù Í·¦» êííêòè

øïíóïñì÷êíéòè

øîëóéñêì÷îëìøïð÷

îèïòéøïïóíñíî÷

ìíìòèøïéóïñè÷

îîêòíøèóîçñíî÷

�

ïòéêøììòè÷ ìòîì

øïðéòê÷

ë

ëòíøïíìòë÷

ðòîï øëòí÷Ó¿ ò̈ Î»»¬

Ì®¿ª»́

ðòëçøïë÷

ïòîøíðòê÷

ïòèëøìéòï÷

ìòêëøïïè÷

Í·¦» ðð

Í·¦» ð�íÍ·¦» ð�í

ß Þ Ý Ú Øï Øî Ö

çï ïçè ïïì ïïí ïèð éð çòèëçîóÛÛÁ Á Ý Í·¦» ð ¿²¼ ï

øíóçñïê÷ øéóîëñíî÷ øìóïñî÷ øìóéñïê÷ øéóïñïê÷ øîóíñì÷ øíñè÷

Ñª»®´±¿¼ Ý¿¬ò Ò±ò Ý±²¬¿½¬±®

Rockwell Automation / Allen-Bradley 1

Product Details and Certifications

Product: 140M-I8P-C30S

Description: MCP, Standard Magnetic Trip (Adjustable), 30 A, High Performance, Frame Size I

SYSTEM VOLTAGE DATA

Supply Voltage 600V 60Hz

Maximum Available Fault Current 5 kA

CIRCUIT BREAKER

Circuit Breaker Type Motor Circuit Protector

Rated Operational Current (A) 30A

Application Standard Magnetic Trip (Adjustable)

Frame Size Frame Size I

Magnetic Trip Current (A) 90 - 300A Adjustable

Breaking Capacity High Breaking Capacity

Overload Type for Electonic Overloads

UL Listed Application Ratings UL 489 Instantaneous Trip Circuit Breaker

FACTORY OPTIONS

Factory Modifications - Left Front Mounting None

Factory Modifications - Right Front

Mounting

None

TERMINAL LUG DATA

Important Information! Stainless Steel Terminal Lugs (#14-1/0) are Factory Installed.

Replacements are available for field installation. See below to order.

Dimensions and Weight

Weight (kg / lbs) 2.00 / 4.40

Product Details and Certifications Product: 140U-I6C3-C15 Description: 15A Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole, Frame Size I, Medium Breaking Capacity

SYSTEM VOLTAGE DATA Supply Voltage, Maximum 600V 60Hz Maximum Available Fault Current 100kA@240V, 65kA@480V, 25kA@600V

CIRCUIT BREAKER Circuit Breaker Type Molded Case Circuit Breaker Application Inverse Time, Thermal-Magnetic Trip (Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic) Rated Operational Current (A) 15A Frame Size Frame Size I Magnetic Trip Current (A) 500A Min - 800A Max Fixed Breaking Capacity Medium Breaking Capacity Certifications UL 489, CSA 22.2 No. 5

FACTORY OPTIONS Factory Modifications - Left Front Mounting None Factory Modifications - Right Front Mounting None

TERMINAL LUG DATA Important Information! #14AWG - #1/0 AWG, Cu/Al

Dimensions and Weight Weight (kg / lbs) 2.04 / 4.5

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/index.html


Product Details and Certifications Product: 140U-I6C3-C30 Description: 30A Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole, Frame Size I, Medium Breaking Capacity

SYSTEM VOLTAGE DATA Supply Voltage, Maximum 600V 60Hz Maximum Available Fault Current 100kA@240V, 65kA@480V, 25kA@600V

CIRCUIT BREAKER Circuit Breaker Type Molded Case Circuit Breaker Application Inverse Time, Thermal-Magnetic Trip (Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic) Rated Operational Current (A) 30A Frame Size Frame Size I Magnetic Trip Current (A) 500A Min - 1000A Max Fixed Breaking Capacity Medium Breaking Capacity Certifications UL 489, CSA 22.2 No. 5

FACTORY OPTIONS Factory Modifications - Left Front Mounting None Factory Modifications - Right Front Mounting None

TERMINAL LUG DATA Important Information! #14AWG - #1/0 AWG, Cu/Al

Dimensions and Weight Weight (kg / lbs) 2.04 / 4.5



Product Details and Certifications

Product: 140U-I6C3-C50

Description: 50A Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 3-Pole, Frame Size I, Medium Breaking Capacity

SYSTEM VOLTAGE DATA

Supply Voltage, Maximum 600V 60Hz

Maximum Available Fault Current 100kA@240V, 65kA@480V, 25kA@600V

CIRCUIT BREAKER

Circuit Breaker Type Molded Case Circuit Breaker

Application Inverse Time, Thermal-Magnetic Trip (Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic)

Rated Operational Current (A) 50A

Frame Size Frame Size I

Magnetic Trip Current (A) 600A Min - 1200A Max Fixed

Breaking Capacity Medium Breaking Capacity

Certifications UL 489, CSA 22.2 No. 5

FACTORY OPTIONS

Factory Modifications - Left Front Mounting None

Factory Modifications - Right Front Mounting None

TERMINAL LUG DATA

Important Information! #14AWG - #1/0 AWG, Cu/Al

Dimensions and Weight

Weight (kg / lbs) 2.04 / 4.5

WStone

Text Box

Appendix A Main Switchboard SWBD

WStone

Callout

VFD ASR #4

WStone

Callout

VFD ASR #3

WStone

Text Box

MSB SUBMITTAL 16018-MSB-01 05-31-2013

PowerLogic® Series 4000 Circuit MonitorsIn the world of business, high productivity equals high profitability. And nothing lowers productivity faster than unplanned downtime. Whether your business takes place in offices, classrooms, operating rooms, or on the factory floor, a reliable supply of electrical power is a necessity. The powerful PowerLogic Series 4000 Circuit Monitors (CM4250 and CM4000T) provide information on all aspects of power quality—providing power quality summary information via web page, even notifying you of power quality events by e-mail (with optional Ethernet card). The Series 4000 Circuit Monitors capture and store multiple levels of information on each event to help you pinpoint the source of a problem. By applying the latest IEEE and IEC power quality standards, along with advanced features available in no other power monitor, the Circuit Monitors deliver the information you need to improve power system reliability and minimize unplanned downtime.

And the Series 4000 Circuit Monitors are more than just advanced power quality monitors; they are also highly accurate energy monitors with the ability to monitor electricity and other utilities including gas, compressed air, water, and steam. Flexible I/O for pulse counting, shift energy logging, and energy trending and forecasting, are just a few of the features designed to help you manage and reduce total energy costs.

Key Features and Benefits

Web-enabled access to information—HTML pages let you view information using a standard web browser (with optional Ethernet card). Easily share information to improve efficiency.

Email on alarm—Customizable schedules to ensure that the correct personnel are notified. Provides immediate notification of problems for fast correction.

Extensive onboard memory—16 MB of standard onboard memory (expandable to 32 MB) to capture billing data, events, and waveforms. Fourteen log files, with individually configurable quantities and logging interval.

Power quality summary—Combines each power quality category into a single index to indicate the general level of power quality at the metering point.

Disturbance direction detection—Indicates whether a disturbance occurred upstream or downstream of the meter and provides a level of confidence. Helps to locate the source of disturbances.

Harmonic power flows—When a meter is placed at the point of common coupling, harmonic power flows help determine whether harmonic currents originated inside the facility or out on the utility grid.

Impulsive transient detection (CM4000T)—Capture extremely short duration (200 nanosecond) voltage events to determine their source. Verify the adequacy of transient mitigation equipment.

Flicker measurement (CM4000T)—Measures voltage flicker according to IEC standards. Can be used to determine the level of flicker due to internal and external influences.

Designed to be applied on mains and critical loads, the Series 4000 Circuit Monitors can help you measure and control energy costs, reduce downtime, and extend the life of your equipment.

Applications • Mains• Critical power circuits• Generators• Circuits feeding sensitive processes/loads

. . . continued on page 2

Features and Benefits cont...

100 millisecond logging—Provides 100 ms average values for per-phase amps, volts, kW, kVAR, kVA, PF, and frequency. Useful for characterizing motor starts, generator startups and shock loads, transformer energizing, cold load pickup, and auto-transfer switch operation.

Cycle by cycle logging—A recording of up to 60 seconds of cycle-by-cycle data, triggered by a disturbance. Useful in applications where waveform capture provides too much data, and 100 ms recording not enough resolution.

Alarm setpoint learning—Patented feature that allows a meter to learn the appropriate alarm settings based on the operational parameters of the electrical system at the monitoring point.

Highly accurate—ANSI C12.20, 0.04% accuracy allows billing and auditing with confidence and precision.

Energy summary—Provides summary and trending information for real and apparent energy and 4 input metering channels.

Number of 9’s counter—Determine the electrical system’s percentage uptime with respect to total operational time.

CM4250 HighlightsHighly accurate and equipped with one of the most powerful processors in its class, the Series 4000 Circuit Monitor Model CM4250 provides the power and functionality needed to control energy costs and increase power system reliability. A fast sample rate (512 samples per cycle) provides the ability to detect almost all short duration and steady state power quality problems including oscillatory and low frequency impulsive transients. Combine this with world-class accuracy and unique features like anti-aliasing filters and the ability to measure interharmonic voltages, and it’s easy to see why the CM4250 is the right meter for high-end energy and power quality monitoring applications.

Eliminate erroneous conclusions—IEC 61000-4-7 is the first power quality measurement standard to address the issue of aliasing. Aliasing occurs when a digital meter tries to measure frequency components above its useful range. High frequency components are ‘folded’ down into the measurable range causing measurement error (fig 1). The CM4250 uses anti-aliasing filters to eliminate frequency components that are above a monitoring device’s measurable range, thereby improving its accuracy in the measurable range. Anti-aliasing filters can help eliminate erroneous conclusions when analyzing waveforms and troubleshooting problems.

Detect and measure interharmonics—Interharmonics are frequency components that fall between integer multiples of the fundamental frequency. For example, in a 60 Hz system, frequency components between 60 Hz and 120 Hz are called interharmonics, as are components between 120 and 180 Hz, and so on. Interharmonics can adversely affect the operation of some end-use equipment. The CM4250 measures interharmonic voltages up to the 50th harmonic, in both 50 and 60 Hz systems (fig 2). The ability to detect and measure interharmonics allows for a more detailed examination of the frequency spectrum and can provide needed information to solve power quality problems.

(fig 1)

(fig 2)

Get the complete story—A high sample rate is critical to capture the true extremes of a fast impulsive transient. Sampled at 512 samples per cycle (spc), the peak magnitude appears to be around 850 volts. The CM4000T's transient wfc sampled at 83,333 spc (at 60 Hz) provides an accurate and detailed picture of the transient and shows the actual peak voltage to be 2,800 volts (fig 3). This gives a troubleshooter the accurate information needed to diagnose and correct transient problems. It can also be used to confirm the effectiveness of transient mitigation solutions.

Quantify the magnitude and duration of transients—The severity of a transient is related both to its magnitude and duration. The CM4000T puts transients into one of nine ‘buckets’ based on magnitude and duration. A higher count in a specific bucket indicates more transient events occurring within the same magnitude and duration range. With optional Ethernet card, you can view the information on a web page (fig 4).

Determine the true impact—The CM4000T performs a stress calculation to determine at a glance the circuits that have received the greatest stress from transient overvoltage. A transient stress bar chart can be viewed on a web page. In the Transient Analysis chart shown (fig 5), it’s easy to see that Phase A has received the highest accumulated stress.

Detect and measure flicker—Flicker generally occurs at frequencies of 6-8 Hz, and is visible with the naked eye. It can lead to headaches, stress, and irritability. It can also result in the malfunction of some sensitive equipment. The CM4000T provides short-term and long-term flicker measurements based on an IEC standard. Web pages can be used to view time plots of flicker data (fig 6).

(fig 6)

(fig 5)

(fig 4)

(fig 3)

CM4000T HighlightsIdeal for critical power and large energy users who cannot afford to be shut down, the Series 4000 Circuit Monitor Model CM4000T can detect and record transient voltages that exceed the voltage withstand of sensitive equipment. The CM4000T detects both oscillatory and extremely fast impulsive voltage transients—an industry first in a full-featured permanently mounted Circuit Monitor. And since the CM4000T is permanently installed, you get 24/7 transient monitoring; even shutting down the associated PC software does not prevent ongoing monitoring and data capture.

© 2006 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved

Document # 3020HO0601 January 2006 Replaces Doc #3020HO0001 and Doc #3020HO0101

Visit our Web site at www.powerlogic.com

Feature Comparison

Capability CM4250 CM4000T

Basic Instrumentation ■ ■Advanced Instrumentation ■ ■High-speed Logging ■ ■Optional GPS Time Synchronization ■ ■Event Recording ■ ■Flexible I/O ■ ■Programmable Math/Logic Functions ■ ■High-speed Alarming ■ ■Alarm Setpoint Learning ■ ■Disturbance Direction Detection ■ ■Anti-aliasing Filters ■Sampling Rate (at 50 Hz) 512 100,000/512

Sampling Rate (at 60 Hz) 512 83,333/512

Advanced Power Quality ■ ■Transient Detection Rate 30.77 kHz 5 MHz

Flicker ■Interharmonics ■Accuracy IEC Class 0.2 0.2

Accuracy ANSI Class 12.20 12.20

For a complete list of features see the PowerLogic Selection Guide (document no. 3000BR0001). Sampling at 5 MHz, the CM4000T can capture transients as short as 200 nanoseconds in duration. At 30.77KHz, the CM4250 can capture transients as short as 32.5 microseconds in duration.

Ordering Information

Description Part Number

Circuit Monitors

Advanced energy and power quality monitor CM4250

Advanced energy and power quality monitor with high-speed transient detection CM4000T

Optional Displays

Backlit LCD Series 4000 monitors - 4 line x 20 character CMDLC

Vacuum fluorescent display w/ IR port for Series 4000 monitors - 4 line x 20 character CMDVF

Communications and I/O Options

Ethernet communications card for Series 4000 monitors: 100BaseFX, 10/100 BaseT, RS-485 port, web server for access to information via a browser

ECC21

I/O card: 4 status inputs, 3 relay & 1 pulse output IOC44

I/O extender module: 4 status & 4 analog inputs IOX0404

I/O extender module: 4 in & 2 out status (DC), 1in & 1out analog IOX2411

I/O extender module: 8 status inputs (120V AC) IOX08

rphares

Line

rphares

Line

rphares

Line

rphares

Line

rphares

Line

PowerLogic® CM4000 series circuit monitors

Power quality monitoring and analysis with reliability

Buildings Industry Data Center

Intelligent metering and control devicesWhether in offices, classrooms, operating rooms, or on the factory floor, reliable electrical power is crucial to your business. The PowerLogic® CM4250 and CM4000T circuit monitors apply the latest IEEE and IEC power quality standards and provide multiple levels of information on power quality events, helping you pinpoint the source of problems. The CM4000 series circuit monitors are more than just advanced power quality monitors; they are also accurate energy monitors that can measure and record energy usage for all utilities. Flexible I/O for pulse counting, shift energy logging, and energy trending and forecasting are just a few of the features designed to help you manage and reduce total energy costs.

Typical applicationsMeasure and control energy costs

Verify utility bills; participate in utility rate reduction programs >

Reveal energy waste and inefficiencies to reduce energy consumption >

Verify savings that result from equipment upgrades, energy efficiency programs, or >performance contracts

Perform demand and power factor control to reduce demand charges >

Allocate or sub-bill energy costs to departments, processes, or tenants >

Measure all utilities (water, air, gas, electric, etc.) and optimize >energy procurement

Improve power quality and reliabilityReceive early warning of impending problems that could lead to equipment problems or downtime >

Diagnose and isolate the cause of power quality-related equipment or process problems >

Verify reliable operation of power distribution and mitigation equipment >

Proactively assess power quality trends and conditions to identify vulnerabilities >

Baseline power quality conditions and verify improvements as a >result of equipment upgrades

Optimize equipment useProlong asset life by balancing loading, and measuring and reducing harmonics and other factors >that cause heating and shorten equipment life.

Maximize the use of existing capacity and avoid unnecessary capital purchases by understanding >loading and identifying spare capacity on existing equipment

FeaturesAdvanced metering for energy, demand, and power values >

Class 0.2s revenue accuracy >

Energy trending and forecasting >

Expandable onboard memory for logging, events, waveforms and more >

Extensive power quality information including sag/swell and transient detection >

Setpoint driven event recording and alarms via e-mail >

Ethernet communications option >

Web-enabled access to information (with Ethernet option) >

Flexible I/O for status monitoring, total utilities monitoring, and control >

Power quality monitoring and analysisCM4000 series circuit monitors provide accurate and fast alarm detection and multiple levels of information on each power quality event to help you pinpoint the source of a problem, including:

Power quality and alarm summary and trending: provides an indication of >system health over time

Disturbance direction detection: determine the source of a disturbance >by indicating whether it originated upstream or downstream of the meter

High-speed transient detection (CM4000T) >

At 83,333 samples-per-second; captures true deviation extremes•

Captures impulsive transients shorter than 1 microsecond in duration•

Calculates transient stress and quantifies by magnitude/duration.•

Harmonic power flows: helps determine the source of harmonic currents >

Flicker measurement and trending (CM4000T): measures, trends voltage >flicker according to IEC 61000-4-15 standard

Interharmonics measurement (CM4250): measures interharmonics that >can adversely affect equipment

Waveshape alarm: detects and captures sub-cycle events that do not >exceed the thresholds of sag/swell alarms such as capacitor switching transients and sub-cycle transfer switch operations

100 ms event recording >

Records 100 ms average values, for up to 5 minutes, for per-phase •amps, volts, kW, kVAR, power factor, freq; triggered by alarm or relay

Characterizes motor starts, generator startups and shock loads, •transformer energizing, cold load pickup, and transfer switch operation

Cycle-by-cycle event recording: logs cycle-by-cycle values for eight >current and voltage channels; triggered by alarm or relay

EN50160 evaluation: ten power quality categories based on >EN50160 standard

The circuit monitor produces an overall Power Quality Index, and one for each category to indicate system health over time.

At 83,333 samples per cycle (at 60 Hz), The CM4000T captures the true extremes of a transient.

The CM4000 series circuit monitors feature patented technology including a disturbance direction detection feature which helps locate the source of a disturbance by indicating whether it occurred upstream or downstream of the meter.

Loads Loads

Utility

rphares

Line

rphares

Line

Circuit monitor instrumentationThe circuit monitor is a true rms meter capable of exceptionally accurate measurement of highly nonlinear loads. A sophisticated sampling technique enables accurate, true rms measurement through the 255th harmonic. Over 50 metered values plus extensive minimum and maximum data can be viewed on the display or remotely using software.

Energy measurement and trendingRevenue accurate — Meets IEC 62053-22 and -23, and ANSI C12.20 class 0.2 accuracy standards.

Accumulates energy in signed (bidirectional) and unsigned (absolute) >modes.

Conditional energy accumulation lets you turn energy accumulation >ON or OFF in response to an external command or a digital input state change.

Energy trends show past performance and forecast usage so you can >base purchasing decisions on actual load profiles, negotiate better utility rates, and avoid unnecessary peak demand penalties.

Shift energy log tracks energy cost per production unit for up to >three shifts.

The circuit monitor trends energy and demand info and forecasts usage to help predict future performance. Trend data can be viewed on an ECC web page (above) or in System Manager software.

Real-Time Readings Energy Readings

•Current(perphase,N,G,3-Phase) •AccumulatedEnergy,Real

•Voltage(L–L,L–N,N–G,3-Phase) •AccumulatedEnergy,Reactive

•RealPower(perphase,3-Phase •AccumulatedEnergy,Apparent

•ReactivePower(perphase,3-Phase •BidirectionalReadings

•ApparentPower(perphase,3-Phase •ReactiveEnergybyQuadrant

•PowerFactor(perphase,3-Phase •IncrementalEnergy

•Frequency •ConditionalEnergy

•Temperature(internalambient)

•THD(currentandvoltage)

•K-Factor(perphase)

Demand Readings Power Analysis Values

•DemandCurrent(perphasepresent,3-Phaseaverage) •CrestFactor(perphase)

•DemandVoltage(perphasepresent,3-Phaseaverage) •DisplacementPowerFactor(perphase,3-Phase)

•AveragePowerFactor(3-Phasetotal) •FundamentalVoltages(perphase)

•DemandRealPower(perphasepresent,peak) •FundamentalCurrents(perphase)

•DemandReactivePower(perphasepresent,peak) •FundamentalRealPower(perphase)

•DemandApparentPower(perphasepresent,peak) •FundamentalReactivePower(perphase)

•CoincidentReadings •HarmonicPowerFlow

•PredictedPowerDemand •Unbalance(currentandvoltage);

•PhaseRotation

•HarmonicMagnitudesandAngles(perphase)

•SequenceComponents

Data and event logging32 MB of standard non-volatile memory (expandable to 64 MB) to >capture billing data, events, and waveforms with data gaps.

Fourteen data log files; user can select the quantities and log interval >for each.

Factory default logs begin logging on power up. >

Additional logs stored in non-volatile memory include energy logs, alarm >log, waveform logs, min/max logs, and maintenance log.

Wiring connectionsAccepts standard CT and PT inputs >

No PTs needed for systems up to 600 V ac (CM4000T) or >690 V ac (CM4250)

Supports 3- and 4-wire Wye, and - 3 and 4-wire Delta system types >

Wiring diagnostics test helps diagnose CT/PT wiring errors >

CommunicationsStandard RS-485 and RS-232 Modbus slave ports >

Optional Ethernet card (ECC21) with RS-485 Modbus master port >

10Mbaudor100MbaudEthernet;UTPorfiber >

Gateway functionality; daisy-chain 31 devices to RS-485 port >

Alarm notification via e-mail for up to 15 users >

10 user-customizable web pages >

Interval energy logging and viewing via web page >

Simultaneous communication on all comm ports. >

Setpoint driven alarmsOver 70 pre-defined alarms >

Factory default alarms enabled on power up >

Send alarms via e-mail (with Ethernet option) >

Alarms can be configured to turn on a digital output or operate a relay >output; trigger a waveform capture, data log entry, 100 ms recording, or cycle-by-cycle recording

Alarm summary log tracks alarm activity for over 15 alarm categories and >trends it over time

Indicates if an alarm is occurring more or less frequently by placing it in >one of five groups: much worse, worse, stable, better, and much better

Patented alarm setpoint learning feature allows a circuit monitor to >learn the normal operating ranges for specified alarm quantities and recommend alarm setpoints

Create summary alarms by combining alarms using Boolean logic >(AND, OR, etc.)

When viewed in System Manager software, the circuit monitors’ on-board alarms provide a wealth of information and links to event-triggered waveforms.

Workstations

Modbus TCP/IP

Web Browsers

Ethernet TCP/ IP

Serial Serial

CM4250

with ECC EGX

The circuit monitor’s alarm trend log indicates whether alarm conditions are improving, holding steady, or becoming worse.

Customizable web pagesBrowser access to real-time web pages >(with optional ECC card); no special software required.

Usethedefaultwebpages,orreplacethem >with up to 10 custom pages.

View information from the circuit monitor and >from devices connected to the circuit monitor’s serial master port.

Downloadable firmwareDownload firmware updates over any >communications port

Keepthecircuitmonitorup-to-datewiththe >latest features

Metering SpecificationsCurrent Inputs (each channel)Current range 0–10ANominal current CT (secondary 5) 1 or 5 AVoltage Inputs (each channel)Voltage range 1–690L-L(CM4250),1–600L-L(CM4000T);400L-NNominal voltage PT (secondary), 100, 110, 115, 120 VFrequency Range 40–70Hz,350–450HzHarmonic ResponseFrequency 40-70 Hz Upto255thharmonicFrequency 350-450 HZ Upto31stharmonicStandardDataUpdateRate 1 secondAccuracyCurrent (measured) Phase and Neutral:

± (0.04% of reading + 0.025% full scale) (Full scale = 10A)

Voltage ± (0.04% of reading + 0.025% full scale) (Full scale: CM4250 = 690 V; CM400T = 600 V)

Total power: Real, Reactive, Apparent:

0.075% of reading + 0.025% of full scale

True Power Factor ±0.002 from 0.5 leading to 0.5 laggingEnergy and Demand ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class,

IEC 62053-22 and -23 Class 0.2 SFrequency:50/60 Hz ±0.01 Hz at 40-70 Hz400 Hz ±0.10 Hz at 350-450 HzClock/Calendar (at 25 C) Less than ±1.5 seconds in 24 hours (1 ms resolution)Metering Input Electrical SpecificationsCurrent InputsNominal 5.0 A rmsMetering Over-range 10 A maximumOvercurrent withstand Continuous 40 A rms (CM4250); 15 A rms (CM4000T) 100 A rms 10 seconds in 1 hour 500 A rms 1 second in 1 hour

Input Impedance Less than 0.1 OhmBurden Less than 0.15 VAAnalog-to-digital converter CM4250 16 bit resolution CM4000T 14 bit resolutionAnti-Aliasing Filters (CM4250) 50dB attenuation at ½ sample rateVoltage InputsNominal full scale CM4250 400 V ac line-to-neutral; 690 line-to-lineCM4000T 347 line-to-neutral; 600 line-to-lineMetering Over-range 50%Input Impedance CM4250: greater than 5 MΩ

CM4000T: greater than 2 MΩ (L-L); 1 MΩ (L-N)Measurement overvoltage capacityCM4250: CATIV–upto2000m;

CATIII–2000–3000mCM4000T CAT II up to 2000 mControl Power Input SpecificationsAC Control PowerOperating Input Range 90-305 V acBurden, maximum 50 VAFrequency Range 45-67 Hz, 350-450 HzIsolation 2400 V, 1 minuteRide-through on power loss 0.1 second at 120 V acDC Control PowerOperating Input Range 100-300 V dcBurden, maximum 30 W maximumIsolation CM4250 3400 V dc, 1 minute CM4000T 3250 V dc, 1 minuteRide-through on power loss 0.1 second at 120 V dcOvervoltage category II per IEC 1010-1, second edition

Remote display options(CMDLC and CMDVF)

4-line display, backlit liquid crystal >display (LCD)

High visibility vacuum fluorescent >display (VFD)

rphares

Line

rphares

Line

Inputs and outputsFlexible I/O options provide up to 25 >digital and analog I/O points in a single circuit monitor

Bring in compensated pulse inputs from •other utility meters to monitor and reduce total utilities cost

IncorporateUtilitycurtailmentsignals •directly to your meter

Determine the status of loads (on/off) on •your system with respect to the peak demand periods

Shed non-essential loads while maintaining •critical processes and lighting requirements

Two Card slots can each support an I/O •Card (IOC44) with:

Four digital inputs (1ms time stamps), and •three 10-amp relays,1 solid-state output

Optional Extender Module (IOX) supports up >to 8 digital I/O modules or 4 digital and 4 analog I/O:

Digital inputs 120, 240 Vac or 3-32 Vdc•

Digital outputs 120, 240 Vac or 60, 200 Vdc•

Analog inputs 0-5 Vdc, 4-20 mA •

Analog outputs 4-20 mA•

OnestandardKYZoutput•

Series 4000 circuit monitor with optional I/O card and I/O extender modules

Environmental SpeciificationsOperating TemperatureMeter/Optional Modules CM4250 CM4250: -13° F to 167°F (-25 to 75° C)

CM4000T: -13° F to 149°F (-25 to 65° C)Remote display VFD model is -4° F to 158°F (-20 to 70° C)

LCD model is -4° F to 140°F (-20 to +60° CNominal voltage PT (secondary) 100, 110, 115, 120 VStorage TemperatureMeter and optional modules -40° F to 185°F (-40 to +85° C) (ADD standard)Remote display VFD model is -40° F to 185°F (-40 to 85° C)

LCD model is -22° F to 176°F (-30 to +80° C)Humidity rating 5 - 95% relative humidity

(non-condensing) at 104°F (40° C)Pollution degree II per IEC 1010-1Altitude range CM4250: 0 to 3,000 m (10,000 ft)

CM4000T: 0 to 2,000 m (6561 ft)Physical SpecificationsWeight (without modules) 1.9 kg (4.2 lb)Dimensions see installation bulletinRegulatory/Standards ComplianceElectromagnetic InterferenceRadiated emissions CM4250: FCC Part 15 Class A/EN55011 Class A;

CM4000T: FCC Part 15 Class A/CE Heavy IndustrialConducted emissions CM4250: FCC Part 15 Class A/EN55011 Class A

CM4000T: FCC Part 15 Class A/CE Heavy Industrial

Electrostatic discharge (air discharge):

IEC 1000-4-2 level 3Immunity to electrical fast transient IEC 1000-4-4 level 3

Immunity to surge IEC 1000-4-5 level 4 (up to 6 kv) on voltage inputsVoltage dips and interrupts (CM4250) IEC 1000-4-11

Conducted immunity IEC 1000-4-6 Level 3Dielectric withstand UL508,CSAC22.2-14-M1987,EN61010Immunity to radiated fields IEC 61000-4-3

IEC 6100-4-8 Magnetic fields 30 A/mProduct StandardsUSA UL508,Canada CSA C22.2-2-4-M1987Europe CE per low voltage directive EN 61010Listings CULandULListed18X5IndCont.Eq.KYZSpecificationsLoad voltage 240 V ac, 300 V dc maximumLoad current 100mA maximum at 77°F (25° C)ON resistance 35 Ω maximumLeakage current 0.03 µA (typical)Turn On/Off time 3 msInput or output isolation 3750 V rms

rphares

Line

rphares

Line

Features CM4250 CM4000T

Metering

Power, energy, and demand

Accuracy IEC Class 0.2 s 0.2 s

Accuracy ANSI Class 12.2 12.2

Anti-aliasing filters

Power quality

Sag/swell, harmonics monitoring

Transient detection rate 30.77kHz 5MHz

Sampling rate (at 50 Hz) 512 100,000/512

Sampling rate (at 60 Hz) 512 83,333/512

Disturbance direction detection

Flicker measurement

Interharmonics

Logging and Recording

Memory standard/optional 16 MB/32MB 16 MB/32MB

Min/max, historical, waveform logging

Energy trending and forecasting

Optional GPS time synchronization

Alarming and Control

High-speed alarms with log

Alarm triggered data logs and control

Alarm setpoint learning

Alarms via e-mail w/ECC21 w/ECC21

Programmable math/logic functions

Communications and I/O

Onboard Ethernet w/ECC21 w/ECC21

10 customizable web pages w/ECC21 w/ECC21

RS485, RS232 ports

Flexible I/O with 1 ms time stamps

Document #3000BR0913 August 2009

Safety & Security. Reliability & Productivity. Aesthetics & Comfort. Efficiency & Sustainability. Whatever your need, Schneider Electric has the solution.To find genuine Schneider Electric and Square D products, go to www.squared.com to find your nearest authorized distributor or call 1-888-SquareD.

As standards, specifications and designs develop over time, always ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication. Square D, PowerLogic and Modbus are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Schneider Electric. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.

© 2

009

- S

chne

ider

Ele

ctric

- A

ll rig

hts

rese

rved

8-09Printed on recylced paper

Schneider Electric - North American Operating Division

295 Tech Park DriveLaVergne, TN 37086Toll Free: 1-866-466-7627 Fax: 250-652-0411www.PowerLogic.com

Please contact your local sales representative for ordering information.

Visit www.PowerLogic.com for more information on other PowerLogic® products, applications and system solutions.

rphares

Line

Instruction Bulletin63230-300-216/A1

May 2001LaVergne, TN, USA

POWERLOGIC® Circuit MonitorSeries 4000T

Reference Manual

Retain for future use

NOTICE Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to becomefamiliar with the device before trying to install, operate, service, or maintainit. The following special messages may appear throughout this bulletin or onthe equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to informationthat clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety labelindicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury ifthe instructions are not followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personalinjury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoidpossible injury or death.

NOTE: Provides additional information to clarify or simplify a procedure.

PLEASE NOTE Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintainedonly by qualified personnel. This document is not intended as an instructionmanual for untrained persons. No responsibility is assumed by Square D forany consequences arising out of the use of this manual.

Class A FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for aClass A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesignated to provide reasonable protection against harmful interferencewhen the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Thisequipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, ifnot installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may causeharmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment ina residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case theuser will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

DANGERDANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGWARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if notavoided, can result in death or serious injury.

CAUTIONCAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if notavoided, can result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTIONCAUTION, used without the safety alert symbol, indicates a potentiallyhazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in property damage.

63230-300-216/A1 POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000T Reference ManualMay 2001

i© 2001 SSchneider Electric All Rights Reserved

CONTENTS CHAPTER 1—INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CHAPTER CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

WHAT IS THE TRANSIENT CIRCUIT MONITOR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Accessories and Options for the Transient Circuit Monitor . . . . . . . . 3

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

WHAT ARE TRANSIENTS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

FIRMWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

TOPICS NOT COVERED IN THIS BULLETIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

CHAPTER 2—SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

CHAPTER 3—OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9CHAPTER CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

OPERATING THE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

How the Buttons Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Display Menu Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Selecting a Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Changing a Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

CREATING AN IMPULSIVE TRANSIENT ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Setting Up and Editing Transient Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

CHAPTER 4—ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17CHAPTER CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

ABOUT ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Impulsive Transient Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

RECORDING AND ANALYZING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

CHAPTER 5—LOGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21CHAPTER CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

ALARM LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Alarm Log Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

IMPULSIVE TRANSIENT LOGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Transient Analysis Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

WRITING TRANSIENT REGISTER VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CHAPTER 6—WAVEFORM AND EVENT CAPTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 25CHAPTER CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

TRANSIENT WAVEFORM CAPTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

TRANSIENT WAVEFORM CAPTURE EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

APPENDIX A—ABBREVIATED REGISTER LISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

APPENDIX B—SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000T Reference Manual 63230-300-216/A1May 2001

ii © 2001 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved

63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 1—IntroductionMay 2001 Chapter Contents

1© 2001 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved

CHAPTER 1—INTRODUCTION

This chapter offers a general description of the Series 4000 Transient CircuitMonitor (CM4000T), tells how to use this bulletin, and lists relateddocuments.

CHAPTER CONTENTS CHAPTER CONTENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

WHAT IS THE TRANSIENT CIRCUIT MONITOR?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Accessories and Options for the Transient Circuit Monitor . . . . . . . . 3

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

WHAT ARE TRANSIENTS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

FIRMWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

TOPICS NOT COVERED IN THIS BULLETIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Chapter 1—Introduction 63230-300-216/A1What is the Transient Circuit Monitor? May 2001

© 2001 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved2

WHAT IS THE TRANSIENT CIRCUITMONITOR?

The CM4000T circuit monitor has the same metering capabilities as thestandard CM4000. However, it has the ability to detect and capture sub-microsecond voltage transients up to a peak voltage of 10,000 volts (L-L). Itaccomplishes this by using the transient version of the current/voltagemodule. The transient detection module, or CVMT, contains the entire frontend of the meter necessary to perform both standard metering, as defined bythe CM4000 (refer to the Circuit Monitor Series 4000 installation andreference manuals), and the high-speed data acquisition necessary toperform high-speed impulsive voltage transient detection.

The circuit monitor is a multifunction, digital instrumentation, data acquisitionand control device. It can replace a variety of meters, relays, transducers andother components. The circuit monitor can be located at the service entranceto monitor the cost and quality of power, and can be used to evaluate theutility service. When located at equipment mains, the circuit monitor candetect voltage-based disturbances that cause costly equipment downtime.

The circuit monitor is equipped with RS-485 and RS-232 communications forintegration into any power monitoring and control system. However,POWERLOGIC System Manager™ Software (SMS), which is writtenspecifically for power monitoring and control, best supports the circuitmonitor’s advanced features.

The circuit monitor is a true rms meter capable of exceptionally accuratemeasurement of highly nonlinear loads. A sophisticated sampling techniqueenables accurate, true rms measurement through the 255th harmonic. Youcan view over 50 metered values plus extensive minimum and maximumdata from the display or remotely (using software). With the CVMT attached,you can capture, store, and view sub-microsecond voltage events; and youcan log voltage transient peak, average voltage, rise time, and duration.Table 1–1 on page 3 summarizes the readings available from the circuitmonitor with a CVMT.

63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 1—IntroductionMay 2001 What is the Transient Circuit Monitor?


Accessories and Options for the TransientCircuit Monitor

The transient circuit monitor has a modular design to maximize its usability.In addition to the main meter, the transient circuit monitor has plug-onmodules and accessories, including:

• Current/voltage transient module (CVMT). A standard part of theCM4000T and an optional accessory for the CM4000. This is where allmetering data acquisition occurs.

• Remote display. The optional remote 4-line display is available with aback-lit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) or a Vacuum Fluorescent Display(VFD). The VFD model includes an infrared port that can be used tocommunicate directly with the circuit monitor from a laptop and can beused to download firmware, which keeps the circuit monitor up to date withthe latest system enhancements.

• I /O Extender. The I/O extender, located on the side of the circuit monitor,enables you to “plug in” up to 8 industry-standard inputs and outputs.Several preconfigured combinations are available, or you can create acustom configuration.

• Digital I /O Card. You can further expand the I/O capabilities of the circuitmonitor by adding a digital I/O card (4 inputs and 4 outputs). This card fitsinto one of the option slots on the top of the circuit monitor.

• Ethernet Communications Card. The Ethernet communications cardprovides an Ethernet port that accepts a 100 Mbps fiber optic cable or a10/100 Mbps UTP and provides an RS-485 master port to extend thecircuit monitor communications options. This card is easily installed intooption slot A on the top of the circuit monitor.

Table 1–2 lists the circuit monitor parts and accessories and their associatedinstruction bulletins.

Table 1–1: Summary of Circuit Monitor Instrumentation

Real-Time Readings Energy Readings

• Current (per phase, N, G, 3-Phase)• Voltage (L–L, L–N, N–G, 3-Phase)• Real Power (per phase, 3-Phase)• Reactive Power (per phase, 3-Phase)• Apparent Power (per phase, 3-Phase)• Power Factor (per phase, 3-Phase)• Frequency• Temperature (internal ambient)• THD (current and voltage)• K-Factor (per phase)

• Accumulated Energy, Real• Accumulated Energy, Reactive• Accumulated Energy, Apparent• Bidirectional Readings• Reactive Energy by Quadrant• Incremental Energy• Conditional Energy

Demand Readings Power Analysis Values

• Demand Current (per phase present, 3-Phase avg.)• Demand Voltage (per phase present, 3-Phase avg.)• Average Power Factor (3-Phase total)• Demand Real Power (per phase present, peak)• Demand Reactive Power (per phase present, peak)• Demand Apparent Power (per phase present, peak)• Coincident Readings• Predicted Power Demands

• Crest Factor (per phase)• Displacement Power Factor (per phase, 3-Phase)• Fundamental Voltages (per phase)• Fundamental Currents (per phase)• Fundamental Real Power (per phase)• Fundamental Reactive Power (per phase)• Harmonic Power• Unbalance (current and voltage)• Phase Rotation• Harmonic Magnitudes & Angles (per phase)• Sequence Components

Chapter 1—Introduction 63230-300-216/A1What is the Transient Circuit Monitor? May 2001


Table 1–2: Circuit Monitor Parts, Accessories, and Custom Cables

Description Part Number Instruction Bulletin

Circuit Monitor CM4000 63230-300-200

Circuit Monitor Transient CM4000T 63230-300-216

Current/ Voltage Transient Module CVMT 63230-312-201

VFD Display with infrared (IR) port and proximity sensor CMDVF63230-305-200

LCD Display CMDLC

Optical Communications Interface (for use with the VFD display only) OCIVF 63230-306-200

I/O Extender Module �

63230-302-200

with no preinstalled I/ Os, accepts up to 8 individual I/O modules with amaximum of 4 analog I/Os

IOX

with 4 digital inputs (32 Vdc), 2 digital outputs (60 Vdc),1 analog output (4–20 mA), and 1 analog input (0–5 Vdc)

IOX2411

with 4 analog inputs (4–20 mA) and 4 digital inputs (120 Vac) IOX0404

with 8 digital inputs (120 Vac) IOX08

Digital I/O CardField-installable with 4 digital inputs (120 Vac), 3 (10 A) relay outputs (120Vac),1 pulse output (KYZ)

IOC44 63230-303-200

Ethernet Communications Card with100 Mbps fiber or 10/100 Mbps UTP Ethernet port and 1 RS-485 master port

ECC21 63230-304-200

Optical Communications Interface OCIVG 63230-306-200

Memory Expansion Kit (16 MB and 32 MB kits)CM4MEM16MCM4MEM32M

63230-300-205

CM4 Mounting Adapter Kit CM4MA63230-204-31663230-300-20663230-305-201

4-ft display cable (1.2 m) CAB-4

N/A12-ft display cable (3.6 m) CAB-12

30-ft display cable (9.1 m) CAB-30

10-ft RS-232 cable (3 m) CAB-106

� For parts list of individual inputs and outputs, see Table 5–1 on page 70 of the POWERLOGIC Circuit Monitor Series4000 Reference Manual.

63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 1—IntroductionMay 2001 What is the Transient Circuit Monitor?


Features Some of the circuit monitor’s many features include:

• True rms metering to the 255th harmonic

• Accepts standard CT and PT inputs

• 600 volt direct connection on metering inputs

• Certified ANSI C12.20 and IEC687, 0.2 class revenue accuracy

• Min/max readings of metered data

• Power quality readings—THD, K-factor, crest factor

• Real-time harmonic magnitudes and angles to the 63rd harmonic

• Current and voltage sag/swell detection and recording

• Impulsive voltage transient (600 ns) detection and recording

• Downloadable firmware

• Easy setup through the optional remote display (password protected)where you can view metered values

• Setpoint-controlled alarm and relay functions

• Onboard alarm and data logging

• Wide operating temperature range –25° to 65°C

• Modular, field-installable digital and analog I/O modules

• Flexible communications—RS-485 and RS-232 communications arestandard, optional Ethernet communications card available with fiber opticconnection

• Two option card slots for field-installable I/O and Ethernet capabilities

• Standard 8MB onboard logging memory (field-upgradable to 16 MB, 32MB, and higher)

• CT and PT wiring diagnostics

• Revenue security with utility sealing capability

Chapter 1—Introduction 63230-300-216/A1What Are Transients? May 2001


WHAT ARE TRANSIENTS? A transient is a disturbance in the electrical system lasting less than onecycle. There are two types of transients: impulsive and oscillatory. Animpulsive transient is a sudden, non-power frequency change in the steadystate condition of voltage or current that is unidirectional in polarity. Lightningstrikes are a common cause of impulsive transients. Oscillatory, also knownas switching transients, include both positive and negative polarity values.Energizing capacitor banks will typically result in an oscillatory transient onone or more phases.

Each type of transient is divided into three categories related to thefrequencies. Table 1–3 lists the transients and their three categories.

Low frequency transients are the most common, followed by mediumfrequency transients. While damage can be immediate in cases such aslightning, the CM4000T monitors and alerts you to the lower-to-mediumfrequency transients which can slowly damage components. Early detectionof these transients allows you to take action before your components aredamaged.

FIRMWARE This instruction bulletin is written to be used with circuit monitor firmwareversion 12.040 or higher and CVMT firmware version 10.010 or higher. See“Identifying the Firmware Version” on page 124 of the Circuit Monitor Series4000 reference manual for instructions on how to determine the firmwareversion.

TOPICS NOT COVERED IN THISBULLETIN

Because the CM4000T has the same metering capabilities as the CM4000,the common features and capabilities of the two circuit monitors are notcovered in this instruction bulletin. That information is located in thePOWERLOGIC Cicuit Monitor Series 4000 Installation Manual and thePOWERLOGIC Cicuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual. Thisinstruction bulletin focuses only on the transient capabilities of the CM4000Tor a CM4000 retrofitted with a CVMT. For information about relatedinstruction bulletins, see Table 1–2 on page 4. For instructions on using SMS,refer to the SMS online help and the SMS-3000 Setup Guide.

Table 1–3: Transient Categories

Transient CategoriesSpectralComponents

Duration

Impulsive

Millisecond (Low Frequency) 0.1 ms rise > 1 ms

Microsecond (Medium Frequency) 1 µs rise 50 ns to 1 ms

Nanosecond (High Frequency) 5 ns rise < 50 ns

Oscillatory

Low Frequency < 5 kHz 0.3 to 50 ms

Medium Frequency 5 to 500 kHz 5 µs to 20 µs

High Frequency 0.5 to 5 MHz 5 µs

NOTE: Impulsive transients are characterized by their rise-time,amplitude, and duration. Oscillatory transients are characterized bytheir frequency duration.

63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 2—Safety PrecautionsMay 2001


CHAPTER 2—SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

This chapter contains important safety precautions that must be followedbefore attempting to install, service, or maintain electrical equipment.Carefully read and follow the safety precautions outlined below.

HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, BURN, OR EXPLOSION

• Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such workshould be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.

• NEVER work alone.

• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on thisequipment, disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume that allcircuits are live until they have been completely de-energized, tested,and tagged. Pay particular attention to the design of the powersystem. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility ofbackfeeding.

• Turn off all power supplying this equipment and the equipment it ismounted in before working on or inside the equipment.

• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that allpower is off.

• Beware of potential hazards, wear personal protective equipment,carefully inspect the work area for tools and objects that may havebeen left inside the equipment.

• Use caution while removing or installing panels so that they do notextend into the energized bus; avoid handling the panels, which couldcause personal injury.

• The successful operation of this equipment depends upon properhandling, installation, and operation. Neglecting fundamentalinstallation requirements may lead to personal injury as well asdamage to electrical equipment or other property.

• Before performing Dielectric (Hi-Pot) or Megger testing on anyequipment in which the circuit monitor is installed, disconnect all inputand output wires to the circuit monitor. High voltage testing maydamage electronic components contained in the circuit monitor.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death orserious injury.

DANGER

Chapter 2—Safety Precautions 63230-300-216/A1May 2001


63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 3—OperationMay 2001 Chapter Contents


CHAPTER 3—OPERATIONThis chapter explains how to set up the circuit monitor transient detectionmodule using the display. Some advanced features, such as onboard logconfiguration, must be set up over the communications link using SystemManager Software (SMS). Refer to the SMS instruction bulletin and onlinehelp for instructions on setting up advanced features not accessible from thedisplay.

The CM4000T is functionally identical to the CM4000 with the exception thatthe CM4000T adds the ability to detect impulsive voltage transients that havea duration of 600ns or greater. The only setup required to enable thisfunctionality is configuring and enabling the Impulsive Transient alarm usingthe display or SMS-3000.

CHAPTER CONTENTS CHAPTER CONTENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

OPERATING THE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

How the Buttons Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Display Menu Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Selecting a Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Changing a Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

CREATING AN IMPULSIVE TRANSIENT ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Setting Up and Editing Transient Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 3—Operation 63230-300-216/A1Operating the Display May 2001


OPERATING THE DISPLAY The display shows four lines of information at a time. Notice the arrow on theleft of the display screen. This arrow indicates that you can scroll up or downto view more information. For example, on the Main Menu you can view theResets, Setup, and Diagnostics menu options only if you scroll down todisplay them. As you scroll down a menu, the arrow points to the first menuitem as you press the arrow buttons. When the last three menu items aredisplayed, the arrow moves to the bottom as illustrated in Figure 3–1.

Figure 3–1: Arrow on the display screen

How the Buttons Work The buttons on the display let you scroll through and select information, movefrom menu to menu, and adjust the contrast. Figure 3–2 shows the buttons.

Figure 3–2: Display buttons

The buttons are used in the following way:

• Arrow buttons. Use the arrow buttons to scroll up and down the menuoptions. Also, when a value can be changed, use the arrow buttons toscroll through the available values. If the value is a number, holding downthe arrow button increases the speed in which the numbers increase ordecrease.

• Menu button. Each time you press the menu button, it takes you up onemenu level. The menu button also prompts you to save if you’ve madechanges to any options within that menu structure.

• Enter button. Use the enter button to select an option on a menu or selecta value to be edited.

• Contrast button. Press the contrast button to darken or lighten thedisplay. On the LCD model, press any button once to activate thebacklight.

MAIN MENUMetersMin/MaxView Alarms

MAIN MENUResetsSetup Diagnostics

Arrow buttons

Menu button

Enter button

Contrast button

63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 3—OperationMay 2001 Operating the Display


Display Menu Conventions This section explains a few conventions that were developed to streamlineinstructions and for ease of menu navigation. Figure 3–3 shows the parts ofa menu.

Figure 3–3: Parts of a menu

Selecting a Menu Option Each time you read “select” in this manual, choose the option from the menuby doing this:

1. Press the arrows to scroll to the menu option.

2. Press the enter button to select that option.

Changing a Value To change a value, the procedure is the same on every menu:

1. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the parameter you want to change.

2. Press the enter button to activate the value. The value begins toblink.

3. Press the arrow buttons to scroll through the possible values. To selectthe new value, press the enter button.

4. Press the arrow buttons to move up and down the menu options. You canchange one value or all of the values on a menu. To save the changes,press the menu button until the circuit monitor displays:

“Save changes? No”

NOTE: Pressing the menu button while a value is blinking will return thatvalue to its most recent setting.

5. Press the arrow to change to “Yes,” then press the enter button to savethe changes.

Menu

Menu OptionValue

DISPLAYLanguage EnglishDate MM/DD/YYYYTime Format 2400hrVFD Sensitivity 3Display Timer 1 MinCustom QuantityCustom Screen

Chapter 3—Operation 63230-300-216/A1Creating an Impulsive Transient Alarm May 2001


CREATING AN IMPULSIVE TRANSIENTALARM

Using the display, perform the steps below to configure the impulsivetransient alarm:

NOTE: There is a default transient alarm that enables detection on allphases. If the label and phases are acceptable, you can skip this section andgo directly to “Setting Up and Editing Transient Alarms” on page 14.

1. From the Main Menu, select Setup.

The password prompt displays.

2. Select your password. The default password is 0.

The Setup menu displays.

3. Select Alarm.

The Alarm menu displays.

4. Select Create Custom.

The Select Position menu displays.

SETUPDate & TimeDisplayCommunicationsMeterAlarmI/OPasswords

ALARMEdit ParametersCreate Custom

SELECT POSITION01 Impulsive Tran

63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 3—OperationMay 2001 Creating an Impulsive Transient Alarm


5. Select the position of the new transient alarm.

The Alarm Parameters menu displays. Table 3–1 describes the optionson this menu.

6. Press the menu button until “Save Changes? No” flashes on the display.Select Yes with the arrow button, then press the enter button to save thechanges. Now you are ready to set up and edit the newly createdtransient alarm.

ALARM PARAMETERSLbl: Impulsive TransType Imp.VoltageQty All Phases

Table 3–1: Options for Creating a Transient Alarm

Option Available Values Selection Description Default

Lbl Alphanumeric

Up to 15 characters

Label — name of the alarm. Press the down arrow button to scroll through the alphabet.The lower case letters are presented first, then uppercase, then numbers and symbols.Press the enter button to select a letter and move to the next character field. To moveto the next option, press the menu button.

ImpulsiveTrans

Type The alarm type is configured by default and cannot be changed. Imp.Voltage

Qty All PhasesPh. APh. BPh. A&BPh. CPh. A&CPh. B&C

For transient alarms, this is the value to be evaluated. While selected, press the arrowbuttons to scroll through quantity options. Pressing the enter button while an option isdisplayed will activate that option’s list of values. Use the arrow buttons to scroll throughthe list of options. Select an option by pressing the enter button.

NOTE: For 3-wire systems, selecting Phase A will configure the transient alarm tomonitor VA-B. If you select Phases A&B, the transient alarm will monitor VA-B and VB-C.

All Phases



Setting Up and Editing Transient Alarms Follow the instructions below to set up and edit a transient alarm:

1. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Alarm > Edit Parameters.

The Edit Parameters menu displays.

2. Select Transient.

The Select Alarm menu displays.

3. Select the transient alarm.

The Edit Alarm menu displays. Table 3–2 on page 16 describes theoptions on this menu.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the menu option you want to change,then edit the following alarm options: Lbl., Priority, Thresh. (rms), andMin. Pulse (µs). See Table 3–2 on page 16 for a description of the alarmoptions.

NOTE: Do not enable the alarm during this step. The alarm must beenabled after all changes have been saved.

EDIT PARAMETERSStandardHigh SpeedDisturbanceBooleanTransient

SELECT ALARM01 Impulsive Tran

EDIT ALARMLbl: Impulsive TransEnable NoPriority NoThresh. (rms) 0Min. Pulse (us) 0

63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 3—OperationMay 2001 Creating an Impulsive Transient Alarm


5. When you are finished with all changes, press the menu button until“Save Changes? No” flashes on the display. Select Yes with the arrowbutton, then press the enter button to save the changes.

6. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Alarm > Edit Parameters >Transients.

The Select Alarm menu displays.

7. Select the transient alarm.

The Edit Alarm menu displays. Table 3–2 on page 16 describes theoptions on this menu.

8. Verify that the Priority, Thresh. (rms), and Min. Pulse (µs) alarm optionsare set to the values you entered earlier.

9. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the Enable option, then select Yes toenable the alarm. Verify that Yes is selected before proceeding.

10. Press the menu button until “Save Changes? No” flashes on the display.Select Yes with the arrow button, then press the enter button to save thechanges.

NOTE: The Impulsive Transient alarm will be automatically disabled if invalidsetpoints (threshold and minimum pulse width) are entered. If you are unableto enable the alarm, check your system configuration (system type,connection, VT ratio) and your alarm setpoints to ensure that the transientcircuit monitor operates as intended. Refer to Table 3–3 on page 16 forminimum and maximum setpoint information.

SELECT ALARM01 Impulsive Tran

EDIT ALARMLbl: Impulsive TransEnable NoPriority NoThresh. (rms) 0Min. Pulse (us) 0



Table 3–2: Options for Editing a Transient Alarm

Option Available Values Selection Description Default

Lbl Alphanumeric Label — name of the alarm. Press the down arrow button to scroll through thealphabet. The lower case letters are presented first, then uppercase, thennumbers and symbols. Press the enter button to select a letter and move to thenext character field. To move to the next option, press the menu button.

Name of thealarm

Enable YesNo

Select Y to make the alarm available for use by the circuit monitor. Onpreconfigured alarms, the alarm may already be enabled. Select N to make thealarm function unavailable to the circuit monitor.

N(not enabled)

Priority NoneHighMedLow

Low is the lowest priority alarm. High is the highest priority alarm and also placesthe active alarm in the list of high priority alarms. To view this list from the MainMenu, select Alarms > High Priority Alarms.

None

Thresh. (rms) 185 – 23,173 The transient alarm threshold or pickup value is set in rms and bounded bysystem configuration. The minimum value for the transient alarm threshold(pickup) is dependent on the system type and connection (see Table 3–3).

3430 V (rms)4850 V (peak)

Min. Pulse(µs)

0 – 50 µs To ensure accurate detection, this value can range from 0 to 50 µs. A transientpulse width must meet the minimum pulse width requirement to trigger the alarmand capture waveforms.

0

Table 3–3: Minimum and Maximum Setpoints for System Wiring Types

SystemWiring

System Connection Minimum Threshold (Setpoint), RMS Maximum Threshold (Setpoint), RMS

4-wire Wye Direct connect (L-N) 185 3430

3-wire Delta Direct connect (L-L) 325 6860

4-wire Wye VTs Primary ratio x 185Example: 480:288 = 2.42.4 x 185 = 444 minimum setpoint

Primary ratio x 3430Example: 480:288 = 2.42.4 x 3430 = 8232 maximum setpoint

3-wire Delta VTs Primary ratio x 325Example: 480:288 = 2.42.4 x 325 = 780 minimum setpoint

Primary ratio x 6860Example: 480:288 = 2.42.4 x 6860 = 16,464 maximum setpoint

63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 4—AlarmsMay 2001 Chapter Contents


CHAPTER 4—ALARMS

This chapter explains the transient alarm capabilities of the CM4000T. Otheralarm groups are detailed in the POWERLOGIC Circuit Monitor Series4000 Reference Manual.

CHAPTER CONTENTS CHAPTER CONTENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

ABOUT ALARMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Impulsive Transient Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

RECORDING AND ANALYZING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Chapter 4—Alarms 63230-300-216/A1About Alarms May 2001


ABOUT ALARMS The circuit monitor can detect over 100 alarm conditions, including over orunder conditions, digital input changes, phase unbalance conditions, andmore. It also maintains a counter for each alarm to keep track of the totalnumber of occurrences. A complete list of default alarm configurations aredescribed in Table 6-3 on page 94 of the POWERLOGIC Circuit MonitorSeries 4000 Reference Manual. The reference manual also provides adetailed description of the different alarm types that the circuit monitorprovides. These alarm groups include Standard, High-Speed, Disturbance,Digital, and Boolean.

Impulsive Transient Alarms The CM4000T provides an additional alarm group for detecting impulsivetransients on the voltage inputs. The Impulsive Transient alarm operatesdifferently than the other alarms, yet it provides extensive information aboutimpulsive transients in a system. The Impulsive Transient alarm does notprevent the use of any other alarms. All alarm groups will functionconcurrently and can trigger concurrent data records.

Detection and capture of high-speed transients are in the nanosecond tomicrosecond range with a total capture duration of up to 2 milliseconds.There is only one alarm to configure to detect impulsive and oscillatorytransients on the three-phase voltage channels in the CM4000T circuitmonitor. The transient alarm is in Alarm Position 185 (registers 13980 –13999). Each transient that is detected forces an entry in the alarm log andforces a transient and disturbance waveform capture if waveform capture isenabled (refer to Chapter 7—Logging and Chapter 8—Waveform andEvent Capture in the POWERLOGIC Circuit Monitor Series 4000Reference Manual for more information about alarm logs and disturbancecaptures). The table below is an addendum toTable 6-4 in the circuit monitorreference manual to include the transient alarm.

CONFIGURATION To configure a transient alarm, you must select the voltage inputs to monitor.The impulsive transient alarm allows you to enter a custom label, enable ordisable the alarm, select the alarm’s priority, enter the voltage pickupthreshold, and input the minimum pulse width. See Chapter 3—Operation,“Creating an Impulsive Transient Alarm” on page 12 for more information.

The CM4000T automatically selects the voltage transient monitoring methodbased on the type of system it is connected to, so there is no need toconfigure the system type. For example, if the CM4000T is connected to a 4-wire Wye system, the detection method changes to single-ended (L-N) witha maximum voltage range of 5 kV peak (3536 V rms). If the CM4000T isconnected to a 3-wire delta system, the detection method changes todifferential (L-L) with a maximum voltage range of 10 kV peak (7072 V rms).

Table 4–1: Transient Alarm Type Description

Type Description Operation

185 Impulsive Transient -Voltage

The impulsive transient voltage alarm will occurwhenever the peak voltage is above the pickupsetpoint and remains above the pickup setpoint forthe specified duration.

63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 4—AlarmsMay 2001 Recording and Analyzing Data


RECORDING AND ANALYZING DATA After each occurrence of an impulsive transient, data is entered into thecircuit monitor’s alarm log using SMS as long as the alarm priority is set toLow, Medium, or High. The alarm log contains the following information:

• Alarm position

• Unique alarm ID

• Entry type

• Peak Magnitude

• Start time and date

• Correlation sequence number

• File association

• Waveform capture association

• Average magnitude

• Transient duration

• Rise-time

For more information on logging impulsive transient data, see Chapter 5—Logging on page 21. For more information on alarm logging features inSMS, refer to the SMS online help.

Chapter 4—Alarms 63230-300-216/A1Recording and Analyzing Data May 2001


63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 5—LoggingMay 2001 Chapter Contents


CHAPTER 5—LOGGING


ALARM LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Alarm Log Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

IMPULSIVE TRANSIENT LOGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Transient Analysis Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

WRITING TRANSIENT REGISTER VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Chapter 5—Logging 63230-300-216/A1Alarm Log May 2001


ALARM LOG Using SMS, you can set up the circuit monitor to log the occurrence of anyalarm condition. Each time an alarm occurs it is entered into the alarm log aslong as the alarm priority is set to Low, Medium, or High. The alarm log in thecircuit monitor stores the pickup and dropout points of alarms along with thedate and time associated with these alarms. You select whether the alarm logsaves data as first-in-first-out (FIFO) or fill and hold. You can also view andsave the alarm log to disk, and reset the alarm log to clear the data out of thecircuit monitor’s memory.

NOTE: All data capture methods that are available in the CM4000 are alsoavailable in the CM4000T. Also, a transient alarm has a pickup entry with aduration, but it does not have a dropout entry.

Alarm Log Storage The circuit monitor stores alarm log data in non-volatile memory. You definethe size of the alarm log (the maximum number of events). When determiningthe maximum number of events, consider the circuit monitor’s total storagecapacity. For more information on alarm logs and storage, see Chapter 7—Logging in the POWERLOGIC Circuit Monitor Series 4000 ReferenceManual.

63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 5—LoggingMay 2001 Impulsive Transient Logging


IMPULSIVE TRANSIENT LOGGING Each time an impulsive transient occurs, the transient alarm forces an entryin the CM4000T alarm log, a transient and disturbance waveform capture isgenerated when waveform capture is enabled, and register-based data innon-volatile memory is recorded. The register-based data in the alarm logconsists of the following:

• Date/Time

• Unique ID

• Peak voltage magnitude

• Duration of the peak in tenths of a microseconds

• Rise-time in tenths of a microseconds

• Average voltage

The data can be viewed by selecting View Alarms > Active Alarms List, thenselecting the transient alarm. Chapter 3—Operation in the POWERLOGICCircuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual explains how to view thealarm log data using the display.

Transient Analysis Information Register-based transient analysis information is also generated each time animpulsive transient occurs. This data consists of the number of transients foreach phase, the date and time of the last register-based transient alarm logreset, number of alarms in the register-based transient alarm log, stress oncircuit indication for each phase in volt-seconds, magnitude, and duration.The following list contains the transient analysis information (see alsoAppendix A—Abbreviated Register Listing on page 29):

• Number of transients on Phase A

• Number of transients on Phase B

• Number of transients on Phase C

• Number of transients on all phases

• Date/time of the last register-based alarm log reset

• Number of alarms in the register-based transient alarm log

• Stress on the circuit indication for Phase A (volt-seconds)

• Stress on the circuit indication for Phase B (volt-seconds)

• Stress on the circuit indication for Phase C (volt-seconds)

• Transient categorization — Magnitude 1 and Duration 1









NOTE: Data log entries and adaptive waveform captures cannot be triggeredby an impulsive transient event because transients occur too rapidly for thesedata capture tools to be effective. However, high-speed alarms and sag/swellalarms can still be configured to trigger if the transient event duration is withinthe detection criteria for the alarm.

Chapter 5—Logging 63230-300-216/A1Writing Transient Register Values May 2001


To utilize all of the transient analysis features of the CM4000T you shouldconfigure the transient categorization magnitude and duration setpoints. TheCM4000T provides nine accumulators that evaluate each catpured transientand assigns it to a category based on magnitude and duration. For example,a 480 V Wye system might have a Transient Alarm Threshold (pick-up)setpoint of 600 V rms (848 V peak). Transient captures for L-N connectedsystems is 5 kV (peak). Therefore, all captured transient magnitudes will bebetween 848 V peak and 5 kV peak. The Magnitude #1 (register 9226) andMagnitude #3 (register 9227) parameters for the Transient Categories mightbe configured as 1471 V peak ((5 kV – 848) * 15% + 848) which wouldinclude transients in the lower 15% in magnitude. Magnitude #3 might beconfigured as 2509 V peak ((5 kV – 848) * 40% * 848) which includestransients in the upper 60% in magnitude. Magnitude #2 is implied as thosetransients > 15% of the range to < 40% of the range.

Much like Magnitude #1 and Magnitude #3, values for Duration #1 (register9228) and Duration #3 (register 9229) must be configured. We recommendthat Duration #1 is set to 32 µs and Duration #3 is set to 130 µs. This impliesthat all transients with duration ≤ 32 µs will be considered Duration #1 andtransients with duration ≥ 130 µs will be Duration #3. Duration #2 is impliedas those transients with a duration > 32 µs, but < 130 µs. See Appendix A—Abbreviated Register Listing on page 29 for register numbers anddescriptions.

WRITING TRANSIENT REGISTERVALUES

The following is a list of the steps necessary to enter the transient registervalues. For more information on reading and writing registers, refer to“Reading and Writing Registers” on page 44 in Chapter 3—Operation of thePOWERLOGIC Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual.

1. Write 9020 to register 8000 to enter Setup mode

2. Write the desired value into the following registers:

• 9226 for Magnitude #1

• 9227 for Magnitude #3

• 9228 for Duration #1

• 9229 for Duration #3

3. Write 1 to register 8001.

4. Write 9021 to register 8000 to exit Setup and save changes.

63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 6—Waveform and Event CapturesMay 2001 Chapter Contents


CHAPTER 6—WAVEFORM AND EVENT CAPTURES

This chapter explains the waveform captures generated by an impulsivetransient event. For more information on the types of waveform captures andhow they are recorded, refer to Chapter 8—Waveform and Event Capturesin the POWERLOGIC Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual.


TRANSIENT WAVEFORM CAPTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

TRANSIENT WAVEFORM CAPTURE EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Chapter 6—Waveform and Event Captures 63230-300-216/A1Transient Waveform Captures May 2001


TRANSIENT WAVEFORM CAPTURES Using waveform captures you can view each detected transient. Each timean impulsive transient event is detected, the CM4000T records two waveformcaptures when waveform capture is enabled. The first waveform capture is atransient waveform capture that records the signal on each of the threevoltage inputs at a rate of 83,333 samples per cycle. The transient waveformcapture will display voltage transients up to 5 kV peak magnitude for a 4-wireconfiguration and up to 10 kV for a L-L, 3-wire configuration when directconnected.

The second waveform capture is a disturbance waveform capture that isconfigurable using the display or SMS. SMS will indicate all transientcaptures that are contained withing each disturbance waveform capture. Thedisturbance waveform capture can range from seven channels at a rate of512 samples per cycle for 28 cycles to seven channels at a rate of 16samples per cycle for 915 cycles (see Table 6–1). It is recommended that thedisturbance waveform capture in a CM4000T be configured for 512 samplesper cycle, which is one data point every 32 µs. This maximizes the availabledata for analysis of the transient event.

Table 6–1: Disturbance Waveform Capture Maximum Duration for theNumber of Samples Per Cycle

Samples per Cycle Max Duration

16 915 cycles

32 457 cycles

64 228 cycles

128 114 cycles

256 57 cycles

512 28 cycles

Table 6–2: Transient Waveform Capture Maximum Duration for theNumber of Samples Per Cycle

Samples per Cycle Max Duration

83,333 2 millisecond (1/8 of a cycle)

63230-300-216/A1 Chapter 6—Waveform and Event CapturesMay 2001 Transient Waveform Capture Example


TRANSIENT WAVEFORM CAPTUREEXAMPLE

The following figure is an example of a transient waveform capture. Below thefigure is an explanation of the waveform capture.

Figure 6–1:Impulsive Transient

The CM4000T provides analysis data for each transient captured. The meterreports a pickup date/time, rise-time, duration of the peak, peak magnitude,and average voltage of the transient. The CM400T also provides anaccumulated value per phase captured to indicate the severity of thetransients in volt-seconds. For example, Figure 6–1 illustrates an impulsivetransient. The average voltage of the impulsive transient is calculated bytaking the AREA, which includes the product of the voltage and durationwithin the transient curve bound by the threshold (pickup and drop-out)setpoints, and dividing it by the duration of the peak.

Time(0.1 µs)

500 µs

Pickup setpoint (rms)

Pickup setpoint (rms)

Peak magnitude (peak volts)

Rise-time (0.1 µs)

Duration of peak (0.1 µs)

Average Value (volts) = AREA

Duration

Volt-seconds = AREA

AREA

= Pickup delay

= +

= + +

Volts (≤ 10 kV)

Chapter 6—Waveform and Event Captures 63230-300-216/A1Transient Waveform Capture Example May 2001


63230-300-216/A1 Appendix A—Abbreviated Register ListingMay 2001


APPENDIX A—ABBREVIATED REGISTER LISTING

This appendix contains informatin about the registers of the circuit monitorfor transients. Other register information and explanations on how registersare stored can be found in Appendix A—Abbreviated Register Listing ofthe CM4000 reference manual.

Table A–1: Register-based Transient Alarm Log

RegisterNumber

DescriptionScaleFactor

Units Register Range

Register-based Transient Alarm Log

9000–9009 Transient Event #1 — See Template See Template




















Appendix A—Abbreviated Register Listing 63230-300-216/A1May 2001


Register-based Transient Alarm Log Template

Base + 0 toBase + 3

Date/Time

Base + 0Bits 15–08 = MonthBits 07–00 = Day

Base + 1Bits 15–08 = Year + 1900Bits 07–00 = Hour

Base + 2Bits 15–08 = MinuteBits 07–00 = Seconds

Base + 3Bits 15–00 = Milliseconds

For more information, see “How Date and Time Are Stored inthe Register” in Appendix A—Abbreviated Register Listingof the POWERLOGIC Circuit Monitor Series 4000Reference Manual.

— — —

Base + 4 toBase + 5

Unique ID

Base + 4:1 = Va2 = Vb3 = Va and Vb4 = Vc5 = Vc and Va6 = Vc and Vb7 = All Phases

Base + 5:Bits 15–08 = Alarm type always 0x6FBits 07–00 = Level (0–9) always 0x00

— —Base + 4 = 1–7Base + 5 = 0x6F (alarm type)and 0x00 (level)

Base + 6 Peak Magnitude H Volts (peak) x Scale -32,726 to 32,767

Base + 7 Duration in microseconds — 0.1 (µs) 0 to 20,000

Base + 8 Rise time — 0.1 (µs) 0 to 20,000

Base + 9 Average value (volts) H Volts (peak) x Scale 0 to 32,767

Table A–1: Register-based Transient Alarm Log

RegisterNumber





Table A–2: Abbreviated Register List

RegisterNumber



Transient Log Template

9200

Transient Counter 1

Counter for transients as having:Level 1 MagnitudeLevel 1 Duration

— — 1 to 32,767

9201

Transient Counter 2


— — 1 to 32,767

9202

Transient Counter 3


— — 1 to 32,767

9203

Transient Counter 4


— — 1 to 32,767

9204

Transient Counter 5


— — 1 to 32,767

9205

Transient Counter 6


— — 1 to 32,767

9206

Transient Counter 7


— — 1 to 32,767

9207

Transient Counter 8


— — 1 to 32,767

9208

Transient Counter 9


— — 1 to 32,767

9209Phase A Transient Counter

Number of transients reported for phase A— — 1 to 32,767

9210Phase B Transient Counter

Number of transients reported for phase B— — 1 to 32,767



9211Phase C Transient Counter

Number of transients reported for phase C— — 1 to 32,767

9212Total Transient Counter

Number of transients reported for phases A, B, and C— — 1 to 32,767

9214Phase A Transient volt-seconds Accumulator

Accumulation of all volt-seconds from transients on phase A— Volts Seconds

10±38

(IEEE floating point number)

9216Phase B Transient volt-seconds Accumulator

Accumulation of all volt-seconds from transients on phase B— Volts Seconds

10±38


9218Phase C Transient volt-seconds Accumulator

Accumulation of all volt-seconds from transients on phase C— Volts Seconds

10±38


9226

Sorting Magnitude Level 1

All transients of magnitude less than this level are consideredLevel 1

H Volts (peak) x Scale 1 to 32,767

9227

Sorting Magnitude Level 3

All transients of magnitude greater than or equal to this levelare considered Level 3

H Volts (peak) x Scale 1 to 32,767

9228

Sorting Duration Level 1 (Micro Seconds)

All transients of duration less than this level are consideredLevel 1

— 0.1 (µS) 1 to 32,767

9229

Sorting Duration Level 3 (Micro Seconds)

All transients of duration greater than or equal to this level areconsidered Level 3

— 0.1 (µS) 1 to 32,767

9230Count of Records in Log

Number of records present in the transient log— — 1 to 32,767

9231 to 9234 D/T Last Transient Event Log Reset —

See the templatesection ”Register-based TransientAlarm Log Template”in Table A–1 on page29.

See the template section”Register-based TransientAlarm Log Template” in TableA–1 on page 29.

Table A–2: Abbreviated Register List

RegisterNumber





Table A–3: CVMT Alarms

RegisterNumber



Alarms – Configuration/Status

10000 to10009

P1 Alarm QueueQueue of last ten active priority 1 alarms

— — 1 to 185

10010P1 Acknowledge StatusAcknowledge status for each of the P1 alarms in the queue

— Bitmap 0x0000 to 0x03FF

10011 to10022

Active Alarm MapEach bit corresponds to an Alarm Type:Bit00 = Alarm #01Bit01 = Alarm #02 ... etc.

— Bitmap 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

10023

Active Alarm StatusActive Alarms:Bit00 = 1 if any priority 1-3 alarm is activeBit01 = 1 if a "High" (1) priority alarm is activeBit02 = 1 if a "Medium" (2) priority alarm is activeBit03 = 1 if a "Low" (3) priority alarm is active

Remaining bits not used.

— Bitmap 0x0000 to 0x000F

10024

Latched Active Alarm StatusLatched Active Alarms: (from the last time the register wascleared)Bit00 = 1 if any priority 1-3 alarm is activeBit01 = 1 if a "High" (1) priority alarm is activeBit02 = 1 if a "Medium" (2) priority alarm is activeBit03 = 1 if a "Low" (3) priority alarm is active

Remaining bits not used.

— Bitmap 0x0000 to 0x000F

10025Total CounterTotal alarm counter, including all priorities 1, 2 and 3

— 1.0 0 to 32,767

10026P3 CounterLow alarm counter, all priority 3s

— 1.0 0 to 32,767

10027P2 CounterMedium alarm counter, all priority 2s

— 1.0 0 to 32,767

10028P1 CounterHigh alarm counter, all priority 1s

— 1.0 0 to 32,767

10029 to10040

Pickup Mode SelectionSelection of absolute or relative pickup test for each of theAlarm Types (if applicable, based on type)0 = Absolute (default), 1 = RelativeBit00 = Alarm #01Bit01 = Alarm #02 ... etc.

— Bitmap 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

Alarms – Counters

10299 Alarm Type #185 Counter — 1.0 0 to 32,767



Alarms – Setup Blocks

13980

Unique Identifier

Bits 15–08 (reserved)

Bits 07–00:1 = Va2 = Vb3 = Va and Vb4 = Vc5 = Vc and Va6 = Vc and Vb7 = All Phases

— — 1 to 7

13981 Unique Identifier — — —

13982Enable/Disable Alarm0 = Disabled255 = Enabled

— — 0 to 255

13983 to13990

Label16-character label

— — Alphanumeric

13991 Threshold Magnitude — V (rms) 0 to 23,169

13992 Minimun Pulse Duration — µs 0 to 50

Table A–3: CVMT Alarms

RegisterNumber



63230-300-216/A1 Appendix B—SpecificationsMay 2001


APPENDIX B—SPECIFICATIONSThis appendix contains specifications for the circuit monitor and display.

Table B–1: Specifications

METERING SPECIFICATIONS

Current Inputs (Each Channel)

Current Range 0–10 A ac

Nominal Current 5 A ac

Voltage Inputs (Each Channel)

Voltage Range 0–600 Vac Line to Line, 347 Line to Neutral

Nominal Voltage (typical) 120 Vac

Impulsive Voltage

Impulse Sampling Frequency 15 MHz, 5 MHz per channel (3 voltage channels)

Impulse Range 10 to 10,000 volts (peak)

Impulse Resolution 12 bits, 2.0 volts

Impulse Accuracy ±5% of reading

Frequency Range 45–67 Hz, 350–450 Hz

Harmonic Response—Phase Voltages and Currents

Frequency 45–67 Hz 255th Harmonic

Frequency 350–450 Hz 31st Harmonic

Data Update Rate Approximately 1-second update of all real-time readings fordemand and energy calculations (100 ms update for somereal-time readings).

Accuracy �

Current (measured) �

• Phase Amperes and Neutral Amperes Current = 0.04% of reading + 0.025% full scale

Voltage 0.04% of reading + 0.025% full scale

Power

• Real, Reactive, and Apparent Power 0.075% of reading + 0.025% of full scale

True Power Factor ±0.002 from 0.500 leading to 0.500 lagging

Energy and Demand ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class, IEC 687 0.2 Class

Frequency

• 50/60Hz ±0.01 Hz at 45–67 Hz

• 400 Hz ±0.10 Hz at 350–450 Hz

Time of Day Clock/Calendar (at 25°C) Less than ±1.5 seconds in 24 hours (1 ms resolution)

METERING INPUT ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Current Inputs

Nominal 5.0 A rms

Metering Over-range 100% (10 A maximum)

Overcurrent Withstand 15 A rms Continuous

50 A rms 10 seconds in 1 hour

500 A rms 1 second in 1 hour

Input Impedance Less than 0.1 Ohm

Burden Less than 0.15 VA

� Based on 1-second update rate. Does not apply to 100ms readings.

� Any CT secondary currents less than 5 mA are reported as zero.

� If higher precision is required, see “Digital Inputs” on page 71 of the reference manual for more information.

� Any voltage input to the meter that is below 1.0 V is reported as zero.

Appendix B—Specifications 63230-300-216/A1May 2001


Voltage Inputs�

Nominal Full Scale 347 Vac Line to Neutral, 600 Line to Line

Metering Over-range 50%

Input Impedance Greater than 2 Megohm (L-L), 1 Megohm (L-N)

CONTROL POWER INPUT SPECIFICATIONS

120/240 Vac Nominal

Operating Input Range 90–305 Vac

Burden, maximum 50 VA

Frequency Range 45–67 Hz, 350–450 Hz

Isolation 2300 V, 1 minute

Ride-through on Power Loss 0.1 second at 120 Vac

125/250 Vdc Nominal

Operating Input Range 100–300 Vdc

Burden 30 W maximum

Isolation 3250 Vdc, 1 minute

Ride-through on Power Loss 0.1 second at 120 Vdc

Mains Supply Voltage Fluctuations not to exceed ±10%

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

Operating Temperature

Meter and Optional Modules –25° to +65°C maximum(See information about operating temperature of the circuitmonitor in “Mounting” on page 17.)

Remote Display VFD model is –20 to +70°CLCD model is –20 to +60°C

Storage Temperature

Meter and Optional Modules –40 to +85°C

Remote Display VFD model is –40 to +85°CLCD model is –30 to +80°C

Humidity Rating 5–95% Relative Humidity (non-condensing) at 40°C

Pollution Degree UL840, IEC 1010-1 (Class 2)

Installation Category UL508, IEC 1010-1 (Class 2)

Altitude Range 0 to 3,048 m (10,000 ft)

Physical Specifications

Weight (approximate, without add-on modules) 4.2 lb (1.90 kg)

Dimensions See “Dimensions” on page 16.

REGULATORY/STANDARDS COMPLIANCE

Electromagnetic Interference

Radiated Emissions FCC Part 15 Class A/CE heavy industrial

Conducted Emissions FCC Part 15 Class A/CE heavy industrial

Electrostatic Discharge (Air Discharge) IEC pub 1,000-4-2 level 3

Immunity to Electrical Fast Transient IEC pub 1,000-4-4 level 3

Immunity to Surge (Impulse Wave) IEC pub 1,000-4-5 level 4

Dielectric Withstand UL 508, CSA C22.2-14-M1987, EN 61010

Immunity to Radiated Fields IEC pub 61000-6-2

Accuracy ANSI C12.20 and IEC 687 Class 0.2






63230-300-216/A1 Appendix B—SpecificationsMay 2001


Safety

USA UL 508

Canada CSA C22.2-2-4-M1987

Europe CE per low voltage directive EN 61010

Listings cUL and UL Listed 18X5 Ind Cont. Eq.

KYZ SPECIFICATIONSLoad voltage 240 Vac, 300 Vdc maximum

Load current 96 mA maximum

ON resistance 50 ohms maximum

Leakage current 0.03 µA (typical)

Turn ON/OFF time 3 ms

Input or output isolation 3750 V rms






Appendix B—Specifications 63230-300-216/A1May 2001


Electrical equipment should be serviced only by qualified maintenance personnel. No responsibilityis assumed by Square D for any consequences arising out of the use of this material.

Square D and are registered trademarks of Square D Company.

Bulletin No. 63230-300-216/A1 May 2001 © 2001 Square D All Rights Reserved.

Square D Company295 Tech Park Drive, Suite 100LaVergne, TN 37086(615) 287-3400

WStone

Text Box

Appendix A Variable Speed Drive VFD

Submittal Index

Project Name: Phase II Aquifer Storage and Recovery Project Monterrey, CA

RA Order Number: R1USX00541

Tab 1. General Information Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage Lifting Instructions Recommended Shielded Wire Safety Guidelines Wiring & Grounding Guidelines

Tab 2. Equipment Descriptions VFD APPROVAL Drawings

• Title Sheet

• General Notes

• Wire Classifications

• Electrical Drawings

• Layout Drawings and Major Components Lists

Tab 3. Product References Variable Frequency Drives Autotransformer 18 Pulse Bridge Assembly Circuit Breakers Control Transformer Enclosure Cooling Fan Enclosure Door Replacement Filters Enclosure Fans Enclosure Filters Enclosure Heater Fuses HIM Operator Station

WStone

Text Box

Available upon Request

I/O Module Incoming Circuit Breaker I/O Isolator Operator Pilot Lights Operator Potentiometer Operator Pushbuttons Operator Selector Switches Output Filters Relays – Control, Phase Loss & Timing Suppressors

Tab 4. Miscellaneous Information PowerFlex Test Process Advanced Harmonic Estimator Factory Test Procedure

Tab 5. Start-Up & Maintenance PF750 Programming Manual PF750 Installation Instructions Drives Preventative Maintenance Drives Technical Support Extended Warranty Information Services and Support Contact Information

WStone

Text Box


WStone

Text Box


WStone

Text Box

General Information

ALLEN-BRADLEY

Introduction

Data Sheet Contents

Guarding AgainstElectrostatic Damage

Testing and Maintenance

Electrostatic damage (ESD) is a major cause of failures and malfunctions intoday’s sophisticated electrical components and systems.

Some manufacturers of electronic systems may tell you that ESD is not aproblem with their products. This is misleading. All conscientiousmanufacturers take anti-static precautions when they design their products.However, even the best anti-static designs cannot keep ESD from affectingsophisticated electronic systems, particularly when they are disassembled.

Proper education combined with simple work-related procedures andprecautions can guard against many of the effects of ESD. This data sheetexplains the causes of ESD, and how you can guard against its effects.

This data sheet provides the following information:

Table 1.AData Sheet Organization

Section Page

Practices that Guard Against ESD 2

Creating a Static-safe Work Area 2

Wearing a Wrist Strap 3

Handling Sensitive Components Correctly 4

Common Electrostatic Voltages at Work 5

Sensitivity of Components to ESD 5

Hidden Effect of Electrostatic Damage 6

What Causes Electrostatic Damage? 6

Damage Due to Discharge 6

Damage Due to induction 7

Damage Due to Polarization 8

Practices that Guardagainst ESD

There are three things you can do to guard against electrostatic damage:

l create a static-safe work area

l handle sensitive components correctly

l wear a wrist strap that grounds you during work.

Creating a Static-safe An important aspect of guarding against ESD is creating a static-safe workWork Area area. This includes:

AWARNING: To avoid shock or personal injury from

Taccidental contact with line voltage, the ground lead of the

a wrist strap must provide a high resistance, a minimum 1Mohm, path to ground.

covering a work bench with a conductive surface that is grounded

covering the floor of the work area with a conductive material that isgrounded

removing nonconductive materials from the work area such as:

- plastics

- nylon

- styrofoam

- cellophane

grounding yourself by touching a conductive surface before handlingstatic-sensitive components

being careful with loose parts of clothing such as sleeves, ties, and scarfs,which can easily carry a charge

being careful not to touch the backplane connector or connector pins of thesystem

being careful not to touch other circuit components in a module when youconfigure or replace internal components in a module

Wearing a Wrist Strap The most important aspect of guarding against ESD is wearing a wrist strapthat connects you to ground in a static safe work area. A wrist strap usuallyconsists of:

elastic wrist strap with snap fastener

molded ground lead with snap and banana plug - has a built-in 1 Mohmresistor in series to guard against hazardous electrical shock caused byaccidental contact with line voltage

alligator clip - for connection with the ground lead and with ground

You should always wear and use a wrist strap in normal work activities aroundsensitive components:

Put the wrist strap on before beginning work.

Make sure the wrist strap fits snugly.

Make sure the ground lead of the wrist strap is assembled properly andconnected securely to ground each time you use it.

Take off the wrist strap as the last thing you do before leaving the work area.

Figure 1Wrist Strap

Elastic Wrist Strap

Alligator ClipBanana Plug

Handling SensitiveComponents Correctly

Common ElectrostaticVoltages at Work

The last important aspect of guarding against ESD is to always store and carrycomponents and modules in static-shielding containers that guard against theeffect of electric fields.

Remove components and modules from static shielding packages only at astatic-safe work area. Modules are only protected when they are completely ina static-shielding bag. Using the bag to hold the module does not protect themodule.

You should use correct handling procedures even with modules that are beingreturned for repair. This protects the good components for rework.

You need to build up only 3,500 volts to feel the effects of ESD. only 4.500volts to hear them, and only 5,000 volts to see a spark. The normal movementsof someone around a work bench can generate up to 6,000 volts. The chargethat builds up on someone who walks across a nylon carpet in dry air can reach35,000 volts. Potentials as high as 56,000 volts can be measured when a roll ofplain polythylene is unwound. Potentials of more common work situationsrange up to 18,000 volts.

Table 1 .BCommon Electrostatic Voltages

Situation

Person walking on carpet

-humid day

-dry day

Person walking on vinyl floor

-humid day

-dry day

Person in padded chair

Styrofoam coffee cup

Plastic solder sipper

Plastic or scotch tape

Vinyl covered notebook

Voltage

2,000

35,000

400

12,000

up to 18,000

up to 5,000

up to 8,000 at tip

up to 5,000

u p to 8.000

4

Sensitivity of Componentsof ESD

Many of today’s electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic voltage aslow as 30 volts and current as low as 0.001 amps, far less than you can feel,hear, or see.

Hidden Effect ofElectrostatic Damage

Table 1.CComponent Sensitivity to ESD

Device Type

VMOS

MOSFET

GaAsFET

EPROM

JFET

OP AMP

CMOS

Schottky Diodes

Film Resistors (thick, thin)

Bipolar Transistors

ECL (board level)

SCR

Schottky TTL

Electrostatic Voltage

To Degrade To Destroy

30 1,800

100 200

100 300

100 -

140 7,000

190 2,500

250 3,000

300 2,500

300 2,500

380 7,000

500 1,500

680 1,000

1,000 2,500

ESD immediately destroys sensitive devices in only 10% of most ESDincidents. It degrades performance in the remaining 90%. Only a quarter of thevoltage required to destroy the component is needed to degrade itsperformance

A device that is merely degraded in performance may pass all normaldiagnostic tests. However, it may fail intermittently as temperature, vibration,and load on the device vary. Ultimately, the device may fail prematurely: days,weeks, or even months after the ESD incident that degraded it.

If you have some minimal static control procedures, you may only experience adevice failure rate of 0.5%. But, if there are:

l 10 devices per board = 5% defective boards

. 10 boards per system = 40% defective systems

This points out the need to follow rigorous static control procedures at all timeswhen handling and working with static-sensitive devices and modules.

What Causes Electrostatic damage is caused by the effects of an electric field that surroundsElectrostatic Damage? all charged objects. The electric field can damage sensitive components by:

Damage Due to Discharge

6

discharge - the charge associated with the field is suddenly grounded and themovement of the charge creates currents in the device.

induction - the electric field moves in relation to the device and generates acurrent in the device.

polarization - the electric field remains stationary and polarizes the device.Subsequent handling and grounding first charges then discharges the device.

Electric fields are invisible, and exist around all charged materials. They cangenerate currents in conductors simply by moving near them. The size of thecurrent depends on the strength of the field and the speed of movement.Electric fields can polarize sensitive devices. Subsequent handling can causecharging and discharging of the device.

The surfaces of nonconductive materials develop equal and opposite chargeswhen they come in contact, move against each other, then separate quickly. Anelectric field surrounds a nonconductive material once it is charged.

We normally develop charge on our bodies and clothing as we move. When wewalk on carpet, our feet rub on then separate from the carpet, which can give usa charge very quickly.

When we approach a conductor, like a door knob or one of today’s sensitiveelectronic devices, the air between our body and the conductor initially acts asan insulator. At some point, the amount of charge we have built up exceeds theinsulating ability of the air, and a spark jumps to the conductor.

Figure 2Discharge Damage

The spark introduces currents in the conductor. These currents could destroy asensitive device or degrade performance.

Damage Due to Induction A conductor that moves in a magnetic field generates an electric current. Thisis the basic principle of a generator: induction. The principle is the same if themagnetic field moves and the conductor is at rest. The electric field is similar tothe magnetic field in its ability to generate a current.

Walking across a carpet, building up charge, and approaching a sensitive devicecauses your electric field to move across the conductors of the device. Thestronger your electric field, and faster your approach, the more likely you are toinduce damaging currents.

Figure 3lnduction Damage

Charged hand

Damage Due to Polarization If the electric field and a sensitive device remain stationary, but close to eachother, a polarization effect may occur.

A good example of polarization is a styrofoam coffee cup placed next to a chip.The cup is a nonconductor that is easily charged by handling, or even by simplemovement in the air. Polarization causes the electrons on the chip, which arenegative, to be attracted to the cup, which is positively charged. At this pointthe chip is not charged. It is polarized.

Figure 4Uncharged Polarized Chip

If we pick up the chip, it becomes negatively charged as free electrons flowfrom our hand to the chip. If we then place the chip on a grounded surface, itdischarges. The discharge currents can degrade or destroy the chip.

Figure 1.1Charged Polarized Chip

Q

+ ++

m5 ALLEN-BRADLEYmw A ROCKWELL INTERNATIONAL COMPANY

With offices in major cities worldwide.

WORLD EUROPE/MIDDLEHEADQUARTERS EAST/Allen-Bradley AFRICA1201 South Second Street HEADQUARTERSMilwaukee, WI 53204 Allen-Bndley EuropeUSA B.V.Tel: (1) 414 3 8 2 - 2 0 0 0 Amsterdamseweg 15Telex: 43 11 016 1422 AC UithoomFax: (1) 414 382-4444 The Netherlands

Tel: (31) 2975/43500Telex: (844) 18042Fax: (31) 2975/60222

Publication 8000-4.5.2 - May. 1988Supercedes April, 1987

A subsidiary of Rockwell International one of the world's largest technology companies,Allen-Bradley meets today's automation challenges with over 85 years of practical plantfloor experience. More than 12.000 employees throughout the world design, manufactureand apply a wide range of control and automation products and supporting services to helpour customers continuously improve quality, productivity and time to market Theseproducts and services not only control individual machines, but also integrate themanufacturing process while providing access to vital plant floor data that can be used tosupport decision-making throughout the enterprise.

ASIA/PACIFICHEADQUARTERSAllen-Bradley (Hong Kong)LimitedRoom 1006. Block B, Sea ViewEstate2-8 Watson RoadHong KongTel: (852) 887-4788Telex: (780) 64347Fax: (852)510-9436

CANADA LATIN AMERICAHEADQUARTERS HEADQUARTERSAllen-Bradley Canada Allen-BradleyLimited 1201 South Second135 Dundas street StreetCambridge. Ontario N1R Milwaukee, WI 532045X1 USACanada Tel: (1) 414 382-2000Tel: (1) 519 623-1810 Telex: 43 11 016Fax: (1) 519 623-8930 Fax: (1) 414 382-2400

Recommended Shielded Wire

Document Update

Publication RA-DU001A-EN-P – September 2002Copyright © 2002 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.

Reference

AC Drive User Manuals, Power Wiring section.

Acceptable Cable Types

Shielded/Armored Cable

Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales, capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system. Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location, imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications / networking are also good candidates for shielded cable.

Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents for some applications. In addition, the increased impedance of shielded cable may help extend the distance that the motor can be located from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks. Refer to Reflected Wave in “Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives,” publication DRIVES-IN001A-EN-P.

Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the environment of the installation, including temperature, flexibility, moisture characteristics and chemical resistance. In addition, a braided shield should be included and be specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at least 75%. An additional foil shield can greatly improve noise containment.

A good example of recommended cable is Belden® 295xx (xx determines gauge). This cable has four (4) XLPE insulated conductors with a 100% coverage foil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire) surrounded by a PVC jacket.

Other types of shielded cable are available, but the selection of these types may limit the allowable cable length. Particularly, some of the newer cables twist 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield. This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce the overall drive performance. Unless specified in the individual distance tables as tested with the drive, these cables are not recommended and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known.

Recommended Shielded Wire

Location Rating/Type Description

Standard (Option 1) 600V, 90°C (194°F) XHHW2/RHW-2Anixter B209500-B209507, Belden 29501-29507, or equivalent

•

Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation.

•

Copper braid/aluminum foil combination shield and tinned copper drain wire.

•

PVC jacket.

Standard (Option 2) Tray rated 600V, 90°C (194°F) RHH/RHW-2Anixter OLF-7xxxxx or equivalent

•

Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation.

•

5 mil single helical copper tape (25% overlap min.) with three bare copper grounds in contact with shield.

•

PVC jacket.

Class I & II; Division I & II Tray rated 600V, 90°C (194°F) RHH/RHW-2Anixter 7V-7xxxx-3G or equivalent

•

Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation and impervious corrugated continuously welded aluminum armor.

•

Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall.

•

Three copper grounds on #10 AWG and smaller.

Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, andMaintenance of Solid-State Control

Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2NEMA Standard Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Section 1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 2 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2.1 Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.2 Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.3 Off-State Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.4 Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62.5 Rate of Rise-Voltage or Current (DV/DT or DI/DT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62.6 Surge Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72.7 Transient Overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Section 3 Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83.1 General Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83.2 Circuit Isolation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113.3 Special Application Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113.4 Planning Electrical Noise Rejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133.5 Countering the Effects of Off-State Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163.6 Avoiding Adverse Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173.7 The Need for Education – Knowledge Leads to Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Section 4 Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204.1 Installation and Wiring Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204.2 Enclosures (Cooling and Ventilating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214.3 Special Handling of Electrostatic Sensitive Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214.4 Compatibility of Devices with Applied Voltages and Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224.5 Testing Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224.6 Startup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Section 5 Preventive Maintenance and Repair Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245.2 Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245.3 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.4 Safety Recommendations for Maintenance Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Publication SGI-1.1 - April 2009

2

Foreword This Rockwell Automation publication is formatted to harmonize with NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1-1987, also titled Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid-State Control. The text of the NEMA Standard has been reprinted verbatim, with NEMA’s permission, in the left column, captioned “NEMA Standard Text”. The right column, captioned “Explanatory Information”, contains Rockwell Automation comments and explanation. The comments provide supplementary information to the NEMA Standard to help the reader better understand the characteristics of industrial equipment employing solid-state technology. Rockwell Automation is solely responsible for the explanatory comments, which are not part of the NEMA Standard.

NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1-1984 (R1988, R1993, R1998, R2003) is available from the National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 2101 L Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20037.

Comments

Rockwell Automation comments on each section of the NEMA publication will appear after that section, with a “Comments” heading.

NEMA Standard Text

Scope This Standards Publication is intended to provide general guidelines for the application, installation, and maintenance of solid-state control in the form of individual devices or packaged assemblies incorporating solid-state components. The emphasis of the guidelines is personnel safety. Applicable NEMA standards and product related instructions should be carefully followed.

Comments: Scope

The scope of this Allen-Bradley Publication (SGI-1.1) is identical to the scope of NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1, quoted above.

Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009

Section 1: Definitions 3

Section 1: Definitions

Electrical Noise – Unwanted electrical energy that has the possibility of producing undesirable effects in the control, its circuits and system. Electrical noise includes Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Radio Frequency Interference (RFI).

Electrical Noise Immunity – The extent to which the control is protected from a stated electrical noise.

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) – Electromagnetic disturbance that manifests itself in performance degradation, malfunction, or failure of electronic equipment. (IEC)

Off-State Current – The current that flows in a solid-state device in the off-state condition.

Off-State Condition – The conditions of a solid-state device when no control signal is applied.

On-State Condition – The condition of a solid-state device when conducting.

Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) – RFI is used interchangeably with EMI. EMI is a later definition that includes the entire electromagnetic spectrum, whereas RFI is more restricted to the radiofrequency band, generally considered to be between 10k and 10G Hz. (IEC)

Surge Current – A current exceeding the steady state current for a short time duration, normally described by its peak amplitude and time duration.

Transient Overvoltage – The peak voltage in excess of steady state voltage for a short time during the transient conditions (e.g., resulting from the operations of a switching device).


4 Section 2: General Authorized Engineering Information

Section 2: General Authorized Engineering Information

General (Sections 2 through 5 are classified as Authorized Engineering Information 11-15-1984.) Solid-state and electro-mechanical controls can perform similar control functions, but there are certain unique characteristics of solid-state controls which must be understood.

In the application, installation and maintenance of solid-state control, special consideration should be given to the characteristics described in 2.1 through 2.7.

General: Comments

Solid-state devices provide many advantages such as high speed, small size, and the ability to handle extremely complex functions. However, they differ from electromechanical devices in the basic operating characteristics and sensitivity to environmental influences. In addition, solid-state devices exhibit different failure mechanisms when overstressed.

The comments which follow are intended to provide additional information to help the reader better understand the operating characteristics, environmental limitations, and failure modes of industrial equipment that incorporates solid-state technology. Those who select, install, use, and service such equipment should apply that knowledge to make appropriate decisions that will optimize the performance and safety of their applications.

2.1 Ambient Temperature Care should be taken not to exceed the ambient temperature range specified by the manufacturer.

Comments: 2.1 — Ambient Temperature

Temperature of the air immediately surrounding an open solid-state device is the ambient temperature -which must be considered. When equipment is installed in an enclosure, the enclosure internal air temperature is the ambient temperature which must be considered. Solid-state component manufacturers usually publish the component failure rate for an ambient temperature of 40º C. A useful rule of thumb is: The failure rate of solid-state components doubles for every 40º C rise in temperature.

This rule of exponential increases in failure rate is a strong incentive for the user to keep the ambient temperature as low as possible.

See also sections 3.6.1, and 3.6.2.

2.2 Electrical Noise Performance of solid-state controls can be affected by electrical noise. In general, complete systems are designed with a degree of noise immunity. Noise immunity can be determined through tests such as described in 3.4.2. Manufacturer recommended installation practices for reducing the effect of noise should be followed.


Section 2: General Authorized Engineering Information 5

Comments: 2.2 —Electrical Noise

Solid-state devices are generally more susceptible to electrical noise interference than their electromechanical counterparts. The reasons are straightforward. The operating mechanism for electromechanical devices requires a deliberate input of electrical energy that can be converted into a sustained mechanical force that is strong enough to close the hard contacts and maintain the closure for the duration on the ON cycle. Most random electrical noise signals lack the energy content to produce that magnitude of mechanical force. The operating mechanism for solid-state devices is totally different. The deliberate electric energy input is used to disturb the placement of the electrically charged particles within the molecular structure. This molecular displacement changes the electrical characteristic from that of an insulator to that of a conductor or vice versa. The required energy level is very low. In addition, a sustained signal is not required for components such as SCRs, triacs, and logic gates because these types are self-latching. Most random electrical noise signals are of the momentary low-energy type. Since it is difficult to separate deliberate signals from random noise, the devices are thereby more susceptible. This is cause for special concern regarding the electrical environment and possible need for noise rejection measures. See sections 3.4, 3.4.1, 3.4.2, and 3.4.3.

2.3 Off-State Current Solid-state controls generally exhibit a small amount of current flow when in the off-state condition. Precautions must be exercised to ensure proper circuit performance and personnel safety. The value of this current is available from the manufacturer.

Comments: 2.3— Off-State Current

Off-state current is also referred to as leakage current in the literature. A solid-state “contact” is a solid block of material that is switched from ON to OFF by a change internally from a conductor to an insulator. Since a perfect insulator does not exist, there is always some leakage current present as long as voltage is applied to the device. The presence of leakage current indicates that OFF does not mean OPEN. The reader is warned that simply turning a solid-state device OFF does not remove the possibility of a shock hazard. Solid-state and electromechanical devices used as inputs to solid-state controls must be compatible with the solid-state equipment with which they are used. Solid-state devices have inherent off-state current, as explained in the preceding paragraph. Electromechanical devices may also permit a small amount of current to flow when the device is in the “open” position due to poor insulation characteristics, which may be subject to further deterioration with age and use. An example is a switching device that employs a carbon brush in contact with an insulating segment of the switch in the off-state, such that a conductive film may be deposited by the brush on the insulating segment. Any input device that could produce an erroneous signal of sufficient magnitude to cause a malfunction of the solid-state equipment, such as unintended turn ON or inability to turn OFF, should not be used with solid-state controls.

See also section 3.5.2.


6 Section 2: General Authorized Engineering Information

2.4 Polarity Incorrect polarity of applied voltages may damage solid-state controls. The correct polarity of solid-state controls should be observed.

Comments: 2.4 —Polarity

In some instances incorrect polarity can cause damage to controlled equipment or unintended actuation of outputs. This could result in personal injury due to an unexpected response of the controlled equipment or process.


2.5 Rate of Rise-Voltage or Current

(DV/DT or DI/DT) Solid-state controls can be affected by rapid changes of voltage or current if the rate of rise (DV/DT and/or DI/DT) is greater than the maximum permissible value specified by the manufacturer.

Comments: 2.5 —Rate of Rise-Voltage or Current (DV/DT or DI/DT)

The DV/DT rating specifies the maximum rate at which voltage may be applied to the power terminals of a solid-state device. Voltage applied at a rate exceeding the DV/DT rating can switch the device ON without an input signal being applied. Electrical noise with high frequency content is one source of rapidly changing voltage.

Another common source of high DV/DT is an inductive load that is switched off faster than the stored energy can be dissipated. This fast switching produces “inductive kick voltages” that might exceed the DV/DT limit.

The DI/DT rating specifies the maximum rate at which current flow may be increased when switching from OFF to ON. Currents that increase faster than the DI/DT rating cause localized hot spots due to current crowding in a small area until the entire cross section can become conductive.

This results in gradual degradation of the device. Subsequent operations generally result in over dissipation and short circuit failures even under normal load conditions. The most common situations for high DI/DT are low load impedance, or capacitance loads.

Manufacturers of solid-state equipment usually include internal means to limit the rate of rise of voltage and current. Nonetheless, the user should be aware that additional external means may be necessary to adjust to the specific conditions of some installations.

2.6 Surge Current Current of a value greater than that specified by the manufacturer can affect the solid-state control. Current limiting means may be required.

Comments: 2.6 — Surge Current

The manufacturer may specify allowable surge current. Common practice is to specify the peak sinusoidal current that can be allowed for one-half cycle at line frequency. The intent behind this practice is to give the user


Section 2: General Authorized Engineering Information 7

information for selecting an appropriate fuse or other current limiting means.

Applications that require short-term overcurrent capability (e.g., motor starting) must observe the manufacturers restrictions on the number of times the device can be subjected to overcurrent in a specified time interval. The user should be aware that this specification may vary depending upon whether the conditions call for hot starts or cold starts. Hot start means that the solid-state component is at or near the normal operating temperature due to previous operation history when the overcurrent condition occurs. Cold start means that the solid-state component is at or below 40º C when the overcurrent condition occurs.

2.7 Transient Overvoltage Solid-state controls may be affected by transient overvoltages which are in excess of those specified by the manufacturer. Voltage limiting means should be considered and may be required.

Comments: 2.7 — Transient Overvoltage

Solid-state devices are especially sensitive to excessive voltage. When the peak voltage rating is exceeded, even for a fraction of a second, permanent damage can occur. The crystalline structure of the device may be irretrievably altered and the device may no longer be able to turn OFF.

The external symptom of this situation is exactly the same as that of an electromechanical device with welded contacts.

Minimum Holding Current

Another characteristic of concern is the minimum holding current requirement for triacs and SCRs. When the load current falls below the minimum value, typically 25...100 mA, the triac or SCR ceases conduction and passes only off-state current until again triggered. Thus, it may not be possible for the circuit to turn on or conduct full-load current for very light loads. In these instances, a load resistor called a bleeder resistor may be connected to the output to provide the minimum load. In some equipment special circuitry is provided to overcome this problem.


8 Section 3: Application Guidelines

Section 3: Application Guidelines

3.1 General Application Precautions

3.1.1 Circuit Considerations

The consequences of some malfunctions such as those caused by shorted output devices, alteration, loss of memory, or failure of isolation within components or logic devices, require that the user be concerned with the safety of personnel and the protection of the electronics.

It is recommended that circuits which the user considers to be critical to personnel safety, such as “end of travel” circuits and “emergency stop” circuits, should directly control their appropriate functions through an electromechanical device independent of the solid-state logic. Such circuits should initiate the stop function through deenergization rather than energization of the control device. This provides a means of circuit control that is independent of system failure.

Comments: 3.1.1 —Circuit Considerations

The predominant failure mode of solid-state devices is in the ON condition. This failure mode and the other types of failures mentioned in the NEMA Standard are the reasons for the precautions that are recommended for safetycritical circuits on systems that control potentially hazardous processes or machine operations. Alternatively, if solid-state is used for circuits designated as safety-critical, the circuits should be designed to provide safety equivalent to the recommended “hard-wired” electromechanical circuits. In such cases consideration should be given to techniques such as: redundancy, feedback loops, diagnostics, interlocking and read-only memory for critical parts of a program.

De-energization rather than energization of the control device should be specified for STOP circuits so broken wires or corroded contacts do not go undetected. E-stop push buttons or pull cords should be installed at appropriate locations on a machine to provide operators with a rapid and convenient means for removing power from devices that control machine motion.

3.1.2 Power Up/Power Down Considerations

Consideration should be given to system design so that unsafe operation does not occur under these conditions since solid-state outputs may operate erratically for a short period of time after applying or removing power.

Comments: 3.1.2 Power Up/Power Down Considerations

Response of a system during power up/power down can create hazards not encountered during normal operation. Erratic operation of solid-state outputs due to the changing voltage of DC power supplies during start up is one example. To avoid unpredictable outputs, many power supplies incorporate a power turn-on time delay circuit. This allows power supply output voltage to reach its specified value before being applied to


Section 3: Application Guidelines 9

solid-state logic and output circuits. If this protection is not part of the DC supplies for a system, a timing circuit external to the power supply can be added to delay the application of power to output devices.

Removing all power or losing all power from a system simultaneously usually does not result in a hazard since the power for machine operation is also being removed. However, when power other than electrical power is being controlled, a power interlock circuit may be required to protect against unexpected machine motion. Power interlocks with automatic shutdown should be included if erratic or hazardous operation results due to loss of one power supply in a system with multiple supplies.

Automatic power supply sequencing should be employed in systems that require the application or removal of power in a specific sequence. If the STOP or E-STOP sequence normally employs dynamic braking, alternative safeguards, such as automatic mechanical braking upon loss of power, should be provided if coasting stops are hazardous.

If hazardous operation can result from unexpected restoration of power during a power outage or a system shutdown, the system should include a feature that requires a deliberate operator action before power is reapplied to the system.

3.1.3 Redundancy and Monitoring

When solid-state devices are being used to control operations, which the user determines to be critical, it is strongly recommended that redundancy and some form of checking be included in the system. Monitoring circuits should check that actual machine or process operation is identical to controller commands; and in the event of failure in the machine, process, or the monitoring system, the monitoring circuits should initiate a safe shutdown sequence.

Comments: 3.1.3 Redundancy and Monitoring

The normal operating mechanism for solid-state components depends upon a deliberate electrical signal input altering the internal molecular structure of the semiconductor material.

Unfortunately, spurious input signals may also alter the internal molecular structure without any means for external detection that this has happened. Therefore, solid-state devices are subject to malfunction due to random causes that are undetectable. Because of this, redundancy and monitoring are the most highly recommended means for counteracting this situation.

When redundancy is used, dissimilar components not susceptible to common cause failure should be used for the redundant elements if a common cause could produce simultaneous failure of those elements in a dangerous mode.

A “safe shutdown sequence” can involve much more than disconnecting electrical power for some machinery and processes. Examples include machines with high inertia and hazardous access points, processes that become unstable at shutdown unless a specific sequence is followed, etc. The control system for such applications should be configured to deal



with the particular hazard(s) through use of special features such as automatic transfer of control functions to redundant devices in the event of failure of primary controls; alarm circuits and diagnostics to signal and identify failures that require repair in order to maintain redundancy; emergency power sources with automatic transfer upon loss of primary power source; or other appropriate features.

3.1.4 Overcurrent Protection

To protect triacs and transistors from shorted loads, a closely matched short circuit protective device (SCPD) is often incorporated. These SCPDs should be replaced only with devices recommended by the manufacturer.

Comments: 3.1.4 —Overcurrent Protection

Even a closely matched short-circuit protective device (SCPD) will generally protect a solid-state device only against shorted loads, an accidental short to ground, or a phase-to-phase short. Depending upon the application, additional protective measures may be needed to protect the solid-state devices against small to moderate overcurrents. Consult with the manufacturer if necessary.

3.1.5 Overvoltage Protection

To protect triacs, SCRs and transistors from overvoltages, it may be advisable to consider incorporating peak voltage clamping devices such as varistors, zener diodes, or snubber networks in circuits incorporating these devices.

Comments: 3.1.5 — Overvoltage Protection

See section 2.7.

3.2 Circuit Isolation Requirements

3.2.1 Separating Voltages

Solid-state logic uses low level voltage (e.g., less than 32V DC) circuits. In contrast, the inputs and outputs are often high level (e.g., 120V AC) voltages. Proper design of the interface protects against an unwanted interaction between the low level and high level circuits; such an interaction can result in a failure of the low voltage circuitry. This is potentially dangerous. An input and output circuitry incorporating effective isolation techniques (which may include limiting impedance or Class 2 supplied circuitry) should be selected.

Comments: 3.2.1 —Separating Voltages

For specifications of Class 2 circuitry, refer to Article 725 of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70.



3.2.2 Isolation Techniques

The most important function of isolation components is to separate high level circuits from low level circuits in order to protect against the transfer of a fault from one level to the other.

Isolation transformers, pulse transformers, reed relays, or optical couplers are typical means to transmit low level logic signals to power devices in the high level circuit. Isolation impedance means also are used to transmit logic signals to power devices.

Comments: 3.2.2 — Isolation Techniques

In addition to utilizing the various components discussed in the left column, specific wiring techniques should be applied to assure separation of power circuit wires from logic circuit wires. If at all possible, logic wires should be run in a conduit that is segregated for that purpose only. Multiple conductors in a shielded cable is an appropriate substitute for separate conduits. Another common practice is to run the logic signals through twisted pairs of wire. Regardless of the circumstances, wires carrying logic signals should never be wrapped in the same bundle with wires that carry power signals.

3.3 Special Application Considerations

3.3.1 Converting Ladder Diagrams

Converting a ladder diagram originally designed for electromechanical systems to one using solid-state control must account for the differences between electromechanical and solid-state devices. Simply replacing each contact in the ladder diagram with a corresponding solid-state "contact" will not always produce the desired logic functions or fault detection and response. For example, in electromechanical systems, a relay having a mechanically linked normally open (N.O.) and normally closed (N.C.) contact can be wired to check itself. Solid-state components do not have a mutually exclusive N.O.-N.C. arrangement. However, external circuitry can be employed to sample the input and "contact" state and compare to determine if the system is functioning properly.

Comments: 3.3.1 —Converting Ladder Diagrams

The example cited in this section of the NEMA Standard illustrates only one of a number of reasons for special care in converting an electromechanical (relay) ladder diagram to a programmable controller (PC) program. Some other basic considerations are:

A PC program is an instruction to the PC’s central processing unit to allow it to perform the logic functions and sequences for a particular application. Typically, the PC’s logic level components are electrically isolated from the actual input, sensor and actuator devices, as contrasted with electromechanical controls which usually include contacts and coils of the actual plant floor devices in the control schematic. Therefore a PC program normally functions as open-loop control, unless feedback loops from the plant floor devices to separate inputs of the PC are provided and programmed to cause corrective action if inconsistencies are detected.



Programmers of PC systems should evaluate functional and safety implications of all control paths and provide appropriate feedback arrangements as needed.

In an electromechanical implementation of a ladder diagram, power is available to every rung at all times, so that the logic of the various rungs is executed continually and simultaneously, limited of course by the operating delays inherent in the electromechanical devices. By contrast, a typical PC examines the status of input devices (I/O scan), then executes the user program in sequence (program scan), then changes outputs accordingly in the next I/O scan. Therefore, the sequential order of a PC program can be of more importance and significance than in its electromechanical counterpart, particularly when special instructions such as "immediate" inputs or outputs are programmed as some PC’s permit. Also, differences in response characteristics of components, differences in system architecture, and the scan time associates with a PC system can combine to change timing characteristics of a circuit significantly. In particular, care must be taken in handling momentary or rapidly changing inputs to a PC system which might be missed between scans. Simple transfer of a ladder diagram without consideration of these characteristics of PC’s may produce unintended and possibly hazardous results. Programmers should consult the user's manual in order to understand the characteristics of the particular PC being used, and provide appropriate features in the program to accommodate them.

Another concern is the operating mode of devices connected to input terminals. Input signals must be arranged so loss of signal due to a broken wire or corroded contact does not go undetected and create a hazardous condition. In particular, stop functions should be initiated by opening a normally closed external circuit rather than closing a normally open circuit even though the system is capable of being programmed to accept either type of input.

The considerations described in this section apply to the creation of "new" programs as well as conversion of existing ladder diagrams.

3.3.2 Polarity and Phase Sequence

Input power and control signals should be applied with polarity and phase sequence as specified by the manufacturer. Solid-state devices can be damaged by the application of reverse polarity or incorrect phase sequence.

Comments: 3.3.2 —Polarity and Phase Sequence

Additionally, incorrect polarity or phase sequence connection may cause erratic response by solid-state controls, with potential hazards to personnel. Frequently, such a system contains a detection circuit that illuminates an indicator when incorrect phase sequence is applied. Phase sequence may be corrected by interchanging any two system input power leads. It is advisable to check rotation of motors whenever input power leads are disconnected and reconnected in a system.



3.4 Planning Electrical Noise Rejection

The low energy levels of solid-state controls may cause them to be vulnerable to electrical noise. This should be considered in the planning stages.

3.4.1 Assessing Electrical Environment

Sources of noise are those pieces of equipment that have large, fast changing voltages or currents when they are energized or de-energized, such as motor starters, welding equipment, SCR type, adjustable speed devices and other inductive devices. These devices, as well as the more common control relays and their associated wiring, all have the capability of inducing serious current and voltage transients on their respective power lines. It is these transients which nearby solid-state controls must withstand and for which noise immunity should be provided.

An examination of the proposed installation site of the solid-state control should identify equipment that could contaminate power lines. All power lines that will be tapped by the proposed solid-state control should be examined for the presence, severity, and frequency of noise occurrences. If found, system plans should provide for the control of such noise.

Comments: 3.4.1 — Assessing Electrical Environment

Noise can also occur in the form of electromagnetic radiation, or due to improper grounding practices. Section C.3.4.3 explains these forms of noise and precautionary measures that should be taken for protection against them.

In many instances a system may begin to malfunction some time after it has been installed and is working properly. This may be due to recent installation of new equipment capable of inducing noise into presently operating systems. Thus, it is not sufficient to merely evaluate a system at the time of installation. Periodic rechecks should be made, especially as other equipment is moved, modified, or newly installed. When installing a solid-state system, it is wise to assume various noise sources exist and install the system to guard against possible interference.

3.4.2 Selecting Devices to Provide Noise Immunity

Installation planning is not complete without examination of the noise immunity characteristics of the system devices under consideration. Results of tests to determine relative immunity to electrical noise may be requested from the manufacturer. Two such standardized tests are the ANSI (C37.90a-1974) Surge Withstand Capability Test and the NEMA (ICS.1-1983) noise test referred to as The Showering Arc Test. These are applied where direct connection of solid-state control to other electromechanical control circuits is intended. Circuits involving analog regulating systems or high speed logic are generally more sensitive to electrical noise; therefore, isolation and separation of these circuits is more critical.

Further information on electrical noise and evaluation of the severity of noise may be found in ANSI/IEEE Publication No. 518-1982.



Where severe power line transients are anticipated or noted, appropriate filters such as commercially available line filter, isolation transformers, or voltage limiting varistors, should be considered.

All inductive components associated with the system should be examined for the need for noise suppression.

Comments: 3.4.2 —Selecting Devices to Provide Noise Immunity

Inductive devices are capable of generating high voltage transients when switched off. In addition to possibly causing damage to solid-state devices by exceeding the semiconductor voltage rating, the high voltage transient can be coupled to other portions of a system where it appears as noise. Fortunately, it is fairly easy to limit the effects of this type of noise with some form of suppression device. When necessary, in addition to suppression devices often provided in solid-state equipment, an external suppressor should be connected as close as possible to the source of the transient for maximum attenuation.

NOTE: A surge suppressor increases drop-out time of an electromechanical device.

3.4.3 Design of Wiring for Maximum Protection

Once the installation site and power conductors have been examined, the system wiring plans that will provide noise suppression should be considered.

Conducted noise enters solid-state control at the points where the control is connected to input lines, output lines, and power supply wires.

Input circuits are the circuits most vulnerable to noise. Noise may be introduced capacitatively through wire to wire proximity, or magnetically from nearby lines carrying large currents. In most installations, signal lines and power lines should be separate. Further, signal lines should be appropriately routed and shielded according to manufacturer's recommendations.

When planning system layout, care must be given to appropriate grounding practice. Because design differences may call for different grounding, the control manufacturer's recommendations should be followed.

C.3.4.3 Design of Wiring for Maximum Protection

Noise can also occur in the form of electromagnetic radiation. Examples include radio frequency (RF) energy emanating from portable transceivers (walkie-talkie) and fixed station transmitters of various types. Close coupling is not required; the various lines entering the system act as receiving antennas. Tests described in 3.4.2 may not be sufficient to demonstrate noise immunity to radio frequency signals. Variations in building construction and equipment installation make it impossible for equipment manufacturers to perform meaningful tests of radio frequency sources. RF fields are affected by concentrating masses of metal such as steel beams, piping, conduit, metal enclosures, and equipment used in production such as fork lift trucks and products being transported on conveyors.



If the installation site will be subjected to this type of noise, thorough testing should be performed to assure that the solid-state system has sufficient noise immunity for the expected levels of radio frequency energy. Corrective measures should be taken if necessary. These include shielding of solid-state circuits and/or connected wiring and the establishment of restrictions to provide safe operating distances between the solid-state equipment and the RF sources.

Grounding practices in industry are frequently misunderstood and often ignored. Poor grounding can lead to many problems in solid-state systems. Intentionally grounding one circuit conductor of any electrical supply system is widely accepted and is generally required by electrical codes. However, the non-current carrying parts of a system which enclose equipment and conductors must also be grounded. In addition to complying with various codes and standards, proper equipment grounding achieves several desirable objectives:

1. It reduces the potential difference between conductive surfaces to minimize electric shock hazard exposure for personnel.

2. It provides a path for passage of fault current to operate protective devices in the supply circuit.

3. It attenuates the electrical noise and transients that can reach enclosed equipment and also reduces the electrical noise which the equipment can contribute to its surroundings.

3.5 Countering the Effects of Off-State Current

3.5.1 Off-State Current

Solid-state components, such as triacs, transistors, and thyristors, inherently have in the off-state a small current flow called "off-state current".

Off-state current may also be contributed by devices used to protect these components, such as RC snubbers.

Comments: 3.5.1 — Off-State Current

See section 2.3.

3.5.2 Off-State Current Precautions

Off-state currents in a device in the off-state may present a hazard of electrical shock and the device should be disconnected from the power source before working on the circuit or load.

Comments: 3.5.2 — Off-State Current Precautions

The off-state current of a power switching device such as a solid-state motor controller can be lethal. Simply switching off power via a stop push button in a control circuit is not a sufficient precaution, since off-state current will continue to flow through solid-state devices which remain connected to the supply. Good practice requires disconnection of all



power from equipment before working on or near exposed circuit parts. (See NFPA 70E, Part II.)

It should not be assumed that a shock hazard does not exist simply because a solid-state circuit operates at low voltage levels. Standing on a wet floor or working in a damp location can lower a person's body impedance to the extent that off-state current from low voltage also presents an electrical shock hazard.

If it is necessary to work on energized equipment, the guidelines detailed in section 5.2 for Preventive Maintenance should be followed. In addition to the specific procedures for personnel safety, care is needed when making measurements in energized systems. First, there is a possibility of damage to delicate instruments due to off-state current. Second, the off-state current can lead to false conclusions when using sensitive instruments to check for "contact continuity."

Precautions should be taken to prevent the off-state current of an output device which is in the off-state from energizing an input device.

When a device (solid-state or electromechanical) that can produce a leakage current in the off-state is used to provide the input to a solid-state control, the precautions explained in section C.2.3 apply.

3.6 Avoiding Adverse Environmental Conditions

3.6.1 Temperature

Solid-state devices should only be operated within the temperature ranges specified by the manufacturer. Because such devices generate heat, care should be taken to see that the ambient temperature at the device does not exceed the temperature range specified by the manufacturer.

The main source of heat in a solid-state system is the energy dissipated in the power devices. Since the life of the equipment can be increased by reducing operating temperature, it is important to observe the manufacturer's "maximum/minimum ambient temperature" guidelines, where ambient refers to the temperature of the air providing the cooling. The solid-state equipment must be allowed to stabilize to within the manufacturer's recommended operating temperature range before energizing control functions.

When evaluating a system design, other sources of heat in the enclosure which might raise the ambient temperature should not be overlooked. For example, power supplies, transformers, radiated heat, sunlight, furnaces, incandescent lamps, and so forth should be evaluated.

In instances where a system will have to exist in a very hot ambient environment, special cooling methods may have to be employed. Techniques that are employed include cooling fans (with adequate filtering), vortex coolers, heat exchanges, and air conditioned rooms.

Over-temperature sensors are recommended for systems where special cooling is employed. Use of air conditioning should include means for prevention of condensing moisture.



Comments: 3.6.1 — Temperature

Operation above the maximum rated temperature will usually result in many failures in a short time. Nuisance type malfunctions can also be encountered as a result of elevated ambient temperature. These malfunctions, when they occur, are usually temporary and normal operation resumes when temperatures are lowered.

Some solid-state devices temporarily cease to function when ambient temperature is below their minimum rated operating temperature. Operation in cold environments should be avoided or heaters should be installed in the equipment enclosures to bring the system up to the minimum specified operating temperature before applying power to the system.

Air circulating in a non-ventilated enclosure with equipment operating will be at a higher temperature than the room in which it is installed. A temperature differential of 10...20º C can be expected in a typical industrial installation. See also section 2.1.

3.6.2 Contaminants

Moisture, corrosive gases and liquids, and conductive dust can all have adverse effects on a system that is not adequately protected against atmospheric contaminants.

If these contaminants are allowed to collect on printed circuit boards, bridging between the conductors may result in malfunction of the circuit. This could lead to noisy, erratic control operation, or at worst, a permanent malfunction. A thick coating of dust could also prevent adequate cooling on the board or heat sink, causing malfunction. A dust coating on heat sinks reduces their thermal efficiency.

Preventive measures include a specially conditioned room or a properly specified enclosure for the system.

Comments: 3.6.2 — Contaminants

Modules for solid-state systems usually consist of electronic devices mounted on printed circuit boards with relatively close spacing between conductors. Moisture in the form of humidity is one of the atmospheric contaminants which can cause failure. If moisture is allowed to condense on a printed circuit board, the board metallizations could "electroplate" across the conductor spacings when voltage is applied. In low-impedance circuits, this conductive path would immediately burn open, then reform to be burned open again. This action can lead to erratic operation. In high impedance circuits, a short circuit may appear resulting in a permanent malfunction. Specifications for equipment often include a relative humidity exposure limit, but appropriate precautions should be taken to prevent condensation. Failures due to moisture are often accelerated in the presence of corrosive gases or vapors. These increase the conductivity of the moisture layer allowing electromigration to occur more rapidly and at lower potentials.



3.6.3 Shock and Vibration

Excessive shock or vibration may cause damage to solid-state equipment. Special mounting provisions may be required to minimize damage.

Comments: 3.6.3 — Shock and Vibration

Solid-state systems usually have good resistance to shock and vibration since they contain no moving parts. However, at relatively high levels of shock or vibration, circuit boards may disengage from mating connectors if not restrained sufficiently. Circuit boards can crack, components can come out of sockets or component leads can break loose from a solder connection to the board. Mounting position is usually of little significance to solid-state devices except in instances where air flow is required for cooling.

3.7 The Need for Education - Knowledge Leads to Safety

Planning for an effective solid-state circuit requires enough knowledge to make basic decisions that will render the system safe as well as effective.

Everyone who works with a solid-state control should be educated in its capabilities and limitations. This includes in-plant installers, operators, service personnel, and system designers.


Section 4: Installation Guidelines 19

Section 4: Installation Guidelines

4.1 Installation and Wiring Practice

4.1.1

Proper installation and field wiring practices are of prime importance to the application of solid-state controls. Proper wiring practice will minimize the influence of electrical noise, which may cause malfunction of equipment.

User and installers should familiarize themselves with the follow installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards. The manufacturer of the device or component in question should be consulted whenever conditions arise that are not covered by the manufacturer's instructions.

4.1.2

Electrical noise is a very important consideration in any installation of solid-state control. While wiring practices may vary from situation to situation, the following are basic to minimizing electrical noise:

1. Sufficient physical separation should be maintained between electrical noise sources and sensitive equipment to assure that the noise will not cause malfunctioning or unintended actuation of the control.

2. Physical separation should be maintained between sensitive signal wires and electrical power and control conductors. This separation can be accomplished by conduits, wiring trays, or as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.

3. Twisted-pair wiring should be used in critical signal circuits and noise producing circuits to minimize magnetic interference.

4. Shielded wire should be used to reduce the magnitude of the noise coupled into the low level circuit by electrostatic or magnetic coupling.

5. Provisions of the 1984 National Electrical Code ➊ with respect to grounding should be followed. Additional grounding precautions may be required to minimize electrical noise. These precautions generally deal with ground loop currents arising from multiple ground paths. The manufacturer's recommendations should be followed.

➊Available from National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269

Comments: 4.1.2

A great deal of effort goes into the design of solid-state equipment to achieve a reasonable degree of noise immunity. Filters, shielding, and circuit design are all used. It is, however, impossible to design equipment which is impervious to every form of noise found in the industrial setting.


20 Section 4: Installation Guidelines

When installing a system using solid-state technology it is wise to assume that electrical noise exists and install the equipment in accordance with the recommended guidelines to minimize problems.


4.2 Enclosures Suitable enclosures and control of the maximum operating temperature, both of which are environmental variables, may be needed to prevent malfunction of solid state control.

The manufacturer's recommendations should be followed for the selection of enclosures, ventilation, air filtering (if required), and ambient temperature. These recommendations may vary from installation to installation, even within the same facility.

Comments: 4.2 — Enclosures (Cooling and Ventilating)

NEMA Standards Publication No. 250 (please reference the latest edition), classifies enclosures by type number and specifies their design test requirements.Suitable enclosures and control of the maximum operating temperature, both of which are environmental variables, may be needed to prevent malfunctions of solid-state control.

See also sections 2.1 and 3.6.1.

4.3 Special Handling of Electrostatic Sensitive Devices

Some devices may be damaged by electrostatic charges. These devices are identified and should be handled in the special manner specified by the manufacturer.

NOTE: Plastic wrapping material used to ship these devices may be conductive and should not be used as insulating material.

Comments: 4.3 — Special Handling of Electrostatic Sensitive Devices

Many problems due to electrostatic discharge (ESD) occur due to handling of modules during installation or maintenance.

In addition to specific guidelines provided by an equipment supplier, the following general guidelines can help reduce damage due to ESD.

1. Use a grounding bracelet if possible to minimize charge build-up on personnel.

2. Handle a module by the edges without touching components or printed circuit paths.

3. Store modules with ESD sensitive components in the conductive packaging used for shipping the modules. Also, use conductive packaging when returning static sensitive modules for repair.


Section 4: Installation Guidelines 21

4.4 Compatibility of Devices with Applied Voltages and Frequencies

Prior to energization, users and installers should verify that the applied voltage and frequency agree with the rated voltage and frequency specified by the manufacturer.

NOTE: Incorrect voltage or frequency may cause a malfunction of, or damage to the control.

4.5 Testing Precautions When testing solid-state control, the procedures equipment should be electrically equivalent to that recommended by the manufacturer for the test procedure. A low impedance voltage tester should not be used.

High voltage insulation tests and dielectric tests should never be used to test solid-state devices. If high voltage insulation of field wiring is required, solid-state devices should be disconnected. Ohmmeters should only be used when and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

Testing equipment should be grounded; if it is not, special precautions should be taken.

Comments: 4.5 —Testing Precautions

Make-do test devices such as incandescent lamps or neon lamps should not be used for checking voltages in solid-state systems. Incandescent lamps have low impedance; the low impedance of these devices can effectively change a voltage level from a logic "1" condition to a logic "0" condition when attempting to make a measurement. Unexpected machine motion can result if an output to a controlled device is energized as a result. Neon lamps do not respond to voltages typically used in logic circuits (e.g., 32V DC or less). Use of a neon lamp tester could lead to false conclusions about the voltage level present in a circuit.

High input impedance meters are required to obtain accurate voltage measurements in high impedance circuits. Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer, a meter with an input impedance of ten megohms or greater is recommended for making voltage measurements. The meter must also have sufficient sensitivity to measure logic level voltages; some meters do not respond to low voltages.

4.6 Startup Procedures Checks and tests prior to startup and startup procedures recommended by the manufacturer should be followed.

Comments: 4.6 —Startup Procedures

Startup procedures can provide important benefits for safety with new installation, or after modifications or repairs. A "dry run" under controlled conditions can verify proper installation and functioning of the control system before it is turned over to operating personnel.

Many programmable solid-state systems have the capability for simulating operation in a mode known as "test" mode or "dry run" mode. These modes allow a user to check a program and correct obvious programming errors with outputs disabled. Unexpected machine motion and possible damage to workpieces and equipment is thus avoided. These modes can also be used to verify proper system operation after a repair.


22 Section 4: Installation Guidelines

Many programmable systems provide capability for "force on" and "force off" of inputs and outputs. Use of these functions can reduce troubleshooting and maintenance time by enabling personnel to bypass certain operations without physically operating switches on a machine. Care must be taken when using "force" functions to avoid exposing personnel to hazardous machine motions or process operations.

For controllers operating a machine tool or robot, running a part program at a fraction of the programmed operating speed with a workpiece of soft material is considered "good practice". This allows an operator to observe possible interference of tooling with the part and make corrections to the program. A workpiece of soft material such as wood, plastic, or machinable wax will minimize risk of tool damage if there is a tool crash with the workpiece.


Section 5 : Preventive Maintenance and Repair Guidelines 23

Section 5 : Preventive Maintenance and Repair Guidelines

5.1 General A well-planned and executed maintenance program is essential to the satisfactory operation of solid-state electrical equipment. The kind and frequency of the maintenance operation will vary with the kind and complexity of the equipment as well as with the nature of the operating conditions. Maintenance recommendations of the manufacturer or appropriate product standards should be followed.

Useful reference publications for setting up a maintenance program are NFPA 70B-1983, Maintenance of Electrical Equipment, and NFPA 70E-1983, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.

5.2 Preventive Maintenance The following factors should be considered when formulating a maintenance program:

1. Maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel familiar with the construction, operation, and hazards involved with the control.

2. Maintenance should be performed with the control out of operation and disconnected from all sources of power. If maintenance must be performed while the control is energized, the safety related practices of NFPA 70E should be followed.

3. Care should be taken when servicing electrostatic sensitive components. The manufacturer's recommendations for these components should be followed.

4. Ventilation passages should be kept open. If the equipment depends upon auxiliary cooling, e.g., air, water, or oil, periodic inspection (with filter replacement when necessary) should be made of these systems.

5. The means employed for grounding or insulating the equipment from ground should be checked to assure its integrity (see 4.5).

6. Accumulations of dust and dirt on all parts, including on semiconductor heat sinks, should be removed according to the manufacturer's instructions, if provided; otherwise, the manufacturer should be consulted. Care must be taken to avoid damaging any delicate components and to avoid displacing dust, dirt, or debris in a way that permits it to enter or settle into parts of the control equipment.


24 Section 5 : Preventive Maintenance and Repair Guidelines

7. Enclosures should be inspected for evidence of deterioration. Accumulated dust and dirt should be removed from the top of the enclosures before opening doors or removing covers.

8. Certain hazardous materials removed as part of maintenance or repair procedure (e.g., polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) found in some liquid- filled capacitors) must be disposed of as described in Federal regulations.

C.5.2 Preventive Maintenance

Lithium batteries are frequently used for memory backup in solid-state equipment due to their excellent shelf life and high energy-to-weight ratio. Lithium is a highly reactive metal that can cause burns if there is contact with skin. The batteries are sealed so there is seldom a problem of contact with lithium as long as reasonable care is exercised when handling them. They should only be used in their intended application and not subjected to rough handling. When batteries are replaced in equipment, the batteries removed should be disposed of in accordance with supplier's instructions.

The Department of Transportation has certain regulations that prohibit shipment of equipment with batteries installed if the batteries contain 0.5 gram or greater of lithium. The batteries must be removed from equipment and shipped separately in a container approved by the Department of Transportation. Additional Department of Transportation restrictions apply to the shipment of lithium batteries.

NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.3 - 1986, Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and System Equipment, is recommended for personnel responsible for maintenance of equipment.

5.3 Repair If equipment condition indicates repair or replacement, the manufacturer's instruction manual should be followed carefully. Diagnostic information within such a manual should be used to identify the probable source of the problem, and to formulate a repair plan. The level of field repair recommended by the manufacturer should be followed.

When solid-state equipment is repaired, it is important that any replacement part be in accordance with the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. Care should be taken to avoid the use of parts which are no longer compatible with other changes in the equipment. Also, replacement parts should be inspected for deterioration due to "shelf life" and for signs of rework or wear which may involve factors critical to safety.

After repair, proper startup procedures should be followed. Special precautions should be taken to protect personnel from hazards during startup.

Comments: 5.3 — Repair

Follow manufacturer's instructions exactly when replacing power semiconductors mounted on heatsinks since improper installation may become the source of further difficulties. Torque semiconductors or bolts retaining semiconductors to the value specified using a torque wrench.


Section 5 : Preventive Maintenance and Repair Guidelines 25

Too much pressure against a heatsink can damage a semiconductor while too little can restrict the amount of heat transferred from the semiconductor to the heatsink and result in operation at higher temperature with decreased reliability.

Exercise care when removing modules from a system during maintenance. Failed modules are frequently returned to the manufacturer for repair. Any physical damage sustained during removal may result in more expensive repair or render the module unrepairable if damage is too great.

Modules with electrostatic sensitive components should be handled by the edges without touching components or printed circuit conductors. Use packaging material supplied with the replacement module when shipping the module to the manufacturer for repair.

When the scope of repairs exceeds the manufacturer's recommendations for field repair, the module(s) should be returned to the manufacturer for repair. Doing so will help to ensure that only properly selected components are used, and that all necessary hardware and firmware revisions are incorporated into the repair. Failure to make necessary updates may result in safety, compatibility or performance problems which may not become apparent for some time after the repaired module has been placed back in service. When firmware is protected by copyright law, updates can be provided legally only by the manufacturer or licensee.

See also section 4.3.

5.4 Safety Recommendations for Maintenance Personnel

All maintenance work should be done by qualified personnel familiar with the construction, operation, and hazards involved with the equipment. The appropriate work practices of NFPA 70E should be followed.


26 Section 5 : Preventive Maintenance and Repair Guidelines

Installation Instructions

Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives

Important User InformationSolid-state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-1.1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/) describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid-state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is prohibited.

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

Important: Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Software, Rockwell Automation, PowerFlex, DriveExplorer, DriveExecutive, DPI, and SCANport are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.

Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.

!WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

!ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequences.

Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (e.g., drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.

Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (e.g., drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures.

http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/in/sgi-in001_-en-p.pdf

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/

Publication DRIVES-IN001K-EN-P

Summary of Changes

The information below summarizes the changes to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001, since the last release.

Manual Updates

Change PageMotor cable length information added for PowerFlex 753 and 755 A-23


soc-ii Summary of Changes

Notes:


Table of Contents

Preface OverviewWho Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1Recommended Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1Recommended Cable/Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2

Chapter 1 Wire/Cable TypesGeneral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Input Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Motor Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Cable for Discrete Drive I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Analog Signal and Encoder Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Chapter 2 Power DistributionSystem Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1AC Line Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4AC Line Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Surge Protection MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Using PowerFlex Drives with Regenerative Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18DC Bus Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Chapter 3 GroundingGrounding Safety Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Noise Related Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Chapter 4 PracticesMounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Conduit Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Wire Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Cable Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Shield Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Conductor Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Moisture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Chapter 5 Reflected WaveDescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Effects On Wire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Length Restrictions For Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2


ii Table of Contents

Chapter 6 Electromagnetic InterferenceWhat Causes Common Mode Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Containing Common Mode Noise With Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2How Electromechanical Switches Cause Transient Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3How to Prevent or Mitigate Transient Interference from Electromechanical Switches . . 6-3Enclosure Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Bearing Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Appendix A Motor Cable Length Restrictions TablesPowerFlex 4 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3PowerFlex 4M Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4PowerFlex 40 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5PowerFlex 400 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6PowerFlex 70 & 700 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8PowerFlex 700H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13PowerFlex 700L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16PowerFlex 700S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18PowerFlex 753 & 755 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-231336 PLUS II and IMPACT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-261305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-291321-RWR Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30

Glossary


Preface

Overview

The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information needed to properly wire and ground Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC drives.

Who Should Use This Manual

This manual is intended for qualified personnel who plan and design installations of Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC drives.

Recommended Documentation

The following publications provide general drive information.

Title Publication Available…Installing, Operating and Maintaining Engineered Drive Systems (Reliance Electric)

D2-3115-2

Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-1.1 www.rockwellautomation.com/literature

IEEE Guide for the Installation of Electrical Equipment to Minimize Electrical Noise Inputs to Controllers from External Sources

IEEE 518

Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment - IEEE Emerald Book

IEEE STD 1100

Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility, Volume 3

N/A RJ White - publisherDon White Consultants, Inc., 1981

Grounding, Bonding and Shielding for Electronic Equipment and Facilities

Military Handbook 419

IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

IEEE Std 142-1991

National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70) Articles 250, 725-5, 725-15, 725-52 and 800-52

Noise Reduction Techniques in Electronic Systems

N/A Henry W. OttPublished by Wiley-Interscience

Grounding for the Control of EMI N/A Hugh W. DennyPublished by Don White Consultants

Cable Alternatives for PWM AC Drive Applications

IEEE Paper No. PCIC-99-23

EMI Emissions of Modern PWM AC Drives N/A IEEE Industry Applications Magazine, Nov./Dec. 1999

EMC for Product Designers N/A Tim WilliamsPublished by Newnes

Application Guide for AC Adjustable Speed Drive Systems

N/A NEMAwww.nema.org

IEC 60364-5-52 Selection & Erection of Electrical Equipment - Wiring systems

N/A IECwww.iec.ch

Don’t Ignore the Cost of Power Line Disturbance 1321-2.0 www.rockwellautomation.com/literature


P-2 Overview

Recommended Cable/Wire The recommended wire and cable referenced in this publication can be obtained through third-party companies found in our Encompass Product Program. For further information on these suppliers and their products, refer to the Encompass web site at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/encompass. Products can be found by selecting “Locate an Encompass Referenced Product” and searching for “Variable Frequency Drive - Cables.”

Manual Conventions The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action:

General Precautions

Word MeaningCan Possible, able to do somethingCannot Not possible, not able to do somethingMay Permitted, allowedMust Unavoidable, you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

!ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive. Measure the DC bus voltage at the +DC & –DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block. The voltage must be zero.

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/encompass

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/encompass


Chapter 1

Wire/Cable Types

AC drive installations have specific requirements for cables. Wire or cable selection for a drive application must consider a variety of criteria.

The following section covers the major issues and proper selection of cable. Recommendations are made to address these issues. Cable materials and construction must consider the following:

• Environment including moisture, temperature and harsh or corrosive chemicals.

• Mechanical needs including geometry, shielding, flexibility and crush resistance.

• Electrical characteristics including cable capacitance/charging current, resistance/voltage drop, current rating and insulation. Insulation may be the most significant of these. Since drives can create voltages well in excess of line voltage, the industry standard cables used in the past may not represent the best choice for customers using variable speed drives. Drive installations benefit from using cable that is significantly different than cable used to wire contactors and push buttons.

• Safety issues including electrical code requirements, grounding needs and others.

Choosing incorrect cable can be costly and may adversely affect the performance of your installation.


1-2 Wire/Cable Types

General Material

Use Copper wire only. The wire clamp type terminals in Allen-Bradley drives are made for use with copper wire only. If you use aluminum wire the connections may loosen.

Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 degrees C. Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire.

Exterior Cover

Whether shielded or unshielded, the cable must be chosen to meet all of the application requirements. Consideration must be given to insulation value and resistance to moisture, contaminants, corrosive agents and other invasive elements. Consult the cable manufacturer and the chart below for proper selection.

Figure 1.1 Wire Selection Flowchart

Selecting Wire to Withstand Reflected Wave Voltage for New and Existing Wire Installationsin Conduit or Cable Trays

ConductorEnvironment

ConductorInsulation

InsulationThickness

XLPEPVC

OK for < 600V ACSystem

No RWR orTerminator required

20 mil or > (1)

230V 400/460V

15 mil

RWR orTerminator

No RWR orTerminator

CableLength

# ofDrives in SameConduit or Wire

Tray

> 50 ft.

< 50 ft.Single Drive,

Single Conduitor Wire Tray

Multiple Drivesin Single Conduit

or Wire Tray

575V

No RWRor Terminator

Reflected WaveReducer?

Reflected WaveReducer?

RWR orTerminator

XLPE (XHHW-2)Insulation for

<600V ACSystem

No RWR orTerminatorRequired

15 mil PVCNot

RecommendedUSE XLPEor > 20 mil

15 mil PVCNot

RecommendedUSE XLPEor > 20 mil

See NEC Guidelines (Article 310 Adjustment Factors) for Maximum Conductor Derating and Maximum

Wires in Conduit or Tray(1) The mimimum wire size for PVC cable with 20 mil or greater insulation is 10 gauge.

DRY (Per NEC Article 100)

WET (Per NEC Article 100)


Wire/Cable Types 1-3

Temperature Rating

In general, installations in surrounding air temperature of 50 °C should use 90 °C wire (required for UL) and installations in 40 °C surrounding air temperature should use 75 °C wire (also required for UL). Refer to the drive user manual for other restrictions

The temperature rating of the wire affects the required gauge. Be certain to meet all applicable national, state and local codes.

Gauge

The proper wire size is determined by a number of factors. Each individual drive user manual lists a minimum and maximum wire gauge based on the amperage rating of the drive and the physical limitations of the terminal blocks. Local or national electrical codes also set the required minimum gauge based on motor full load current (FLA). Both of these requirements should be followed.

Number of Conductors

While local or national electrical codes may determine the required number of conductors, certain configurations are recommended. Figure 1.2 shows cable with a single ground conductor, which is recommended for drives up to and including 200 HP (150 kW). Figure 1.3 shows cable with three ground conductors, which is recommended for drives larger than 200 HP (150 kW). The ground conductors should be spaced symmetrically around the power conductors. The ground conductor(s) should be rated for full drive ampacity.

Figure 1.2 Cable with One Ground Conductor

BR

GW

One Ground Conductor



Figure 1.3 Cable with Three Ground Conductors

Insulation Thickness and Concentricity

Selected wire must have an insulation thickness of equal to or more then 15 mils (0.4 mm/0.015 in.). The quality of wire should not have significant variations on concentricity of wire and insulation.

Figure 1.4 Insulation Concentricity

Geometry

The physical relationship between individual conductors plays a large role in drive installation.

Individual conductors in conduit or cable tray have no fixed relationship and are subject to a variety of issues including: cross coupling of noise, induced voltages, excess insulation stress and others.

Fixed geometry cable (cable that keeps the spacing and orientation of the individual conductors constant) offers significant advantages over individual loose conductors including reducing cross coupling noise and insulation stress. Three types of fixed geometry multi-conductor cables are discussed below: Unshielded, shielded, and armored.

Three Ground Conductors

ACCEPTABLE UNACCEPTABLE



Table 1.A Recommended Cable Design

Unshielded Cable

Properly designed multi-conductor cable can provide superior performance in wet applications, significantly reduce voltage stress on wire insulation and reduce cross coupling between drives.

The use of cables without shielding is generally acceptable for installations where electrical noise created by the drive does not interfere with the operation of other devices such as: communications cards, photoelectric switches, weigh scales and others. Be certain the installation does not require shielded cable to meet specific EMC standards for CE, C-Tick or FCC. Cable specifications depend on the installation Type.

Type 1 & 2 Installation

Type 1 or 2 installation requires 3 phase conductors and a fully rated individual ground conductor without or with brake leads. Refer to Table 1.A for detailed information and specifications on these installations.

Figure 1.5 Type 1 Unshielded Multi-Conductor Cable without Brake Leads

Type Max. Wire Size Where Used Rating/Type DescriptionType 1 2 AWG Standard Installations

100 HP or less600V, 90 °C (194 °F) XHHW2/RHW-2

Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation

Type 2 2 AWG Standard Installations 100 HP or less with Brake Conductors

600V, 90 °C (194 °F) RHH/RHW-2

Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation plus one (1) shielded pair of brake conductors.

Type 3 500 MCM AWG Standard Installations 150 HP or more

Tray rated 600V, 90 °C (194 °F) RHH/RHW-2

Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation and (3) bare copper grounds and PVC jacket.

Type 4 500 MCM AWG Water, Caustic Chemical, Crush Resistance

Tray rated 600V, 90 °C (194 °F) RHH/RHW-2

Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation and three copper grounds on 10 AWG and smaller. Acceptable in Class I & II, Division I & II locations.

Type 5 500 MCM AWG 690V Applications Tray rated 2000V, 90 °C (194 °F) Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation. (3) bare copper grounds and PVC jacket.Note: If terminator network or output filter is used, connector insulation must be XLPE, not PVC.

Type 1 Installation, without Brake Conductors

GR

BW

Filler PVC OuterSheath

Single GroundConductor



Type 3 Installation

Type 3 installation requires 3 symmetrical ground conductors whose ampacity equals the phase conductor. Refer to Table 1.A for detailed information and specifications on this installation.

Figure 1.6 Type 3 Unshielded Multi-Conductor Cable

The outer sheathing and other mechanical characteristics should be chosen to suit the installation environment. Consideration should be given to surrounding air temperature, chemical environment, flexibility and other factors as necessary in all installation types.

Shielded Cable

Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given for installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales, capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system. Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location, imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications/networking are also good candidates for shielded cable.

Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents for some applications. In addition, the increased size of shielded cable may help extend the distance that the motor can be located from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks. Refer to Chapter 5 for information regarding reflected wave phenomena.

Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the environment of the installation, including temperature, flexibility, moisture characteristics and chemical resistance. In addition, a braided shield should be included and specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at least 75%. An additional foil shield can greatly improve noise containment.

G

R

BWG

G

Filler

PVC OuterSheath

Multiple GroundConductors



Type 1 Installation

An acceptable shielded cable for Type 1 installation will have 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a 100% coverage foil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire) surrounded by a PVC jacket. For detailed specifications and information on these installations, refer to Table 1.A on page 1-5.

Figure 1.7 Type 1 Installation — Shielded Cable with Four Conductors

Type 2 Installation

An acceptable shielded cable for Type 2 installation is essentially the same cable as Type 1, plus one (1) shielded pair of brake conductors. For more information on this installation, refer to Table 1.A on page 1-5.

Figure 1.8 Type 2 Installation — Shielded Cable with Brake Conductors

BR

GW

Shield

Drain Wire

BR

GWShield for

BrakeConductors

Drain Wire forBrake Conductor

Shield



Type 3 Installation

These cables have 3 XLPE insulated copper conductors, 25% minimal overlap with helical copper tape and three (3) bare copper grounds in PVC jacket.

TIP: Other types of shielded cable are available, but the selection of these types may limit the allowable cable length. Particularly, some of the newer cables twist 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield. This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce the overall drive performance. Unless specified in the individual distance tables as tested with the drive, these cables are not recommended and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known. For more information, about motor cable lead restrictions refer to Appendix A, Conduit on page 4-13, Moisture on page 4-19 and Effects On Wire Types on page 5-1.

Armored Cable

Cable with continuous aluminum armor is often recommended in drive system applications or specific industries. It offers most of the advantages of standard shielded cable and also combines considerable mechanical strength and resistance to moisture. It can be installed in concealed and exposed manners and removes the requirement for conduit (EMT) in the installation. It can also be directly buried or embedded in concrete.

Because noise containment can be affected by incidental grounding of the armor to building steel (see Chapter 2) when the cable is mounted, it is recommended the armored cable have an overall PVC jacket.

Interlocked armor is acceptable for shorter cable runs, but continuous welded armor is preferred.

Cable with a single ground conductor is sufficient for drive sizes up to and including 200 HP (150 kW). Cable with three ground conductors is recommended for drive sizes larger than 200 HP (150 kW). The ground conductors should be spaced symmetrically around the power conductors. The ground conductor(s) should be rated for full drive ampacity.

Cable with Three Ground ConductorsCable with a Single Ground Conductor

G

R

BWG

G

GR

BW



Figure 1.9 Armored Cable with Three Ground Conductors

A good example of acceptable cable for Type 5 installation is Anixter 7V-5003-3G, which has three (3) XLPE insulated copper conductors, 25% minimal overlap with the helical copper tape and three (3) bare copper grounds in PVC jacket. Please note that if a terminator network or output filter is used, connector insulation must be XLPE, not PVC.

European Style Cable

Cable used in many installations in Europe should conform to the CE Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC. Generally recommended are flexible cables with a recommended bend radius of 20 times the cable diameter for movable cable and 6 times the cable diameter for fixed installations. The screen (shield) should be between 70 and 85% coverage. Insulation for both conductors and the outer sheath is PVC.

The number and color of individual conductors may vary, but the recommendation is for 3 phase conductors (customer preferred color) and one ground conductor (Green/Yellow)

Ölflex® Classic 100SY or Ölflex Classic 110CY are examples.

Figure 1.10 European Style Multi-Conductor Cable

Optional PVC Outer Sheath

Armor

Conductors with XLPE Insulation

Optional Foil/Copper Tape and/or inner PVC Jacket

R

BW

FillerPVC OuterSheath

StrandedNeutral



Input Power Cables In general, the selection of cable for AC input power to a drive has no special requirements. Some installations may suggest shielded cable to prevent coupling of noise onto the cable (see Chapter 2) and in some cases, shielded cable may be required to meet noise standards such as CE for Europe, C-Tick for Australia/New Zealand, and others. This may be especially true if an input filter is required to meet a standard. Each individual drive user manual will show the requirements for meeting these types of standards. Additionally, individual industries may have required standards due to environment or experience.

For AC variable frequency drive applications that must satisfy EMC standards for CE, C-Tick, FCC or other, Rockwell Automation may recommend that the same type of shielded cable specified for the AC motors be used between the drive and transformer. Check the individual user manuals or system schematic note sheets for specific additional requirements in these situations.

Motor Cables The majority of recommendations regarding drive cable address issues caused by the nature of the drive output. A PWM drive creates AC motor current by sending DC voltage pulses to the motor in a specific pattern. These pulses affect the wire insulation and can be a source of electrical noise. The rise time, amplitude, and frequency of these pulses must be considered when choosing a wire/cable type. The choice of cable must consider:

1. The effects of the drive output once the cable is installed

2. The need for the cable to contain noise caused by the drive output

3. The amount of cable charging current available from the drive

4. Possible voltage drop (and subsequent loss of torque) for long wire runs

Keep the motor cable lengths within the limits set by the drive's user manual. Various issues, including cable charging current and reflected wave voltage stress may exist. If the cable restriction is listed because of excessive coupling current, apply the methods to calculate total cable length, as shown in Figure 1.11. If the restriction is due to voltage reflection and motor protection, tabular data is available. Refer to Appendix A for exact distances allowed.



Figure 1.11 Motor Cable Length for Capacitive Coupling

Important: For multi motor applications review the installation carefully. Consult your distributor drive specialist or Rockwell Automation directly, when considering a multi motor application with greater than two motors. In general most installations will have no issues. However high peak cable charging currents can cause drive over-currents or ground faults.

Cable for Discrete Drive I/O Discrete I/O such as Start and Stop commands can be wired to the drive using a variety of cabling. Shielded cable is recommended, as it can help reduce cross-coupled noise from power cables. Standard individual conductors that meet the general requirements for type, temperature, gauge and applicable codes are acceptable if they are routed away from higher voltage cables to minimize noise coupling. However, multi-conductor cable may be less expensive to install. Control wires should be separated from power wires by at least 0.3 meters (1 foot)

Table 1.B Recommended Control Wire for Digital I/O

182.9 (600)

91.4 (300) 91.4 (300)

15.2 (50)

167.6 (550) 152.4 (500)

15.2 (50)15.2 (50)

All examples represent motor cable length of 182.9 meters (600 feet)

Type (1)

(1) The cable choices shown are for 2 channel (A&B) or three channel (A,B & Z) encoders. If high resolution or other types of feedback devices are used, choose a similar cable with the correct gauge and number of conductor pairs.

Wire Type(s) DescriptionMinimum Insulation Rating

Unshielded Per US NEC or applicable national or local code

– 300V, 60 °C (140 °F)

Shielded Multi-conductor shielded cable 0.750 mm2(18AWG), 3 conductor, shielded.



Analog Signal and Encoder Cable

Always use shielded cable with copper wire. Wire with insulation rating of 300V or greater is recommended. Analog signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 0.3 meters (1 foot). It is recommended that encoder cables be run in a separate conduit. If signal cables must cross power cables, cross at right angles. Terminate the shield of the shielded cable as recommended by manufacturer of the encoder or analog signal device.

Table 1.C Recommended Signal Wire

Communications DeviceNet

DeviceNet cable options, topology, distances allowed and techniques used are very specific to the DeviceNet network. Refer to DeviceNet Cable System Planning and Installation Manual, publication DN-6.72.

In general, there are 4 acceptable cable types for DeviceNet media. These include:

1. Round (Thick) cable with an outside diameter of 12.2 mm (0.48 in) normally used for trunk lines but can also be used for drop lines

2. Round (Thin) cable with an outside diameter of 6.9 mm (0.27 in) normally used for drop lines but may also be used for trunk lines

3. Flat cable normally used for trunk lines

4. KwikLink drop cable used only in KwikLink systems.

Round cable contains five wires: one twisted pair (red and black) for 24V DC power, one twisted pair (blue and white) for signal and a drain wire (bare).

Flat cable contains four wires: one pair (red and black) for 24V DC power and one pair (blue and white) for signal.

Drop cable for KwikLink is a 4-wire unshielded gray cable.

The distance between points, installation of terminating resistors and chosen baud rate all play a significant part in the installation. Refer to the DeviceNet Cable System Planning and Installation Manual for details.

Signal Type/Where Used

Wire Type(s) Description

Minimum Insulation Rating

Standard Analog I/O – 0.750 mm2(18AWG), twisted pair, 100% shield with drain(1)

(1) If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded wire may not be necessary, but is always recommended.

300V, 75…90 °C (167…194 °F)

Remote Pot – 0.750 mm2(18AWG), 3 conductor, shieldedEncoder/Pulse I/OLess 30.5 m (100 ft.)

Combined: 0.196 mm2(24AWG), individually shielded

Encoder/Pulse I/O30.5 m (100 ft.) to 152.4 m (500 ft.)

Signal: 0.196 mm2(24AWG), individually shieldedPower: 0.750 mm2(18AWG)Combined: 0.330 mm2 or 0.500 mm2

Encoder/Pulse I/O152.4 m (500 ft.) to 259.1 m (850 ft.)

Signal: 0.196 mm2(24AWG), individually shieldedPower: 0.750 mm2(18AWG)Combined: 0.750 mm2(18AWG), individually shielded pair



ControlNet

ControlNet cable options, topology, distances allowed and techniques used are very specific to the ControlNet network. For more information refer to ControlNet Coax Cable System Planning and Installation Manual, publication 1786-6.2.1.

Depending on the environment at the installation site there are several types of RG-6 quad shield cables that may be appropriate. The standard cable recommended is A-B Cat # 1786-RG6, Quad Shield coax. Country, state or local codes such as the U.S. NEC govern the installation.

The allowable length of segments and installation of terminating resistors play a significant part in the installation. Again, refer to the ControlNet Coax Cable System Planning and Installation Manual for detailed specifics.

Ethernet

The Ethernet communications interface wiring is very detailed as to the type of cable, connectors and routing. Because of the amount of detail required to bring Ethernet into the industrial environment, planning an installation should be done by following all recommendations in the Ethernet/IP Media Planning and Installation Guide, publication ENET-IN001.

In general, Ethernet systems consist of specific cable types (STP shielded Cable or UTP unshielded cable) using RJ45 connectors that meet the IP67 standard and are appropriate for the environment. Cables should also meet TIA/EIA standards at industrial temperatures.

Shielded cable is always recommended when the installation may include welding, electrostatic processes, drives over 10 HP, Motor Control Centers, high power RF radiation or devices carrying current in excess of 100 Amps. Shield handling and single point grounding, also discussed in this document, play an extremely important role in the proper operation of Ethernet installations.

Finally, there are distance and routing limitations published in detail.

For: Use this Cable TypeLight Industrial • Standard PVC

• CM-CL2Heavy Industrial • Lay-on Armored

• Light Interlocking Armor High/Low Temperature or Corrosive (Harsh Chemicals)

• Plenum-FEP• CMP-CL2P

Festooning or Flexing • High FlexMoisture: direct burial, with flooding compound, fungus resistant

• Flood Burial



Remote I/O and Data Highway Plus (DH+)

Only 1770-CD is tested and approved for Remote I/O and DH+ installations.

The maximum cable length depends on the chosen baud rate:

All three connections (blue, shield and clear) must be connected at each node.

Do not connect in star topology. Only two cables may be connected at any wiring point. Use either series or daisy chain topology at all points.

Serial (RS232/485)

Standard practices for serial communications wiring should be followed. One twisted pair and 1 signal common is recommended for RS232. Recommended cable for RS485 is 2 twisted pair with each pair individually shielded.

Baud Rate Maximum Cable Length 57.6 KBPS 3,048 m (10,000 ft.)115.2 KBPS 1524 m (5000 ft.)230.4 KBPS 762 m (2500 ft.)


Chapter 2

Power Distribution

This chapter discusses different power distribution schemes and factors which affect drive performance.

System Configurations The type of transformer and the connection configuration feeding a drive plays an important role in its performance and safety. The following is a brief description of some of the more common configurations and a discussion of their virtues and shortcomings.

Delta/Wye with Grounded Wye Neutral

Delta/Wye with Grounded Wye Neutral is the most common type of distribution system. It provides a 30 degree phase shift. The grounded neutral provides a direct path for common mode current caused by the drive output (see Chapter 3 and Chapter 6).

Rockwell Automation strongly recommends the use of grounded neutral systems for the following reasons:

– Controlled path for common mode noise current

– Consistent line to ground voltage reference, which minimizes insulation stress

– Accommodation for system surge protection schemes


2-2 Power Distribution

Delta/Delta with Grounded Leg or Four-Wire Connected Secondary Delta

Delta/Delta with Grounded Leg or Four-Wire Connected Secondary Delta is a common configuration with no phase shift between input and output. The grounded center tap provides a direct path for common mode current caused by the drive output.

Three-Phase Open Delta with Single-Phase Center Tapped

Three-Phase Open Delta with Single-Phase Center Tapped is a configuration providing a Three-Phase delta transformer with one side tapped. This tap (the neutral) is connected to earth. The configuration is called the antiphase grounded (neutral) system.

The open delta transformer connection is limited to 58% of the 240V, single-phase transformer rating. Closing the delta with a third single-phase, 240V transformer allows full rating for the two single-phase, 240V transformers. The phase leg opposite the midpoint has an elevated voltage when compared to earth or neutral. The “hottest” high leg must be positively identified throughout the electrical system. It should be the center leg in any switch, motor control, three-phase panel board, etc. The NEC requires orange color tape to identify this leg.

or

ThreePhaseLoads

Single Phase Loads

Single Phase Loads


Power Distribution 2-3

Ungrounded Secondary

Grounding the transformer secondary is essential to the safety of personnel and safe operation of the drive. Leaving the secondary floating allows dangerously high voltages between the chassis of the drive and the internal power structure components. Exceeding the voltage rating of the drive’s input MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protection devices could cause a catastrophic failure. In all cases, the input power to the drive should be referenced to ground.

If the system is ungrounded, other general precautions such as a system level ground fault detector or system level line to ground suppressor may be necessary or an isolation transformer must be considered with the secondary of the transformer grounded. Refer to local codes regarding safety requirements. Also refer to Surge Protection MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors on page 2-17.

High Resistance Ground

Grounding the wye secondary neutral through a resistor is an acceptable method of grounding. Under a short circuit secondary condition, any of the output phases to ground will not exceed the normal line to line voltage. This is within the rating of the MOV input protection devices on the drive. The resistor is often used to detect ground current by monitoring the associated voltage drop. Since high frequency ground current can flow through this resistor, care should be taken to properly connect the drive motor leads using the recommended cables and methods. In some cases, multiple drives (that may have one or more internal references to ground) on one transformer can produce a cumulative ground current that can trigger the ground fault interrupt circuit. Refer to Surge Protection MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors on page 2-17.



TN-S Five-Wire System

TN-S five-wire distribution systems are common throughout Europe, with the exception of the United Kingdom and Germany. Leg to leg voltage (commonly at 400V) powers three-phase loads. Leg to neutral voltage (commonly at 230V) powers single-phase loads. Neutral is a current conducting wire, and connects through a circuit breaker. The fifth wire is a separate ground wire. There is a single connection between ground and neutral, typically in the distribution system. There should be no connections between ground and neutral within the system cabinets.

AC Line Voltage In general all Allen-Bradley drives are tolerant to a wide swing of AC line voltage. Check the individual specification for the drives you are installing.

Incoming voltage imbalances greater than 2% can cause large unequal currents in a drive. An input line reactor may be necessary when line voltage imbalances are greater than 2%.

L1

L2

L3

PEN or N

PE



AC Line Impedance To prevent excess current that may damage drives during events such as line disturbances or certain types of ground faults, drives should have a minimum amount of impedance in front of them. In many installations, this impedance comes from the supply transformer and the supply cables. In certain cases, an additional transformer or reactor is recommended. If any of the following conditions exist, serious consideration should be given to adding impedance (line reactor or transformer) in front of the drive:

A. Installation site has switched power factor correction capacitors.

B. Installation site has lightning strikes or voltage spikes in excess of 6000V Peak.

C. Installation site has power interruptions or voltage dips in excess of 200VAC.

D. The transformer is too large in comparison to the drive. See impedance recommendation tables 2.A through 2.H. Using these tables will allow the largest transformer size for each product and rating based on specific differences in construction, and is the preferred method to follow.

Otherwise, use one of the two following more conservative methods:

1. For drives without built-in inductors, add line impedance whenever the transformer kVA is more than 10 times larger than the drive kVA, or the percent source impedance relative to each drive is less than 0.5%.

2. For drives with built-in inductors, add line impedance whenever the transformer kVA is more than 20 times larger than the drive kVA, or the percent source impedance relative to each drive is less than 0.25%.

To identify drives with built-in inductors, see the product specific tables. The shaded rows identify products ratings without built-in inductors.

Use the following equations to calculate the impedance of the drive and transformer:

Drive Impedance (in ohms)

ZdriveVline - line

3 * I input - rating

=



Transformer Impedance (in ohms)

Transformer Impedance (in ohms)

Example: The drive is rated 1 HP, 480V, 2.7A input.The supply transformer is rated 50,000 VA (50 kVA), 5% impedance.

Note that the percent (%) impedance has to be in per unit (5% becomes 0.05) for the formula.

0.22% is less than 0.5%. Therefore, this transformer is too big for the drive and a line reactor should be added.

Zxfmr

Vline - line

3 * I xfmr - rated

* % Impedance=

% Impedance is the nameplate impedance of the transformer

Typical values range from 0.03 (3%) to 0.06 (6%)

xfmr(Vline - line

VA

)2

Z * % Impedance=

or

Zxfmr

Vline - line

3 * I xfmr - rated

* % Impedance=

% Impedance is the nameplate impedance of the transformer

Typical values range from 0.03 (3%) to 0.06 (6%)

3 * 2.7

480V

3 * I

V

input - rating

line - linedrive =

50,000

480)(V=

22line - line

xfmr VA* 0.05 = 0.2304 Ohms* % Impedance =Z

= 102.6 ohmsZ =

102.6

0.2304

Z

Z

drive

xfmr = 0.00224 = 0.22%=



Note: Grouping multiple drives on one reactor is acceptable; however, the reactor percent impedance must be large enough when evaluated for each drive separately, not evaluated for all loads connected at once.

These recommendations are merely advisory and may not address all situations. Site specific conditions must be considered to assure a quality installation.

Table 2.A AC Line Impedance Recommendations for Bulletin 160 Drives

Table 2.B AC Line Impedance Recommendations for Bulletin 1305 Drives

Drive Catalog Number(1) Volts kW (HP)

Max Supply kVA(2)

3% Line Reactor Open Style 1321-

Reactor Inductance (mH)

Reactor Current Rating (Amps)

160 AA02 240 0.37(0.5) 15 3R4-B 6.5 4AA03 240 0.55 (0.75) 20 3R4-A 3 4AA04 240 0.75 (1) 30 3R4-A 3 4AA08 240 1.5 (2) 50 3R8-A 1.5 8AA12 240 2.2 (3) 75 3R12-A 1.25 12AA18 240 3.7 (5) 100 3R18-A 0.8 18

BA01 480 0.37(0.5) 15 3R2-B 20 2BA02 480 0.55 (0.75) 20 3R2-A 12 2BA03 480 0.75 (1) 30 3R2-A 12 2BA04 480 1.5 (2) 50 3R4-B 6.5 4BA06 480 2.2 (3) 75 3R8-B 3 8BA10 480 3.7 (5) 100 3R18-B 1.5 18

(1) Shaded rows identify drive ratings without built-in inductors(2) Maximum suggested KVA supply without consideration for additional inductance


Max Supply kVA(2)




1305 -AA02A 240 0.37(0.5) 15 3R4-A 3 4-AA03A 240 0.55 (0.75) 20 3R4-A 4 4-AA04A 240 0.75 (1) 30 3R8-A 1.5 8-AA08A 240 1.5 (2) 50 3R8-A 1.5 8-AA12A 240 2.2 (3) 75 3R18-A 0.8 18

-BA01A 480 0.37 (0.5) 15 3R2-B 20 2-BA02A 480 0.55 (0.75) 20 3R2-B 20 2-BA03A 480 0.75 (1) 30 3R4-B 6.5 4-BA04A 480 1.5 (2) 50 3R4-B 6.5 4-BA06A 480 2.2 (3) 75 3R8-B 3 8-BA09A 480 3.7 (5) 100 3R18-B 1.5 18




Table 2.C AC Line Impedance Recommendations for PowerFlex 4 Drives

Table 2.D AC Line Impedance Recommendations for PowerFlex 40 Drive


Max Supply kVA




PowerFlex 4 22AB1P5 240 0.2 (0.25) 15 3R2-A 12 222AB2P3 240 0.4 (0.5) 25 3R4-B 6.5 422AB4P5 240 0.75 (1.0) 50 3R8-B 3 822AB8P0 240 1.5 (2.0) 100 3R8-A 1.5 822AB012 240 2.2 (3.0) 125 3R12-A 1.25 1222AB017 240 3.7 (5.0) 150 3R18-A 0.8 18

22AD1P4 480 0.4 (0.5) 15 3R2-B 20 222AD2P3 480 0.75 (1.0) 30 3R4-C 9 422AD4P0 480 1.5 (2.0) 50 3R4-B 6.5 422AD6P0 480 2.2 (3.0) 75 3R8-C 5 822AD8P7 480 3.7 (5.0) 100 3R8-B 3 8

(1) Shaded rows identify drive ratings without built-in inductors


Max Supply kVA(2)




PowerFlex 40 22BB2P3 240 0.4 (0.5) 25 3R4-B 6.5 422BB5P0 240 0.75 (1.0) 50 3R8-B 3 822BB8P0 240 1.5 (2.0) 50 3R8-A 1.5 822BB012 240 2.2 (3.0) 50 3R12-A 1.25 1222BB017 240 3.7 (5.0) 50 3R18-A 0.8 1822BB024 240 5.5 (7.5) 100 3R25-A 0.5 2522BB033 240 7.5 (10.0) 150 3R35-A 0.4 35

22BD1P4 480 0.4 (0.5) 15 3R2-B 20 222BD2P3 480 0.75 (1.0) 30 3R4-C 9 422BD4P0 480 1.5 (2.0) 50 3R4-B 6.5 422BD6P0 480 2.2 (3.0) 75 3R8-C 5 822BD010 480 3.7 (5.0) 100 3R8-B 3 822BD012 480 5.5 (7.5) 120 3R12-B 2.5 1222BD017 480 7.5 (10.0) 150 3R18-B 1.5 1822BD024 480 11.0 (15.0) 200 3R25-B 1.2 25

22BE1P7 600 0.75 (1.0) 20 3R2-B 20 222BE3P0 600 1.5 (2.0) 30 3R4-B 6.5 422BE4P2 600 2.2 (3.0) 50 3R4-B 6.5 422BE6P6 600 3.7 (5.0) 75 3R8-C 5 822BE9P9 600 5.5 (7.5) 120 3R12-B 2.5 1222BE012 600 7.5 (10.0) 150 3R12-B 2.5 1222BE019 600 11.0 (15.0) 200 3R18-B 1.5 18




Table 2.E AC Line Impedance Recommendations for PowerFlex 400 Drives

Table 2.F AC Line Impedance Recommendations for PowerFlex 70 Drives


Max Supply kVA(2)



Reactor Current Rating (Amps)(3)

PowerFlex 400 22CB012 240 2.2 (3.0) 50 3R12-A N/A N/A22CB017 240 3.7 (5.0) 50 3R18-A N/A N/A22CB024 240 5.5 (7.5) 200 3R25-A 0.5 2522CB033 240 7.7 (10.0) 275 3R35-A 0.4 3522CB049 240 11 (15.0) 350 3R45-A 0.3 4522CB065 240 15 (20.0) 425 3R55-A 0.25 5522CB075 240 18.5 (25.0) 550 3R80-A 0.2 8022CB090 240 22 (30.0) 600 3R100-A 0.15 10022CB120 240 30 (40.0) 750 3R130-A 0.1 13022CB145 240 37 (50.0) 800 3R160-A 0.075 160

22CD6P0 480 2.2 (3.0) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD010 480 3.7 (5.0) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD012 480 5.5 (7.5) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD017 480 7.5 (10) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD022 480 11 (15) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD030 480 15 (20) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD038 480 18.5 (25) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD045 480 22 (30) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD060 480 30 (40) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD072 480 37 (50) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD088 480 45 (60) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD105 480 55 (75) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD142 480 75 (100) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD170 480 90 (125) N/A N/A N/A N/A22CD208 480 110 (150) N/A N/A N/A N/A

(1) Shaded rows identify drive ratings without built-in inductors(2) Maximum suggested KVA supply without consideration for additional inductance(3) N/A = Not Available at time of printing


Max Supply kVA(2)




PowerFlex 70 20AB2P2 240 0.37 (0.5) 25 3R2-D 6 220AB4P2 240 0.75 (1) 50 3R4-A 3 420AB6P8 240 1.5 (2) 50 3R8-A 1.5 820AB9P6 240 2.2 (3) 50 3R12-A 1.25 1220AB015 240 4.0 (5) 200 3R18-A 0.8 1820AB022 240 5.5 (7.5) 250 3R25-A 0.5 2520AB028 240 7.5 (10) 300 3R35-A 0.4 3520AB042 240 11 (15) 1000 3R45-A 0.3 4520AB054 240 15 (20) 1000 3R80-A 0.2 8020AB070 240 18.5 (25) 1000 3R80-A 0.2 80



PowerFlex 70 20AC1P3 400 0.37 (0.5) 30 3R2-B 20 220AC2P1 400 0.75 (1) 50 3R2-B 20 220AC3P4 400 1.5 (2) 50 3R4-B 6.5 420AC5P0 400 2.2 (3) 75 3R4-B 6.5 420AC8P0 400 4.0 (5) 100 3R8-B 3 820AC011 400 5.5 (7.5) 250 3R12-B 2.5 1220AC015 400 7.5 (10) 250 3R18-B 1.5 1820AC022 400 11 (15) 300 3R25-B 1.2 2520AC030 400 15 (20) 400 3R35-B 0.8 3520AC037 400 18.5 (25) 750 3R35-B 0.8 3520AC043 400 22 (30) 1000 3R45-B 0.7 4520AC060 400 30 (40) 1000 3R55-B 0.5 5520AC072 400 37 (50) 1000 3R80-B 0.4 80

20AD1P1 480 0.37 (0.5) 30 3R2-B 20 220AD2P1 480 0.75 (1) 50 3R2-B 20 220AD3P4 480 1.5 (2) 50 3R4-B 6.5 420AD5P0 480 2.2 (3) 75 3R4-B 6.5 420AD8P0 480 3.7 (5) 100 3R8-B 3 820AD011 480 5.5 (7.5) 250 3R12-B 2.5 1220AD015 480 7.5 (10) 250 3R18-B 1.5 1820AD022 480 11 (15) 300 3R25-B 1.2 2520AD027 480 15 (20) 400 3R35-B 0.8 3520AD034 480 18.5 (25) 750 3R35-B N/A N/A20AD040 480 22 (30) 1000 3R45-B N/A N/A20AD052 480 30 (40) 1000 3R55-B N/A N/A20AD065 480 37 (50) 1000 3R80-B N/A N/A

20AE0P9 600 0.37 (0.5) 30 3R2-B 20 220AE1P7 600 0.75 (1) 50 3R2-B 20 220AE2P7 600 1.5 (2) 50 3R4-C 9 420AE3P9 600 2.2 (3) 75 3R4-C 9 420AE6P1 600 4.0 (5) 100 3R8-C 5 820AE9P0 600 5.5 (7.5) 250 3R8-B 3 820AE011 600 7.5 (10) 250 3R12-B 2.5 1220AE017 600 11 (15) 300 3R18-B 1.5 1820AE022 600 15 (20) 400 3R25-B 1.2 2520AE027 600 18.5 (25) 1000 3R35-B 0.8 3520AE031 600 22 (30) 1000 3R35-B 0.8 3520AE042 600 30 (40) 1000 3R45-B 0.7 4520AE051 600 37 (50) 1000 3R55-B 0.5 55

(1) Shaded rows identify drive ratings without built-in inductors(2) Maximum suggested KVA supply without consideration for additional inductance(3) N/A = Not Available at time of printing


Max Supply kVA(2)






Table 2.G AC Line Impedance Recommendations for PowerFlex 700/700S Drives

Drive Catalog Number Volts kW (HP)

Max Supply KVA(1)




PowerFlex 700/700SNote: For PowerFlex 700S, replace 20B with 20D.

20BB2P2 240 0.37 (0.5) 100 3R2-D 6 220BB4P2 240 0.75 (1) 125 3R4-A 3 420BB6P8 240 1.5 (2) 200 3R8-A 1.5 820BB9P6 240 2.2 (3) 300 3R12-A 1.25 1220BB015 240 3.7 (5) 400 3R18-A 0.8 1820BB022 240 5.5 (7.5) 500 3R25-A 0.5 2520BB028 240 7.5 (10) 750 3R35-A 0.4 3520BB042 240 11 (15) 1000 3R45-A 0.3 4520BB052 240 15 (20) 1000 3R80-A 0.2 8020BB070 240 18.5 (25) 1000 3R80-A 0.2 8020BB080 240 22 (30) 1000 3R100-A 0.15 10020BB104 240 30 (40) 1000 3R130-A 0.1 13020BB130 240 37 (50) 1000 3R130-A 0.1 13020BB154 240 45 (60) 1000 3R160-A 0.075 16020BB192 240 55 (75) 1000 3R200-A 0.055 20020BB260 240 75 (100) 1000 3R320-A 0.04 320

20BC1P3 400 0.37 (5) 250 3R2-B 20 220BC2P1 400 0.75 (1) 250 3R2-B 20 220BC3P5 400 1.5(2) 500 3R4-B 6.5 420BC5P0 400 2.2 (3) 500 3R4-B 6.5 420BC8P7 400 4 (5) 500 3R8-B 3 820BC011 400 5.5 (7.5) 750 3R12-B 2.5 1220BC015 400 7.5 (10) 1000 3R18-B 1.5 1820BC022 400 11 (15) 1000 3R25-B 1.2 2520BC030 400 15 (20) 1000 3R35-B 0.8 3520BC037 400 18.5(25) 1000 3R45-B 0.7 4520BC043 400 22 (30) 1000 3R45-B 0.7 4520BC056 400 30 (40) 1000 3R55-B 0.5 5520BC072 400 37 (50) 1000 3R80-B 0.4 8020BC085 400 45 (60) 1000 3R130-B 0.2 13020BC105 400 55 (75) 1000 3R130-B 0.2 13020BC125 400 55 (75) 1000 3R130-B 0.2 13020BC140 400 75 (100) 1000 3R160-B 0.15 16020BC170 400 90 (125) 1500 3R200-B 0.11 20020BC205 400 110 (150) 1500 3R200-B 0.11 20020BC260 400 132 (175) 2000 3RB320-B 0.075 320



PowerFlex 700/700SNote: For PowerFlex 700S, replace 20B with 20D.

20BD1P1 480 0.37 (0.5) 250 3R2-B 20 220BD2P1 480 0.75 (1) 250 3R2-B 20 220BD3P4 480 1.5 (2) 500 3R4-B 6.5 420BD5P0 480 2.2 (3) 500 3R4-B 6.5 420BD8P0 480 4.0 (5) 500 3R8-B 3 820BD011 480 5.5 (7.5) 750 3R12-B 2.5 1220BD014 480 7.5 (10) 750 3R18-B 1.5 1820BD022 480 11 (15) 750 3R25-B 1.2 2520BD027 480 15 (20) 750 3R35-B 0.8 3520BD034 480 18.5 (25) 1000 3R35-B 0.8 3520BD040 480 22 (30) 1000 3R45-B 0.7 4520BD052 480 30 (40) 1000 3R55-B 0.5 5520BD065 480 37 (50) 1000 3R80-B 0.4 8020BD077 480 45 (60) 1000 3R80-B 0.4 8020BD096 480 55 (75) 1000 3R100-B 0.3 10020BD125 480 75 (100) 1000 3R130-B 0.2 13020BD140 480 75 (100) 1000 3R160-B 0.15 16020BD156 480 90 (125) 1500 3R160-B 0.15 16020BD180 480 110 (150) 1500 3R200-B 0.11 200

20BE0P9 600 0.37 (0.5) 250 3R2-B 20 220BE1P7 600 0.75 (1) 250 3R2-B 20 220BE2P7 600 1.5 (2) 500 3R4-B 6.5 420BE3P9 600 2.2 (3) 500 3R4-B 6.5 420BE6P1 600 4.0 (5) 500 3R8-B 3 820BE9P0 600 5.5 (7.5) 750 3R8-B 3 820BE011 600 7.5 (10) 750 3R12-B 2.5 1220BE017 600 11 (15) 750 3R25-B 1.2 2520BE022 600 15 (20) 750 3R25-B 1.2 2520BE027 600 18.5 (25) 1000 3R35-B 0.8 3520BE032 600 22 (30) 1000 3R35-B 0.8 3520BE041 600 30 (40) 1000 3R45-B 0.7 4520BE052 600 37 (50) 1000 3R55-B 0.5 5520BE062 600 45 (60) 1000 3R80-B 0.4 8020BE077 600 55 (75) 1000 3R80-B 0.4 8020BE099 600 75 (100) 1200 3R100-B 0.3 10020BE125 600 90 (125) 1400 3R130-B 0.2 13020BE144 600 110 (150) 1500 3R160-B 0.15 160

(1) Maximum suggested KVA supply without consideration for additional inductance

Drive Catalog Number Volts kW (HP)

Max Supply KVA(1)






Table 2.H AC Line Impedance Recommendations for Bulletin 1336 Drives


Max Supply kVA(2)(3)




1336 Family- Plus Plus II Impact Force

AQF05 240 0.37 (0.5) 25 3R4-A 3.0 4AQF07 240 0.56 (0.75) 25 3R4-A 3.0 4AQF10 240 0.75 (1) 50 3R8-A 1.5 8AQF15 240 1.2 (1.5) 75 3R8-A 1.5 8AQF20 240 1.5 (2) 100 3R12-A 1.25 12AQF30 240 2.2 (3) 200 3R12-A 1.25 12AQF50 240 3.7 (5) 275 3R25-A 0.5 25AQF75 240 5.5 (7.5) 300 3R25-A 0.5 25A7 240 5.5 (7.5) 300 3R25-A 0.5 25A10 240 7.5 (10) 350 3R35-A 0.4 35A15 240 11 (15) 600 3R45-A 0.3 45A20 240 15 (20) 800 3R80-A 0.2 80A25 240 18.5 (25) 800 3R80-A 0.2 80A30 240 22 (30) 950 3R80-A 0.2 80A40 240 30 (40) 1000 3R130-A 0.1 130A50 240 37 (50) 1000 3R160-A 0.075 160A60 240 45 (60) 1000 3R200-A 0.55 200A75 240 56 (75) 1000 3RB250-A 0.045 250A100 240 75 (100) 1000 3RB320-A 0.04 320A125 240 93 (125) 1000 3RB320-A 0.04 320

BRF05 480 0.37 (0.5) 25 3R2-B 20 2BRF07 480 0.56 (0.75) 30 3R2-B 20 2BRF10 480 0.75 (1) 30 3R4-B 6.5 4BRF15 480 1.2 (1.5) 50 3R4-B 6.5 4BRF20 480 1.5 (2) 50 3R8-B 3.0 8BRF30 480 2.2 (3) 75 3R8-B 3.0 8BRF50 480 3.7 (5) 100 3R12-B 2.5 12BRF75 480 5.5 (7.5) 200 3R18-B 1.5 18BRF100 480 7.5 (10) 275 3R25-B 1.2 25BRF150 480 11 (15) 300 3R25-B 1.2 25BRF200 480 15 (20) 350 3R25-B 1.2 25B015 480 11 (15) 350 3R25-B 1.2 25B020 480 15 (20) 425 3R35-B 0.8 35B025 480 18.5 (25) 550 3R35-B 0.8 35B030 480 22 (30) 600 3R45-B 0.7 45B040 480 30 (40) 750 3R55-B 0.5 55B050 480 37 (50) 800 3R80-B 0.4 80B060 480 45 (60) 900 3R80-B 0.4 80B075 480 56 (75) 1000 3R100-B 0.3 100B100 480 75 (100) 1000 3R130-B 0.2 130B125 480 93 (125) 1400 3R160-B 0.15 160B150 480 112 (150) 1500 3R200-B 0.11 N200B200 480 149 (200) 2000 3RB250-B 0.09 250B250 480 187 (250) 2500 3RB320-B 0.075 320B300 480 224 (300) 3000 3RB400-B 0.06 400B350 480 261 (350) 3500 3R500-B 0.05 500B400 480 298 (400) 4000 3R500-B 0.05 500B450 480 336 (450) 4500 3R600-B 0.04 600B500 480 373 (500) 5000 3R600-B 0.04 600B600 480 448 (600) 5000 3R750-B 0.029 750



1336 Family- Plus Plus II Impact Force

B700 480 (700) 5000 3R850-B 0.027 850B800 480 (800) 5000 3R1000-B 0.022 1000BP/BPR250 480 187 (250) N/A N/A N/A N/ABP/BPR300 480 224 (300) N/A N/A N/A N/ABP/BPR350 480 261 (350) N/A N/A N/A N/ABP/BPR400 480 298 (400) N/A N/A N/A N/ABP/BPR450 480 336 (450) N/A N/A N/A N/ABX040 480 30 (40) N/A N/A N/A N/ABX060 480 45 (60) N/A N/A N/A N/ABX150 480 112 (150) N/A N/A N/A N/ABX250 480 187 (250) N/A N/A N/A N/A

CWF10 600 0.75 (1) 25 3R4-C 9 4CWF20 600 1.5 (2) 50 3R4-C 9 4CWF30 600 2.2 (3) 75 3R8-C 5 8CWF50 600 3.7 (5) 100 3R8-B 3 8CWF75 600 5.5 (7.5) 200 3R8-B 3 8CWF100 600 7.5 (10) 200 3R12-B 2.5 12CWF150 600 11 (15) 300 3R18-B 1.5 18CWF200 600 15 (20) 350 3R25-B 1.2 25C015 600 11 (15) 300 3R18-B 1.5 18C020 600 15 (20) 350 3R25-B 1.2 25C025 600 18.5 (25) 500 3R25-B 1.2 25C030 600 22 (30) 600 3R35-B 0.8 35C040 600 30 (40) 700 3R45-B 0.7 45C050 600 37 (50) 850 3R55-B 0.5 55C060 600 45 (60) 900 3R80-B 0.4 80C075 600 56 (75) 950 3R80-B 0.4 80C100 600 75 (100) 1200 3R100-B 0.3 100C125 600 93 (125) 1400 3R130-B 0.2 130C150 600 112 (150) 1500 3R160-B 0.15 160C200 600 149 (200) 2200 3R200-B 0.11 200C250 600 187 (250) 2500 3R250-B 0.09 250C300 600 224 (300) 3000 3R320-B 0.075 320C350 600 261 (350) 3000 3R400-B 0.06 400C400 600 298 (400) 4000 3R400-B 0.06 400C450 600 336 (450) 4500 3R500-B 0.05 500C500 600 373 (500) 5000 3R500-B 0.05 500C600 600 448 (600) 5000 3R600-B 0.04 600C650 600 (650) 5000 3R750-B 0.029 750C700 600 (700) 5000 3R850-B FN-1 0.027 850C800 600 (800) 5000 3R850-B FN-1 0.027 850CP/CPR350 600 261 (350) N/A N/A N/A N/ACP/CPR400 600 298 (400) N/A N/A N/A N/A

(1) Shaded rows identify drive ratings without built-in inductors(2) Maximum suggested KVA supply without consideration for additional inductance(3) 2000 KVA represents 2MVA and Greater(4) N/A = Not Available at time of printing


Max Supply kVA(2)(3)






Multi-Drive Protection

Multiple drives on a common power line should each have their own line reactor. Individual line reactors provide filtering between each drive to provide optimum surge protection for each drive. However, if it is necessary to group more than one drive on a single AC line reactor, use the following process to verify that the AC line reactor provides a minimum amount of impedance:

1. In general, up to 5 drives can be grouped on one reactor.

2. Add the input currents of the drives in the group.

3. Multiply that sum by 125%.

4. Use publication 1321-2.0 to select a reactor with a maximum continuous current rating greater than the multiplied current.

5. Verify that the impedance of the selected reactor is more than 0.5% (0.25% for drives with internal inductors) of the smallest drive in the group by using the formulas below. If the impedance is too small, select a reactor with a larger inductance and same amperage, or regroup the drives into smaller groups and start over.

L is the inductance of the reactor in henries and f is the AC line frequency

3 * I

VZ

input - rating

line - linedrive =

L * 2 * 3.14 * f=Zreactor



Example: There are 5 drives, each is rated 1 HP, 480V, 2.7 amps. These drives do not have internal inductors.

Total current = 5 * 2.7 amps = 13.5 amps

125% * Total current = 125% * 13.5 amps = 16.9 amps

From publication 1321-2.0, we selected the reactor 1321-3R12-C, which has a maximum continuous current rating of 18 amps and an inductance of 4.2 mH (0.0042 henries).

1.54% is more than the 0.5% impedance recommended. The 1321-3R12-C can be used for the (5) 2.7 amp drives in this example.

3 * 2.7

480

3 * I

VZ

input - rating

line - linedrive = 102.6 Ohms==

Zreactor = L * (2 * 3.14) * f = 0.0042 * 6.28 * 60 = 1.58 Ohms

102.6

1.58

Z

Z

drive

reactor = 0.0154 = 1.54%=



Surge Protection MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors

Note: In some drives, a single jumper connects both the phase-to-ground MOV and the common mode capacitors to ground.

MOV Circuitry

Most drives are designed to operate on three-phase supply systems with symmetrical line voltages. To meet IEEE 587, these drives are equipped with MOVs that provide voltage surge protection as well as phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground protection. The MOV circuit is designed for surge suppression (transient line protection) only, not for continuous operation.

Figure 2.1 Typical MOV Configuration

With ungrounded distribution systems, the phase-to-ground MOV connection can become a continuous current path to ground. Exceeding the published phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground voltage or energy ratings may cause physical damage to the MOV.

Suitable isolation is required for the drive when there is potential for abnormally high phase-to-ground voltages (in excess of 125% of nominal line-to-line voltage), or when the supply ground is tied to another system or equipment that could cause the ground potential to vary with operation. An isolation transformer is strongly recommended when this condition exists.

Common Mode Capacitors

Many drives also contain common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground. In installations with ungrounded or high resistive ground systems, the common mode capacitors can capture high frequency common mode or ground fault currents. This can cause bus overvoltage conditions, which could lead to damage or drive faults. Systems which are ungrounded or have one phase grounded (commonly called B phase grounded) apply higher than normal voltage stresses directly to the common mode capacitors, which can lead to shortened drive life or damage.

!ATTENTION: When installing a drive on an ungrounded, high-resistance or B phase grounded distribution system, disconnect the phase-to-ground MOV circuit and the common mode capacitors from ground.

Three-PhaseAC Input

Ground

R

S

T

PHASE-TO-PHASE MOV RATINGIncludes Two Phase-to-Phase MOV's

PHASE-TO-GROUND MOV RATINGIncludes One Phase-to-Phase MOVand One Phase-to-Ground MOV

1 2 3 4



Using PowerFlex Drives with Regenerative Units

DC Bus Wiring Guidelines DC bus wiring refers to connecting the DC bus of an AC drive to the DC connections on another piece of equipment. That equipment could include any or all of the following:

• Additional AC drive• Non-Regenerative DC Bus Supply• Regenerative DC Bus Supply• Regenerative Braking Module• Dynamic Braking Module• Chopper Module

For further information on the types of common DC bus configurations and applications refer to AC Drives in Common Bus Configurations (publication DRIVES-AT002).

Drive Line-up

Generally, it is desirable to have the drive line-up match the machine layout. However, if there is a mix of drive frame sizes used in the line-up, the general system layout should have the largest drives located closest to the rectifier source. The rectifier source need not be at the left end of the system line-up. Many times it is advantageous to put the rectifier in the middle of the line-up, minimizing the distances to the farthest loads. This is needed to minimize the energy stored in the parasitic inductance of the bus structure and thus lower peak bus voltages during transient operation.

The system must be contained in one contiguous line-up. The bus cannot be interrupted to go to another cabinet for the remainder of the system drives. This is needed to maintain low inductance.

DC Bus Connections

General

The interconnection of drives to the DC bus, and the inductance levels between the drives, should be kept to a minimum for reliable system operation. Therefore, a low inductance-type DC bus should be used, 0.35 µH/m or less.

The DC bus connections should not be “daisy chained.” Configuration of the DC bus connections should be in a “star” configuration to allow for proper fusing.

!ATTENTION: If a Regenerative unit (i.e. 1336 REGEN) or other Active Front End (AFE) is used as a bus supply or brake, the common mode capacitors should be disconnected as described in the Drive User Manual. This will guard against possible equipment damage.



Figure 2.2 Star Configuration of Common Bus Connections

Bus Bar vs. Cable

• DC Bus Bar is recommended.

• When DC Bus Bar cannot be used, use the following guidelines for DC Bus cables:

– Cable should be twisted where possible, approximately 1 twist per inch.

– Cable rated for the equivalent AC voltage rating should be used. The peak AC voltage is equivalent to the DC voltage. For example, the peak AC voltage on a 480V AC system no load is 480 x 1.414 = 679 Volts peak. The 679 Volts peak corresponds to 679 Volts DC at no load.

L1

L2

L3

Bus Supply

Power DistributionTerminal Block

DC+

DC+

DC-

DC-

BR1 BR2

M1

L1L1

L2L2

L3L3

DC+ DC-BR1 BR2

M2

AC Drive AC Drive

L1

L2

L3

DC+ DC-BR1 BR2

M3

AC Drive

DC-DC+



Braking Chopper

Connection of the brake unit should be closest to the largest drive. If all are the same rating, then closest to the drive that regenerates the most.

In general, brake units should be mounted within 3 meters (10 feet) of the drive. Resistors for use with chopper modules must be located within 30 meters (100 feet) of the chopper module. Refer to the respective braking product documentation for details.

An RC snubber circuit is required when using the 1336-WA, WB or WC Brake Chopper in the configurations listed below:

1. A non-regenerative bus supply configuration using a PowerFlex Diode Bus Supply.

2. A shared AC/DC Bus configuration containing a PowerFlex 700/700S Frame 0…4 drive or PowerFlex 40P drive.

3. A shared DC Bus (Piggy Back) configuration when the main drive is a PowerFlex 700/700S Frame 0 to 4 or PowerFlex 40P drive.

The RC snubber circuit is required to prevent the DC bus voltage from exceeding the 1200V maximum Brake Chopper IGBT voltage. The 1336 Brake Chopper power-up delay time is 80 milliseconds. During this time, the IGBT will not turn on. The RC snubber circuit must always be connected to the DC bus (located close to the braking chopper) to absorb the power-on voltage overshoot (see Figure 2.3).

The specifications for the RC snubber are:R = 10 ohm, 100 W, low inductance (less than 50 µH)C = 20 µF, 2000V

Figure 2.3 Configuration Example of Diode Bus Supply w/PowerFlex 700 Frame 0…4, PowerFlex 40P, 1336-W Braking Chopper and RC Snubber Circuit.

L1

L2

L3

Diode Bus Supply

Braking Unit1336-W*

DC+

DC+

DC+ DC-

DC-

DC- BR1 BR2

BR

M1

L1L1

L2L2

L3L3

DC+ DC-BR1 BR2

M2

BR1 BR2

Frame 0-4 Frame 0-4

3-PhaseReactor

3-PhaseSource

PowerFlex 700

PowerFlex

PowerFlex 700

L1

L2

L3

DC+ DC-BR+ BR-

M3

PowerFlex 40P

L1

L2

L3

DC+ DC-BR+ BR-

M4

PowerFlex 40P


Chapter 3

Grounding

This chapter discusses various grounding schemes for safety and noise reduction.

An effectively grounded scheme or product is one that is “intentionally connected to earth through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the buildup of voltages which may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to persons” (as defined by the US National Electric Code NFPA70, Article 100B). Grounding of a drive or drive system is done for 2 basic reasons: safety (defined above) and noise containment or reduction. While the safety ground scheme and the noise current return circuit may sometimes share the same path and components, they should be considered different circuits with different requirements.

Grounding Safety Grounds The object of safety grounding is to ensure that all metalwork is at the same ground (or Earth) potential at power frequencies. Impedance between the drive and the building scheme ground must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes. These will vary based on country, type of distribution system and other factors. Periodically check the integrity of all ground connections.

General safety dictates that all metal parts are connected to earth with separate copper wire or wires of the appropriate gauge. Most equipment has specific provisions to connect a safety ground or PE (protective earth) directly to it.

Building Steel

If intentionally bonded at the service entrance, the incoming supply neutral or ground will be bonded to the building ground. Building steel is judged to be the best representation of ground or earth. The structural steel of a building is generally bonded together to provide a consistent ground potential. If other means of grounding are used, such as ground rods, the user should understand the voltage potential, between ground rods in different areas of the installation. Type of soil, ground water level and other environmental factors can greatly affect the voltage potential between ground points if they are not bonded to each other.


3-2 Grounding

Grounding PE or Ground

The drive safety ground - PE must be connected to scheme or earth ground. This is the safety ground for the drive that is required by code. This point must be connected to adjacent building steel (girder, joist), a floor ground rod, bus bar or building ground grid. Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes. Some codes may require redundant ground paths and periodic examination of connection integrity. Global Drive Systems requires the PE ground to be connected to the transformer ground feeding the drive system.

RFI Filter Grounding

Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents. Therefore, the filter must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded to the building power distribution ground. Ensure the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected to the same building power distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables or any plug or socket that may be accidentally disconnected. Some codes may require redundant ground connections. Periodically check the integrity of all connections. Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter.

Grounding Motors

The motor frame or stator core must be connected directly to the drive PE connection with a separate ground conductor. It is recommended that each motor frame be grounded to building steel at the motor. Refer to Cable Trays in Chapter 4 for more information.

Grounding and TN-S Five-Wire Systems

Do not connect ground to neutral within a system cabinet, when using a TN-S five-wire distribution system. The neutral wire is a current conducting wire. There is a single connection between ground and neutral, typically in the distribution system.

TN-S five-wire distribution systems are common throughout Europe, with the exception of the United Kingdom and Germany. Leg to leg voltage (commonly at 400V) powers three-phase loads. Leg to neutral voltage (commonly at 230V) powers single-phase loads.


Grounding 3-3

Figure 3.1 Cabinet Grounding with a TN-S Five-Wire System

Noise Related Grounds It is important to take care when installing PWM AC drives because output can produce high frequency common mode (coupled from output to ground) noise currents. These currents cause sensitive equipment to malfunction if they are allowed to propagate.

L1

L2

L3

PEN or N

PE

R

S

T

R

S

T

PE PE

PE

AC Drive

Single--PhaseDevice

Input Transformer

System Cabinet

Cabinet Ground Bus

X0

R

S

T

U

V

W

PE

AC DRIVEINPUT TRANSFORMER

MOTOR

MOTOR FRAME

A

B

C

PE

SYSTEM GROUND

Feed--back

Device

Clg-m

Clg-c

Vng

Path for CommonMode Current






3-4 Grounding

The grounding scheme can greatly affect the amount of noise and its impact on sensitive equipment. The power scheme is likely to be one of three types:

• Ungrounded Scheme• Scheme with High Resistance Ground• Fully Grounded Scheme

An ungrounded scheme, as shown in Figure 3.2, does not provide a direct path for the common mode noise current, causing it to seek other uncontrolled paths. This causes related noise issues.

Figure 3.2 Ungrounded Scheme

A scheme with a high resistance ground, shown in Figure 3.3, provides a direct path for common mode noise current, like a fully grounded scheme. Designers, who are concerned with minimizing ground fault currents, commonly choose high resistance ground schemes.

Figure 3.3 Scheme with High Resistance Ground

A fully grounded scheme, shown in Figure 3.4, provides a direct path for common mode noise currents. The use of grounded neutral systems is recommended for the following reasons:

– Controlled path for common mode noise current

– Consistent line to ground voltage reference, which minimizes insulation stress

– Accommodation for system surge protection schemes

Earth Ground Potential



Grounding 3-5

Figure 3.4 Fully Grounded Scheme

The installation and grounding practices to reduce common mode noise issues can be categorized into three ratings. The scheme used must weigh additional costs against the operating integrity of all scheme components. If no sensitive equipment is present and noise is not be an issue, the added cost of shielded cable and other components may not be justified.

Acceptable Grounding Practices

The scheme shown below is an acceptable ground layout for a single drive installation. However, conduit may not offer the lowest impedance path for any high frequency noise. If the conduit is mounted so that it contacts the building steel, it is likely that the building steel will offer a lower impedance path and allow noise to inhabit the ground grid.


X0

R

S

T

U

V

W

PEPE

AC DRIVE

Panel Ground Bus

INPUT TRANSFORMER

(OPTIONAL ENCLOSURE)

MOTOR

MOTOR FRAME

STRAP

CONDUIT

BUILDING GROUND POTENTIAL

A

B

C

PE

Connection toGround Grid, Girder orGround Rod

Connection to Cabinet Ground Bus

or Directly to Drive PE Terminal

Incidental Contactof Conduit Strap

MotorFrame

Ground

Connection to Drive Structure or Optional CabinetVia Conduit Connector


3-6 Grounding

Effective Grounding Practices

This scheme replaces the conduit with shielded or armored cable that has a PVC exterior jacket. This PVC jacket prevents accidental contact with building steel and reduces the possibility that noise will enter the ground grid.

Optimal - Recommended Grounding Practices

The fully grounded scheme provides the best containment of common mode noise. It uses PVC jacketed, shielded cable on both the input and the output to the drive. This method also provides a contained noise path to the transformer to keep the ground grid as clean as possible.

X0

R

S

T

U

V

W

PEPE

AC DRIVE

Panel Ground Bus

INPUT TRANSFORMER


MOTOR

MOTOR FRAME

PVC

Shielded or Armored Cable with PVC Jacket


A

B

C

PE

Connection toGround Grid, Girder orGround Rod



Connection to Drive Structure orOptional Cabinet Via GroundingConnector or TerminatingShield at PE Terminal

MotorFrame

Ground

X0

R

S

T

U

V

W

PEPE

AC DRIVE

Panel Ground Bus

INPUT TRANSFORMER


MOTOR

MOTOR FRAME

PVC



A

B

C

PE

Connection to Ground Grid, Girder or Ground Rod



Connection to Drive Structure orOptional Cabinet Via GroundingConnector or TerminatingShield at PE Terminal

MotorFrame

Ground

PVC


Connection to Drive Structure orOptional Cabinet Via Grounding

Connector or TerminatingShield at PE Terminal


Grounding 3-7

Cable Shields

Motor and Input Cables

Shields of motor and input cables must be bonded at both ends to provide a continuous path for common mode noise current.

Control and Signal Cables

Shields of control cables should be connected at one end only. The other end should be cut back and insulated.

– The shield for a cable from one cabinet to another must be connected at the cabinet that contains the signal source.

– The shield for a cable from a cabinet to an external device must be connected at the cabinet end, unless specified by the manufacturer of the external device.

Never connect a shield to the common side of a logic circuit (this will introduce noise into the logic circuit). Connect the shield directly to a chassis ground.

Shield Splicing

Figure 3.5 Spliced Cable Using Shieldhead Connector

If the shielded cable needs to be stripped, it should be stripped back as little as possible to ensure that continuity of the shield is not interrupted. Avoid splicing motor power cables when ever possible. Ideally, motor cables should run continuously between the drive and motor terminals. The most common reason for interrupted cable/shield is to incorporate an “at the motor” disconnect switch. In these cases, the preferred method of splicing is to use fully shielded bulkhead connectors.

Single Point

A single safety ground point or ground bus bar should be directly connected to the building steel for cabinet installations. All circuits including the AC input ground conductor should be grounded independently and directly to this point/bar.

Isolated Inputs

If the drive’s analog inputs are from isolated devices and the output signal is not referenced to the ground, the drive’s inputs do not need to be isolated. An isolated input is recommended to reduce the possibility of induced noise if the transducer’s signal is referenced to ground and the ground potentials are varied (Refer to Noise Related Grounds on page 3-3). An external isolator can be installed if the drive does not provide input isolation.

PE


3-8 Grounding

Notes:


Chapter 4

Practices

This chapter discusses various installation practices.

Mounting Standard Installations

There are many criteria in determining the appropriate enclosure. Some of these include:

• Environment• EMC Compatibility/Compliance• Available Space• Access/Wiring• Safety Guidelines

Grounding to the Component Mounting Panel

In the example below, the drive chassis ground plane is extended to the mounting panel. The panel is made of zinc-plated steel to ensure a proper bond between chassis and panel.

Figure 4.1 Drive Chassis Ground Plane Extended to the Panel

Note: Where TE and PE terminals are provided, ground each separately to the nearest point on the panel using flat braid.

In an industrial control cabinet, the equivalent to the copper ground layer of a PCB is the mounting panel. To make use of the panel as a ground plane it should be made of zinc-plated mild steel. If painted, remove the paint at each mounting and grounding point.

Drive ground plane(chassis) bonded to panel


4-2 Practices

Zinc-plated steel is strongly recommended due to its inherent ability to bond with the drive chassis and resist corrosion. The disadvantage with painted panels, apart from the cost in labor to remove the paint, is the difficulty in making quality control checks to verify if the paint has been properly removed, and any future corrosion of the unprotected mild steel may compromise noise performance.

Plain stainless steel panels are also acceptable but are inferior to zinc-plated mild steel due to their higher ohms-per-square resistance.

Though not always applicable, a plated cabinet frame is also highly desirable since it makes a high frequency bond between panel and cabinet sections more reliable.

Doors

For doors 2 m (78 in.) in height, ground the door to the cabinet with two or three braided straps.

EMC seals are not normally required for industrial systems.

EMC Specific Installations

A steel enclosure is recommended. A steel enclosure can help guard against radiated noise to meet EMC standards. If the enclosure door has a viewing window, it should be a laminated screen or a conductive optical substrate to block EMC.

Do not rely on the hinge for electrical contact between the door and the enclosure - install a grounding wire. For doors 2 m (78 in.) in height, two or three braided grounding straps between the door and the cabinet should be used. EMC gaskets are not normally required for industrial systems.

Layout

Plan the cabinet layout so that drives are separated from sensitive equipment. Choose conduit entry points that allow any common mode noise to remain away from PLCs and other equipment that may be susceptible to noise. Refer to Moisture on page 4-19 for additional information.


Practices 4-3

Hardware

You can mount the drive and/or mounting panel with either bolts or welded studs.

Figure 4.2 Stud Mounting of Ground Bus or Chassis to Back Panel

Back PanelWelded Stud

Paint Free Area

Nut

Flat Washer

Mounting Bracketor Ground Bus

Star Washer

If mounting bracket is coated with a non-conductive material (anodized, painted, etc.), scrape the material off around the mounting hole.

Flat Washer


4-4 Practices

Figure 4.3 Bolt Mounting of Ground Bus or Chassis to Back Panel

If the drive chassis does not lay flat before the nuts/bolts are tightened, use additional washers as shims so that the chassis does not bend when you tighten the nuts.

Conduit Entry Entry Plates

In most cases, the conduit entry plate will be a paint-free conductive material. The surface of the plate should be clean of oil or contaminants. If the plate is painted, use a connector that cuts through the paint and makes a high quality connection to the plate material

Or

Remove the paint around the holes to the bare metal one inch in from the edge of the plate. Grind down the paint on the top and bottom surfaces. Use a high quality joint compound when reassembling to avoid corrosion.

Back Panel Bolt

Paint Free Area

Nut

Flat Washer

Mounting Bracketor Ground Bus

Star Washer

If mounting bracket is coated with a non-conductive material (anodized, painted, etc.), scrape the material off around the mounting hole.

Star WasherNutFlat Washer

Star Washer


Practices 4-5

Cable Connectors/Glands

Choose cable connectors or glands that offer the best cable protection, shield termination and ground contact. Refer to Shield Termination on page 4-15 for more information.

Shield terminating connectors

The cable connector selected must provide good 360o contact and low transfer impedance from the shield or armor of the cable to the conduit entry plate at both the motor and the drive or drive cabinet for electrical bonding. SKINTOP® MS-SC/MS-SCL cable grounding connectors and NPT/PG adapters from LAPPUSA are good examples of this type of shield terminating gland.

Figure 4.4 Terminating the Shield with a Connector

Shield termination via Pigtail (Lead)

If a shield terminating connector is not available, the ground conductors or shields must be terminated to the appropriate ground terminal. If necessary, use a compression fitting for ground conductor(s) and/or shields together as they leave the cable fitting.

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

PE

One or MoreGround Leads

Braid wires pulled back in a 360° pattern around the ground cone of the connector

Drain wires pulled back in a 360° pattern around the ground cone of the connector

Metal locknut bonds theconnector to the panel

Metal connector bodymakes direct contact with

the braid wires

Important: This is mandatory for CE compliant installations, to meet requirements for containing radiated electromagnetic emissions.

Ground Bushing


4-6 Practices

Figure 4.5 Terminating the Shield with a Pigtail Lead

Pigtail termination is the least effective method of noise containment.

It is not recommended if:

• the cable length is greater than 1 m (39 in.) or extends beyond the panel • in very noisy areas • the cables are for very noise sensitive signals (for example, registration

or encoder cables)• strain relief is required

If a pigtail is used, pull and twist the exposed shield after separation from the conductors. Solder a flying lead to the braid to extend its length.

Ground Connections Ground conductors should be connected with care to assure safe and adequate connections.

For individual ground connections, star washers and ring lugs should be used to make connections to mounting plates or other flat surfaces that do not provide proper compression lugs.

If a ground bus system is used in a cabinet, follow the bus bar mounting diagrams.

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

PE

PE

One or MoreGround Leads

Flying Lead Soldered to Braid

Exposed Shield

Important: This is an acceptable industry practice for most installations. to minimize stray common mode currents


Practices 4-7

Figure 4.6 Connections to Ground Bus

Figure 4.7 Ground Connections to Enclosure Wall

Bolt

Star Washer

Component Grounding Conductor

Ground Lug

Tapped Hole

Ground Bus

ComponentGrounding

Conductors

Star Washer

BoltPaint Free Area

Welded StudGround Lug

Ground Lug

Star Washer

Star Washer

Component Ground Conductor

NutStar Washer

Nut Component Ground Conductor


4-8 Practices

Do not lay one ground lug directly on top of the other. This type of connection can become loose due to compression of the metal lugs. Sandwich the first lug between a star washer and a nut with another star washer following. After tightening the nut, sandwich the second lug between the first nut and a second nut with a captive star washer.

Figure 4.8 Multiple Connections to Ground Stud or Bolts


Practices 4-9

Wire Routing General

When routing wiring to a drive, separate high voltage power and motor leads from I/O and signal leads. To maintain separate routes, route these in separate conduit or use tray dividers.

Table 4.A Cable and Wiring Recommendations

CategoryWiring Level Signal Definition Signal Examples

Minimum Spacing (in inches) between Levels in Steel Conduits (Cable Trays) Spacing

Notes1 2/3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10/11Power 1 AC Power (600V or greater) 2.3kV 3-Ph AC Lines 0 3 (9) 3 (9) 3 (18) Refer to

Spacing Note 6

Refer to Spacing Notes 1, 2 and 5

2 AC Power (less than 600V) 460V 3-Ph AC Lines 3 (9) 0 3 (6) 3 (12) Refer to Spacing Note 6


3 AC Power AC Motor4 Dynamic Brake Cables Refer to Spacing Note

7Control 5 115V AC/DC Logic Relay Logic/PLC I/O

Motor Thermostat3 (9) 3 (6) 0 3 (9) Refer to

Spacing Note 6


115V AC Power Power Supplies, Instruments

6 24V AC/DC Logic PLC I/OSignal (Process)

7 Analog Signals, DC Supplies Reference/Feedback Signal, 5 to 24V DC

3 (18) 3 (12) 3 (9) 0 1 (3) Refer to Spacing Notes 2, 3, 4 and 5

Digital (Low Speed) TTK8 Digital (High Speed) I/O, Encoder, Counter

Pulse TachSignal (Comm)

9 Serial Communication RS-232, 422 to Terminals/Printers

Refer to Spacing Note 6 1 (3) 0

11 Serial Communication (greater than 20k total)

ControlNet, DeviceNet, Remote I/O, Data Highway

Example: Spacing relationship between 480V AC incoming power leads and 24V DC logic leads.

• 480V AC leads are Level 2; 24V AC leads are Level 6.• For separate steel conduits, the conduits must be 76 mm (3 in.) apart.• In a cable tray, the two groups of leads must be 152 mm (6 in.) apart.


4-10 Practices

Spacing Notes:

1. Both outgoing and return current carrying conductors are pulled in the same conduit or laid adjacent in tray.

2. The following cable levels can be grouped together:

A. Level 1: Equal to or above 601V.

B. Levels 2, 3, & 4 may have respective circuits pulled in the same conduit or layered in the same tray.

C. Levels 5 & 6 may have respective circuits pulled in the same conduit or layered in the same tray. Note: Bundle may not exceed conditions of NEC 310.

D. Levels 7 & 8 may have respective circuits pulled in the same conduit or layered in the same tray. Note: Encoder cables run in a bundle may experience some amount of EMI coupling. The circuit application may dictate separate spacing.

E. Levels 9, 10 & 11 may have respective circuits pulled in the same conduit or layered in the same tray. Note: Communication cables run in a bundle may experience some amount of EMI coupling and corresponding communication faults. The application may dictate separate spacing.

3. Level 7 through Level 11 wires must be shielded per recommendations.

4. In cable trays, steel separators are advisable between the class groupings.

5. If conduit is used, it must be continuous and composed of magnetic steel.

6. Spacing of Communication cables Levels 2 through 6 is the following:

7. If more than one brake module is required, the first module must be mounted within 3.0 m (10 ft.) of the drive. Each remaining brake module can be a maximum distance of 1.5 m (5 ft.) from the previous module. Resistors must be located within 30 m (100 ft.) of the chopper module.

Conduit Spacing Through Air Spacing115V = 1 inch 115V = 2 inches230V = 1.5 inches 230V = 4 inches460/575V = 3 inches 460/575V = 8 inches575 volts = proportional to 6 inchesPer 1000V

575V proportional to 12 inchesPer 1000V


Practices 4-11

Within A Cabinet

When multiple equipment is mounted in a common enclosure, group the input and output conduit/armor to one side of the cabinet as shown in Figure 4.9. Separating any Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) or other susceptible equipment cabling to the opposite side will minimize many effects of drive induced noise currents.

Figure 4.9 Separating Susceptible Circuits

Common mode noise current returning on the output conduit, shielding or armor can flow into the cabinet bond and most likely exit through the adjacent input conduit/armor bond near the cabinet top, well away from sensitive equipment (such as the PLC). Common mode current on the return ground wire from the motor will flow to the copper PE bus and back up the input PE ground wire, also away from sensitive equipment (Refer to Proper Cabinet Ground - Drives & Susceptible Equipment on page 4-12). If a cabinet PE ground wire is run it should be connected from the same side of the cabinet as the conduit/armor connections. This keeps the common mode noise shunted away from the PLC backplane.

Drive Power Wiring

PWM Drives

Power Distribution Terminals

Ground Bus

SensitiveEquipment

Programmable Logic Controllerand Other Control Circuits

Drive Control and Communications Wiring


4-12 Practices

Figure 4.10 Proper Cabinet Ground - Drives & Susceptible Equipment

Within Conduit

Do not route more than 3 sets of motor leads (3 drives) in the same conduit. Maintain fill rates per applicable electrical codes. Do not run power or motor cables and control or communications cables in the same conduit. If possible, avoid running incoming power leads and motor leads in the same conduit for long runs.

Loops, Antennas and Noise

When routing signal or communications wires, avoid routes that produce loops. Wires that form a loop can form an efficient antenna. Antennas work well in both receive and transmit modes, these loops can be responsible for noise received into the system and noise radiated from the system. Run feed

R S T PEU V W PEU V W PE

Incoming Power Conduit/Armor

Common Mode Current on Armor or Conduit

Output Conduit or Armor(Bonded to Cabinet)

Common Mode Current onCabinet Backplane/Subpanel

CabinetBackplane/Subpanel


Practices 4-13

and return wires together rather than allow a loop to form. Twisting the pair together further reduces the antenna effects. Refer to Figure 4.11.

Figure 4.11 Avoiding Loops in Wiring

Conduit Magnetic steel conduit is preferred. This type of conduit provides the best magnetic shielding. However not all applications allow the use of magnetic steel conduit. Stainless steel or PVC may be required. Conduit other than magnetic steel will not provide the same level of shielding for magnetic fields induced by the motor and input power currents.

Conduit must be installed so as to provide a continuous electrical path through the conduit itself. This path can become important in the containment of high frequency noise.

To avoid nicking, use caution when pulling the wire. Insulation damage can occur when nylon coated wiring such as THHN or THWN is pulled through conduit, particularly 90°bends. Nicking can significantly reduce or remove the insulation. Use great care when pulling nylon coated. Do not use water based lubricants with nylon coated wire such as THHN.

Do not route more than 3 sets of motor cables in one conduit. Maintain the proper fill rates per the applicable electrical codes.

Do not rely on the conduit as the ground return for a short circuit. Route a separate ground wire inside the conduit with the motor or input power wires.

Not Recommended Good Solution Better Solution


4-14 Practices

Cable Trays When laying cable in cable trays, do not randomly distribute them. Power cables for each drive should be bundled together and anchored to the tray. A minimum separation of one cable width should be maintained between bundles to reduce overheating and cross-coupling. Current flowing in one set of cables can induce a hazardous voltage and/or excessive noise on the cable set of another drive, even when no power is applied to the second drive.

Figure 4.12 Recommended Cable Tray Practices

Carefully arrange the geometry of multiple cable sets. Keep conductors within each group bundled. Arrange the order of the conductors to minimize the current which induced between sets and to balance the currents. This is critical on drives with power ratings of 200 HP (150 kW) and higher.

Maintain separation between power and control cables. When laying out cable tray for large drives make sure that cable tray or conduit containing signal wiring is separated from the conduit or trays containing power or motor wiring by 3 feet or more. Electromagnetic fields from power or motor currents can induce currents in the signal cables. Dividers also provide excellent separation.

Bundled and Anchored to Tray

T PE

R ST PE

R ST PE

R S

T PER S S RPE T

Recommended arrangements for multiple cable sets


Practices 4-15

Shield Termination Refer to Shield Splicing on page 3-7 to splice shielded cables. The following methods are acceptable if the shield connection to the ground is not accomplished by the gland or connector. Refer to the table associated with each type of clamp for advantages and disadvantages.

Termination via circular clamp

Clamp the cable to the main panel closest to the shield terminal using the circular section clamping method. The preferred method for grounding cable shields is clamping the circular section of 360°bonding, as shown in Figure 4.13. It has the advantage of covering a wide variety of cable diameters and drilling/mounting is not required. Its disadvantages are cost and availability in all areas.

Figure 4.13 Commercial Cable Clamp (Heavy Duty)

Plain copper saddle clamps, as shown in Figure 4.14, are sold in many areas for plumbing purposes, but are very effective and available in a range of sizes. They are low cost and offer good strain relief as well. You must drill mounting holes to use them.


4-16 Practices

Figure 4.14 Plain Copper Saddle Clamp

Shield Termination via Pigtail (Lead)

If a shield terminating connector is not available, the ground conductors and/or shields must be terminated to the appropriate ground terminal. If necessary, use a compression fitting on the ground conductor(s) or shield together as they leave the cable fitting.

Pigtail termination is the least effective method of noise containment.

It is not recommended if:

• the cable length is greater than 1 m (39 in.) or extends beyond the panel. • being used in very noisy areas • the cables are for very noise sensitive signals (for example, registration

or encoder cables)• strain relief is required

If a pigtail is used, pull and twist the exposed shield after separation from the conductors. To extend the length, solder a flying lead to the braid.


Practices 4-17

Shield Termination via Cable Clamp

Standard Cable

Grounding Cable glands are a simple and effective method for terminating shields while offering excellent strain relief. They are only applicable when entry is through a cabinet surface or bulkhead.

The cable connector selected must provide good 360° contact and low transfer impedance from the shield or armor of the cable to the conduit entry plate at both the motor and the drive or drive cabinet for electrical bonding.

Armored Cable

Armored cable can be terminated in a similar manner to standard cable.

SKINTOP® MS-SC/MS-SCL cable grounding connectors and NPT/PG adapters from LAPPUSA are good examples of standard cable clamp shield terminating gland.

The Tek-Mate™ Fast-Fit cable clamp by O-Z/Gedney is a good example of an armored cable terminator.


4-18 Practices

Conductor Termination Terminate power, motor and control connections to the drive terminal blocks. User manuals list minimum and maximum wire gauges, tightening torque for terminals and recommended lug types if stud connections are provided. Use a connector with 3 ground bushings when using a cable with 3 ground conductors. Bending radii minimums per the applicable electrical code should be followed.

Power TB

Power terminals are normally fixed (non-pull apart) and can be cage clamps, barrier strips or studs for ring type crimp lugs depending on the drive style and rating. Cage clamp styles may require a non-standard screwdriver. Crimp lugs will require a crimping tool. On smaller sizes, a stripping gauge may be provided on the drive to assist in the amount of insulation to remove. Normally the three phase input is not phase sensitive. That is, the sequence of A,B,C phases has no effect on the operation of the drive or the direction of motor rotation.

Control TB

Control terminal blocks are either pull apart or fixed (non pull apart). Terminals will be either spring clamp type or barrier strip. A stripping gauge may be provided on the drive to assist in the amount of insulation to remove. Some control connections, such as analog input and output signals, are polarity sensitive. Consult the applicable user manual for correct connection.

Signal TB

If an encoder or tachometer feedback is used, a separate terminal block or blocks may be provided. Consult the user manual for these phase sensitive connections. Improper wiring could lead to incorrect drive operation.

Cables terminated here are typically shielded and the signals being carried are generally more sensitive to noise. Carefully check the user manual for recommendations on shield termination. Some shields can be terminated at the terminal block and others will be terminated at the entry point.


Practices 4-19

Moisture Refer to NEC Article 100 for definitions of Damp, Dry and Wet locations. The U.S. NEC permits the use of heat-resistant thermoplastic wire in both dry and damp applications (Table 310-13). However, PVC insulation material is more susceptible to absorbing moisture than XLPE (Cross Linked polyethylene) insulation material (XHHW-2) identified for use in wet locations. Because the PVC insulating material absorbs moisture, the corona inception voltage (CIV) insulation capability of the “damp” or “wet” THHN was found to be less than ½ of the same wire when “dry.” For this reason, certain industries where water is prevalent in the environment have refrained from using THHN wire with IGBT drives.

Based on Rockwell Automation research, tests have determined that the following cable type is superior to loose wires in dry, damp and wet applications and can significantly reduce capacitive coupling and common mode noise.

• PVC jacketed, shielded type TC with XLPE conductor insulation designed to meet NEC code designation XHHW-2 (use in wet locations per the U.S. NEC, Table 310-13).

Other cable types for wet locations include continuous welded armor cables or CLX designation.


4-20 Practices

Notes:


Chapter 5

Reflected Wave

This chapter discusses the reflected wave phenomenon and its impact on drive systems.

Description The inverter section of a drive does not produce sinusoidal voltage, but rather a series of voltage pulses created from the DC bus. These pulses travel down the motor cables to the motor. The pulses are then reflected back to the drive. The reflection is dependent on the rise time of the drive output voltage, cable characteristics, cable length and motor impedance. If the voltage reflection is combined with another, subsequent pulse, peak voltages can be at a destructive level. A single IGBT drive output may have reflected wave transient voltage stresses of up to twice (2 pu or per unit) the DC bus voltage between its own output wires. Multiple drive output wires in a single conduit or wire tray further increase output wire voltage stress between multi-drive output wires that are touching. Drive #1 may have a (+) 2 pu stress while drive #2 may simultaneously have a (-) 2 pu stress.

Effects On Wire Types Wires with dielectric constants greater than 4 cause the voltage stress to shift to the air gap between the wires that are barely touching. This electric field may be high enough to ionize the air surrounding the wire insulation and cause a partial discharge mechanism (corona) to occur. The electric field distribution between wires increases the possibility for corona and greater ozone production. This ozone attacks the PVC insulation and produces carbon tracking, leading to the possibility of insulation breakdown.

Based on field and internal testing, Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley has determined conductors manufactured with Poly-Vinyl Chloride (PVC) wire insulation are subject to a variety of manufacturing inconsistencies which can lead to premature insulation degradation when used with IGBT drives. Flame-retardant heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation is the type of insulation listed in the NEC code for the THHN wire designation. This type of insulation is commonly referred to as PVC. In addition to manufacturing inconsistencies, the physical properties of the cable can change due to environment, installation and operation, which can also lead to premature insulation degradation. The following is a summary of our findings:

Due to inconsistencies in manufacturing processes or wire pulling, air voids can also occur in the THHN wire between the nylon jacket and PVC insulation. Because the dielectric constant of air is much lower than the dielectric constant of the insulating material, the transient reflected wave voltage might appear across these voids. If the corona inception voltage


5-2 Reflected Wave

(CIV) for the air void is reached, ozone is produced. Ozone attacks the PVC insulation leading to a breakdown in cable insulation.

Asymmetrical construction of the insulation has also been observed for some manufacturers of PVC wire. A wire with a 15 mil specification was observed to have an insulation thickness of 10 mil at some points. The smaller the insulation thickness, the less voltage the wire can withstand.

THHN jacket material has a relatively brittle nylon that lends itself to damage (i.e. nicks and cuts) when pulled through conduit on long wire runs. This issue is of even greater concern when the wire is being pulled through multiple 90°bends in the conduit. These nicks may be a starting point for CIV leading to insulation degradation.

During operation, the conductor heats up and a “coldflow” condition may occur with PVC insulation at points where the unsupported weight of the wire may stretch the insulation. This has been observed at 90°bends where wire is dropped down to equipment from an above wireway. This “coldflow” condition produces thin spots in the insulation which lowers the cable's voltage withstand capability.

Refer to NEC Article 100 for definitions of Damp, Dry and Wet locations. The U.S. NEC permits the use of heat-resistant thermoplastic wire in both dry and damp applications (Table 310-13). However, PVC insulation material is more susceptible to absorbing moisture than XLPE (Cross Linked polyethylene) insulation material (XHHN-2) identified for use in wet locations. Because the PVC insulating material absorbs moisture, the Corona Inception Voltage insulation capability of the “damp” or “wet” THHN was found to be less than ½ of the same wire when “dry.” For this reason, certain industries where water is prevalent in the environment have refrained from using THHN wire with IGBT drives. Rockwell Automation strongly suggests the use of XLPE insulation for wet areas.

Length Restrictions For Motor Protection

To protect the motor from reflected waves, limit the length of the motor cables from the drive to the motor. Each drive's user manual lists the lead length limitations based on drive size and the quality of the insulation system in the chosen motor.

If the distance between drive and motor must exceed these limits, contact the local office or factory for analysis and advice. Refer to Appendix A for complete tables.


Chapter 6

Electromagnetic Interference

This chapter discusses types of electromagnetic interference and its impact on drive systems.

What Causes Common Mode Noise

Faster output dv/dt transitions of IGBT drives increase the possibility for increased Common Mode (CM) electrical noise. Common Mode Noise is a type of electrical noise induced on signals with respect to ground.

There is a possibility for electrical noise from drive operation to interfere with adjacent sensitive electronic equipment, especially in areas where many drives are concentrated. Generating common mode currents by varying frequency inverters is similar to the common mode currents that occur with DC drives. Although AC drives produce a much higher frequency then DC drives (250 kHz - 6MHz). Inverters have a greater potential for exciting circuit resonance because of very fast turn on switches causing common mode currents to look for the lowest impedance path back to the inverter. The dv/dt and di/dt from the circulating ground currents can couple into the signal and logic circuits, causing improper operation and possible circuit damage. When conventional grounding techniques do not work you must use high frequency bonding techniques. If installers do not use these techniques, motor bearing currents increase and system circuit boards have the potential to fail prematurely. Currents in the ground system may cause problems with computer systems and distributed control systems.

X0

R

S

T

U

V

W

PE

AC DRIVEINPUT TRANSFORMER

MOTOR

MOTOR FRAME

A

B

C

PE

SYSTEM GROUND

Feed--back

Device

Clg-m

Clg-c

Vng







6-2 Electromagnetic Interference

Containing Common Mode Noise With Cabling

Cable type has a great effect on the ability to contain common mode noise in a system that incorporates a drive.

Conduit

The combination of a ground conductor and conduit contains most capacitive current and returns it to the drive without polluting the ground grid. A conduit may still have unintended contact with grid ground structure due to straps, support, etc. The AC resistance characteristics of earth are generally variable and unpredictable, making it difficult to predict how noise current will divide between wire, conduit or the ground grid.

Shielded or Armored Power Cable

The predominant return path for common mode noise is the shield/armor itself when using shielded or armored power cables. Unlike conduit, the shield/armor is isolated from accidental contact with grounds by a PVC outer coating. Making the majority of noise current flow in the controlled path and very little high frequency noise flows into the ground grid.

Noise current returning on the shield or safety ground wire is routed to the drive PE terminal, down to the cabinet PE ground bus, and then directly to the grounded neutral of the drive source transformer. Take care when bonding the armor or shield to the drive PE. A low impedance cable or strap is recommended when making this connection, as opposed to the smaller gauge ground wire either supplied as part of the motor cable or supplied separately. Otherwise, the higher frequencies associated with the common mode noise will find this cable impedance higher and look for a lower impedance path. The cable’s radiated emissions are minimal because the armor completely covers the noisy power wires. Also, the armor prevents EMI coupling to other signal cables that might be routed in the same cable tray.

Another effective method of reducing common mode noise is to attenuate it before it can reach the ground grid. Installing a common mode ferrite core on the output cables can reduce the amplitude of the noise to a level that makes it relatively harmless to sensitive equipment or circuits. Common mode cores are most effective when multiple drives are located in a relatively small area. For more information see the 1321-M Common Mode Chokes Instructions, publication 1321-5.0.

As a general rule:

IF the distance between the drive and motor or the distance between drive and input transformer is greater than 75 feet.

AND

IF sensitive circuits with leads greater then 75 feet such as: encoders, analog, or capacitive sensors are routed, in or out of the cabinet, near the drive or transformer

THEN

Common mode chokes should be installed.


Electromagnetic Interference 6-3

How Electromechanical Switches Cause Transient Interference

Electromechanical contacts cause transient interference when switching inductive loads such as relays, solenoids, motor starters, or motors. Drives, as well as other devices having electronic logic circuits, are susceptible to this type of interference.

Examine the following circuit model for a switch controlling an inductive load. Both the load and the wiring have inductance, which prevents the current from stopping instantly when the switch contacts open. There is also stray capacitance in the wiring.

Interference occurs when the switch opens while it is carrying current. Load and cable inductance prevents the current from immediately stopping. The current continues to flow, and charges the capacitance in the circuit. The voltage across the switch contacts (VC) rises, as the capacitance charges. This voltage can reach very high levels. When the voltage exceeds the breakdown voltage for the space between the contacts, an arc occurs and the voltage returns to zero. Charging and arcing continues until the distance between the contacts is sufficient to provide insulation. The arcing radiates noise at an energy levels and frequencies that disturb logic and communication circuits.

If the power source is periodic (like AC power), you can reduce the interference by opening the contact when the current waveform crosses zero. Opening the circuit farther from zero elevates the energy level and creates more interference.

How to Prevent or Mitigate Transient Interference from Electromechanical Switches

The most effective way to avoid this type of transient interference, is to use a device like an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 156 contactor to switch inductive AC loads. These devices feature “zero cross” switching.

LoadPower

Wiring Inductance

LoadInductance

Wiring Capacitance

VC

LoadAC

A1 A2

L1 T1

Bulletin 156Contactor



Putting Resistive-Capacitive (RC) networks or Voltage Dependant Resistors (Varistors) across contacts will mitigate transient interference. Make sure to select components rated to withstand the voltage, power and frequency of switching for your application.

A common method for mitigating transient interference is to put a diode in parallel with an inductive DC load or a suppressor in parallel with an inductive AC load. Again, make sure to select components rated to withstand the voltage, power and frequency of switching for your application. These methods are not totally effective, because they do not entirely eliminate arcing at the contacts.

LoadAC LoadAC

LoadDC

+

-

LoadAC LoadAC


Electromagnetic Interference 6-5

The following table contains examples which illustrate methods for mitigating transient interference.

Examples of Transient Interference MitigationExample 1:A contact output controls a DC control relay.

The relay coil requires a suppressor (blocking diode) because it is an inductive device controlled by a dry contact.

Example 2:An AC output controls a motor starter, contacts on the starter control a motor.The contacts require RC networks or Varistors.

The motor requires suppressors because it is an inductive device.

An inductive device controlled by a solid state switching device (like the starter coil in this example) typically does not require a suppressor.Example 3:An AC output controls an interposing relay, but the circuit can be opened by dry contacts. Relay contacts control a solenoid coil.The contacts require RC networks or Varistors.

The relay coil requires a suppressor because it is an inductive device controlled by dry contacts.

The solenoid coil also requires a suppressor because it is an inductive device controlled by dry contacts.

Example 4:A contact output controls a pilot light with a built in step-down transformer.The pilot light requires a suppressor because its transformer is an inductive device controlled by a dry contact.

Example 5:A contact output controls a relay, which controls a brake solenoid.

The contacts require RC networks or Varistors. Both the relay and the brake solenoid require suppressors because they are both inductive devices controlled by dry contacts.

digital contact output

1CR

V DC

digital DC output

solid-state

L1 L2

1MS

L1

switch

1MS1M

suppressorL2

suppressor

supp

ress

or

1MS

1MSL1

digital AC output

solid-state

L1 L2

1CR

switch

suppressor

1CR 1S

suppressor

digital contact output L1 L2

suppressor

pilot light with built-instep-down transformer

digital contact output

suppressor

1CR

115V AC 480V AC

1CR 1CR

suppressor

brake solenoid



Enclosure Lighting Fluorescent lamps are also sources of EMI. If you must use fluorescent lamps inside an enclosure, the following precautions may help guard against EMI problems from this source as shown in the figure below:

• install a shielding grid over the lamp• use shielded cable between the lamp and its switch• use a metal-encased switch• install a filter between the switch and the power line, or shield the

power-line cable

Bearing Current The application of pulse-width modulated (PWM) inverters has led to significant advantages in terms of the performance, size, and efficiency of variable speed motor controls. However, the high switching rates used to obtain these advantages can also contribute to motor bearing damage due to bearing currents and Electric Discharge Machining (EDM). Bearing damage on motors supplied by PWM inverters is more likely to occur in applications where the coupling between the motor and load is not electrically conductive (such as belted loads), when the motor is lightly loaded, or when the motor is in an environment with ionized air. Other factors, such as the type of grease and the type of bearings used may also affect the longevity of motor bearings. Motor manufacturers that design and manufacture motors for use with variable frequency drives can offer solutions to help mitigate these potential problems.

Filter

Shielding-grid over lamp

Shieldedcable

Metel-encased switch

Line-filter or shieldedpower line

AC power


Appendix A

Motor Cable Length Restrictions Tables

The distances listed in each table are valid only for specific cable constructions and may not be accurate for lesser cable designs, particularly if the length restriction is due to cable charging current (indicated in tables by shading). When choosing the proper cable, note the following definitions:

Unshielded Cable• Tray cable - fixed geometry without foil or braided shield but including an exterior cover

• Individual wires not routed in metallic conduitShielded Cable

• Individual conductors routed in metallic conduit

• Fixed geometry cables with foil or braided shield of at least 75% coverage

• Continuous weld or interlocked armored cables with no twist in the conductors (may have and optional foil shield)

Important: Certain shielded cable constructions may cause excessive cable charging currents and may interfere with proper application performance, particularly on smaller drive ratings. Shielded cables that do not maintain a fixed geometry, but rather twist the conductors and tightly wrap the bundle with a foil shield may cause unnecessary drive tripping. Unless specifically stated in the table, the distances listed ARE NOT applicable to this type of cable. Actual distances for this cable type may be considerably less.

Type A Motor• No phase paper or misplaced phase paper

• Lower quality insulation systems

• Corona inception voltages between 850 and 1000 voltsType B Motor

• Properly placed phase paper

• Medium quality insulation systems

• Corona inception voltages between 1000 and 1200 volts1488V Motor

• Meets NEMA MG 1-1998 section 31 standard

• Insulation can withstand voltage spikes of 3.1 times rated motor voltage due to inverter operation.

1329 R/L Motor• AC variable speed motors are “Control-Matched” for use with Allen-Bradley drives.

• Motor designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the Federal Energy Act of 1992.

• Optimized for variable speed operation and include premium inverter grade insulation systems, which meet or exceed NEMA MG1 (Part 31.40.4.2).


A-2 Motor Cable Length Restrictions Tables

In the following tables, a “●” in any of the latter columns will indicate that this drive rating can be used with an Allen-Bradley Terminator (1204-TFA1/1204-TFB2) and/or Reflected Wave Reduction Device with Common Mode Choke (1204-RWC-17) or without choke (1204-RWR2).

• For the Terminator, the maximum cable length is 182.9 meters (600 feet) for 400/480/600V drives (not 690V). The PWM frequency must be 2 kHz. The 1204-TFA1 can be used only on low HP (5 HP & below), while the 1204-TFB2 can be used from 2-800 HP.

• 1204 Reflected Wave Reduction Device (all motor insulation classes):

– 1204-RWR2-092 kHz: 182.9m (600 ft.) at 400/480V and 121.9m (400 ft.) at 600V. 4 kHz: 91.4m (300 ft.) at 400/480V and 61.0m (200 ft.) at 600V.

– 1204-RWC-172 kHz: 365.8m (1200 ft.) at 400/480/600V. 4 kHz: 243.8m (800 ft.) at 400/480V and 121.9m (400 ft.) at 600V.

For both devices, power dissipation in the damping resistor limits maximum cable length.

The 1321-RWR is a complete reflected wave reduction solution available for many of the PowerFlex drives. If available, a 1321-RWR catalog number will be indicated in the “Reactor/RWR” column. When not available, use the reactor and resistor information provided to build a solution.

Table Cross Reference

For Further Information on … see Publication …1321-RWR 1321-TD0011204-RWR2 1204-5.11204-RWC 1204-IN0011204-TFxx 1204-IN002

Drive Voltage Table Page Drive Voltage Table PagePowerFlex 4 400 A.A A-3 PowerFlex 700L with

PowerFlex 700S Control400 A.V A-17

480 A.B A-3 480 A.W A-17PowerFlex 4M 400 A.C A-4 600 A.X A-18

480 A.D A-4 690 A.Y A-18PowerFlex 40 400 A.E A-5 PowerFlex 700S 400 A.Z A-18

480 A.F A-5 480 A.AA A-20600 A.G A-5 600 A.AB A-21

PowerFlex 400 400 A.H A-6 690 A.AC A-22480 A.I A-7 PowerFlex 753

PowerFlex 755400 A.AD A-23

PowerFlex 70 (Standard/Enhanced)PowerFlex 700 (Standard/Vector)

400 A.J A-8 480 A.AE A-24480 A.K A-10 1336 PLUS II

1336 IMPACT380…480 A.AF A-26

600 A.L A-12 600 A.AG A-27PowerFlex 700 (Standard/Vector) 690 A.M A-12 1305 (No External Devices) 480 A.AH A-28PowerFlex 700H 400 A.N A-13 1305 (External Devices at Motor) 480 A.AI A-28

480 A.O A-14 160 480 A.AJ A-28600 A.P A-14 160 (Cable Charging Current) 240 & 480 A.AK A-29690 A.Q A-15

PowerFlex 700L withPowerFlex 700VC Control

400 A.R A-16480 A.S A-16600 A.T A-16690 A.U A-17


Motor Cable Length Restrictions Tables A-3

PowerFlex 4 Drives

Table A.A PowerFlex 4, 400V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Table A.B PowerFlex 4, 480V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Rating No Solution Reactor Only Reactor + Damping ResistorReactor/RWR(see page A-30) Resistor Available Options

kW kHz 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V Cat. No. Ohms Watts TFA1

TFB2

RWR2

RWC

0.4 2/4 7.6 (25)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

● ● ●

0.75 2/4 7.6 (25)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ●

1.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ● ●

2.2 2/4 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ● ● ●

3.7 2/4 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ● ● ●


Hp kHz 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V Cat. No. Ohms Watts TFA1

TFB2

RWR2

RWC

0.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

● ● ●

1 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ●

2 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ● ● ●

3 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

129.5 (425)

129.5 (425)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ● ● ●

5 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

182.9 (600)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ● ● ●



PowerFlex 4M Drives

Table A.C PowerFlex 4M, 400V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Table A.D PowerFlex 4M, 480V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)



TFB2

RWR2

RWC

0.4 2/4 7.6 (25)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

● ● ●

0.75 2/4 7.6 (25)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ●

1.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ● ●

2.2 2/4 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ● ● ●

3.7 2/4 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ● ● ●

5.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ●

7.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

11 2/4 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●



TFB2

RWR2

RWC

0.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

● ● ●

1 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ●

2 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ● ● ●

3 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

129.5 (425)

129.5 (425)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ● ● ●

5 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

182.9 (600)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ● ● ●

7.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ●

10 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

15 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●



PowerFlex 40 Drives

Table A.E PowerFlex 40, 400V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Table A.F PowerFlex 40, 480V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Table A.G PowerFlex 40, 600V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)



TFB2

RWR2

RWC

0.4 2/4 7.6 (25)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

● ● ●

0.75 2/4 7.6 (25)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ●

1.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ● ●

2.2 2/4 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ● ● ●

4 2/4 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ● ●

5.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ●

7.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

11 2/4 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●



TFB2

RWR2

RWC

0.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

● ● ●

1 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ●

2 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ● ● ●

3 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

129.5 (425)

129.5 (425)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ● ● ●

5 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ● ●

7.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ●

10 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

15 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●

Rating No Solution Reactor Only

Reactor + Damping Resistor

Reactor/RWR(see page A-30) Resistor Available Options

Hp kHz 1488V 1850V 1488V 1600V 1488V 1600V Cat. No. Ohms Watts TFA1

TFB2

RWR2

RWC

1 2/4 42.7 (140)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

● ● ●

2 2/4 42.7 (140)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ●

3 2/4 42.7 (140)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ● ●

5 2/4 42.7 (140)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ● ● ●

7.5 2/4 42.7 (140)

182.9 (600)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ●

10 2/4 42.7 (140)

182.9 (600)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

15 2/4 42.7 (140)

182.9 (600)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●



PowerFlex 400 Drives

Table A.H PowerFlex 400, 400V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)



TFB2

RWR2

RWC

2.2 2, 4 7.6 (25)

106.7 (350)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ● ● ●

4 2, 4 7.6 (25)

106.7 (350)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ● ●

5.5 2, 4 7.6 (25)

106.7 (350)

274.3 (900)

304.8 (1000)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ●

7.5 2, 4 7.6 (25)

106.7 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

11 2, 4 7.6 (25)

106.7 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

76.2 (250)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●

15 2, 4 7.6 (25)

106.7 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

76.2 (250)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP ●

18.5 2, 4 7.6 (25)

106.7 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

76.2 (250)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP ●

22 2, 4 7.6 (25)

106.7 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

76.2 (250)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP ●

30 2, 4 7.6 (25)

106.7 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

76.2 (250)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR55-DP ●

37 2, 4 12.2 (40)

106.7 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

76.2 (250)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

45 2, 4 12.2 (40)

106.7 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP ●

55 2, 4 12.2 (40)

106.7 (350)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP ●

75 2, 4 12.2 (40)

91.4 (300)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR160-DP ●

90 2, 4 18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR200-DP ●

110 2, 4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

213.4 (700)

274.3 (900)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR200-DP ●

132 2, 4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

274.3 (900)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR250-DP ●

160 2, 4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

274.3 (900)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR320-DP ●

200 2, 4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

167.6 (550)

274.3 (900)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB400-B 20 495 ●

250 2, 4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

167.6 (550)

274.3 (900)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B 20 495 ●



Table A.I PowerFlex 400, 480V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)



TFB2

RWR2

RWC

3 2, 4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ● ● ●

5 2, 4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

152.4 (500)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ● ●

7.5 2, 4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ●

10 2, 4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

15 2, 4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●

20 2, 4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP ●

25 2, 4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP ●

30 2, 4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP ●

40 2, 4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR55-DP ●

50 2, 4 12.2 (40)

18.3 (60)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

60 2, 4 12.2 (40)

18.3 (60)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP ●

75 2, 4 12.2 (40)

18.3 (60)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP ●

100 2, 4 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

137.2 (450)

167.6 (550)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR160-DP ●

125 2, 4 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

137.2 (450)

167.6 (550)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

76.2 (250)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR200-DP ●

150 2, 4 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

137.2 (450)

167.6 (550)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

76.2 (250)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR200-DP ●

200 2, 4 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

121.9 (400)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

243.8 (800)

61.0 (200)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR250-DP ●

250 2, 4 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

121.9 (400)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

61.0 (200)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR320-DP ●

300 2, 4 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

137.2 (450)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

121.9 (400)

152.4 (500)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB400-B 20 495 ●

350 2, 4 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

137.2 (450)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

121.9 (400)

152.4 (500)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B 20 495 ●



PowerFlex 70 & 700 Drives

Table A.J PowerFlex 70 (Standard/Enhanced) & 700 (Standard/Vector), 400V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Drive Frame Rating No Solution Reactor Only

Reactor + Damping Resistor or 1321-RWR


70 700


TFB2

RWR2

RWC

A 0 0.37 2 7.6 (25)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

● ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

● ●

0.75 2 7.6 (25)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

76.2 (250)

76.2 (250)

76.2 (250)

18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ●

1.5 2 7.6 (25)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ● ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

76.2 (250)

76.2 (250)

76.2 (250)

18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ●

B 2.2 2 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ● ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ●

4 2 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

182.9 (600)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR8-DP ●

C 5.5 2 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ●

1 7.5 2 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ●

D 11 2 7.6(25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP

2 15 2 7.6(25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP

D 18.5 2 7.6(25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP

D 3 22 2 7.6(25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP

E 30 2 7.6(25)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR55-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR55-DP

37 2 12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

4 12.2 (40)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP

4 45 2 12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

4 12.2 (40)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP



5 55 2 12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP ●

4 12.2 (40)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP

75 2 18.3 (60)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR130-DP ●

4 18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR130-DP

6 90 2 18.3 (60)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR160-DP ●

4 18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR160-DP

110 2 24.4 (80)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

76.2 (250)

198.1 (650)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR200-DP ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR200-DP

132 2 24.4 (80)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR250-DP ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR250-DP

7 160 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB320-B 50 225 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

274.3 (900)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB320-B 50 450

180 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB320-B 50 225 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

274.3 (900)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB320-B 50 450

8 200 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB400-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

228.6 (750)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB400-B(1) 20 990

240 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R400-B (1) 20 495 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

167.6 (550)

213.4 (700)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB400-B(1) 20 990

280 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

167.6 (550)

213.4 (700)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 990

300 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

213.4 (700)

259.1 (850)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

167.6 (550)

213.4 (700)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 990

350 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

213.4 (700)

259.1 (850)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

167.6 (550)

213.4 (700)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 990

9 400 2 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

198.1 (650)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(2) 20 735 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

137.2 (450)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

76.2 (250)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(2) 20 1470

10 500 2 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

198.1 (650)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R850-B(2) 20 735 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

137.2 (450)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

76.2 (250)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R850-B(2) 20 1470

(1) Requires two parallel cables.(2) Requires three parallel cables.




70 700


TFB2

RWR2

RWC



Table A.K PowerFlex 70 (Standard/Enhanced) & 700 (Standard/Vector), 480V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)




70 700

HP kHz 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V Cat. No. Ohms Watts TFA1

TFB2

RWR2

RWC

A 0 0.5 2 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

● ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

53.3 (175)

53.3 (175)

7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

● ●

1 2 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

76.2 (250)

76.2 (250)

7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ●

2 2 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ● ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

76.2 (250)

76.2 (250)

7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ●

B 3 2 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

129.5 (425)

129.5 (425)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ● ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

121.9 (400)

7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ●

5 2 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

182.9 (600)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ● ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

182.9 (600)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ●

C 7.5 2 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ●

1 10 2 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ●

D 15 2 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP

2 20 2 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP

25 2 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

274.3 (900)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP

3 30 2 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP

E 40 2 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR55-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

7.6(25)

12.2(40)

106.7 (350)

228.6 (750)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR55-DP

3 50 2 12.2 (40)

18.3(60)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

18.3(60)

106.7 (350)

228.6 (750)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP

4 60 2 12.2 (40)

18.3(60)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

228.6 (750)

76.2 (250)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP

5 75 2 12.2 (40)

18.3(60)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

76.2 (250)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP

100 2 12.2 (40)

24.4(80)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR130-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

61.0 (200)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR130-DP



6 125 2 12.2 (40)

24.4(80)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR160-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

61.0 (200)

106.7 (350)

243.8 (800)

274.3 (900)

1321-RWR160-DP

150 2 12.2 (40)

24.4(80)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

304.8 (1000)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR200-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

243.8 (800)

274.3 (900)

1321-RWR200-DP

200 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

304.8 (1000)

76.2 (250)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR250-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

213.4 (700)

274.3 (900)

1321-RWR250-DP

7 250 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

137.2 (450)

167.6 (550)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

198.1 (650)

259.1 (850)

76.2 (250)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB320-B 50 225 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

213.4 (700)

274.3 (900)

1321-3RB320-B 50 450

250 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

137.2 (450)

167.6 (550)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

198.1 (650)

259.1 (850)

76.2 (250)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB320-B 50 225 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

213.4 (700)

274.3 (900)

1321-3RB320-B 50 450

8 300 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

137.2 (450)

198.1 (650)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB400-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

213.4 (700)

274.3 (900)

1321-3RB400-B(1) 20 990

350 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

137.2 (450)

198.1 (650)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R400-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

167.6 (550)

259.1 (850)

1321-3RB400-B(1) 20 990

400 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

167.6 (550)

259.1 (850)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 990

450 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

167.6 (550)

259.1 (850)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 990

500 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

152.4 (500)

61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

167.6 (550)

243.8 (800)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 990

9 600 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

106.7 (350)

137.2 (450)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(2) 20 735 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

1321-3R750-B(2) 20 1470

10 700 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

106.7 (350)

137.2 (450)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R850-B(2) 20 735 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

1321-3R850-B(2) 20 1470





70 700

HP kHz 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V Cat. No. Ohms Watts TFA1

TFB2

RWR2

RWC



Table A.L PowerFlex 70 (Standard/Enhanced) & 700 (Standard/Vector), 600V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Table A.M PowerFlex 700 (Standard/Vector), 690V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Drive Frame Rating No Solution Reactor Only 1321-RWR

RWR(see page A-30) Available Options

70 700

HP kHz 1488V 1850V 1488V 1850V 1488V 1850V Cat. No. TFA1

TFB2

RWR2

RWC

A 0 1 2 42.7 (140) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400) ● ● ●

4 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400) ● ●

2 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) ● ● ●

4 30.5 (100) 137.2 (450) 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) ● ●

B 3 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) ● ● ●

4 30.5 (100) 137.2 (450) 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) ● ●

5 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) 243.8 (800) 243.8 (800) 243.8 (800) 1321-RWR8-EP ● ● ●

4 30.5 (100) 137.2 (450) 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 243.8 (800) 243.8 (800) 1321-RWR8-EP ● ●

C 7.5 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) 304.8 (1000) 304.8 (1000) 304.8 (1000) 1321-RWR12-EP ●

4 30.5 (100) 137.2 (450) 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 304.8 (1000) 304.8 (1000) 1321-RWR12-EP ●

1 10 2 42.7 (140) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR12-EP ●

4 30.5 (100) 137.2 (450) 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR12-EP ●

D 15 2 42.7 (140) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR18-EP4 30.5 (100) 137.2 (450) 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR18-EP

2 20 2 42.7 (140) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR25-EP ●

4 30.5 (100) 137.2 (450) 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR25-EP25 2 42.7 (140) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR35-EP ●

4 30.5 (100) 137.2 (450) 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR35-EP3 30 2 42.7 (140) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR35-EP ●

4 30.5 (100) 137.2 (450) 36.6 (120) 152.4 (500) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR35-EPE 40 2 42.7 (140) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR45-EP ●

4 30.5 (100) 137.2 (450) 36.6 (120) 152.4 (500) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR45-EP50 2 42.7 (140) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR55-EP ●

4 36.6 (120) 137.2 (450) 45.7 (150) 152.4 (500) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR55-EP4 60 2 42.7 (140) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR80-EP ●

4 36.6 (120) 137.2 (450) 45.7 (150) 152.4 (500) 274.3 (900) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR80-EP5 75 2 42.7 (140) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR80-EP ●

4 36.6 (120) 137.2 (450) 45.7 (150) 152.4 (500) 274.3 (900) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR80-EP100 2 42.7 (140) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR100-EP ●

4 42.7 (140) 137.2 (450) 45.7 (150) 152.4 (500) 274.3 (900) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR100-EP6 125 2 42.7 (140) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR130-EP ●

4 42.7 (140) 137.2 (450) 45.7 (150) 152.4 (500) 228.6 (750) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR130-EP150 2 42.7 (140) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR160-EP ●

4 42.7 (140) 137.2 (450) 45.7 (150) 152.4 (500) 198.1 (650) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR160-EP

Drive No Solution Reactor Only Reactor + Damping ResistorReactor(see page A-30) Resistor Available Options

Frame kW kHz 1850V 2000V 1850V 2000V 1850V 2000V Cat. No. Ohms Watts TFA1

TFB2

RWR2

RWC

4 45 2 30.5 (100) 106.9 (350) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R80-C 50 3454 24.4 (80) 76.2 (250) 36.6 (120) 121.9 (400) 213.4 (700) 274.3 (900) 1321-3R80-C 50 690

55 2 30.5 (100) 106.9 (350) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R80-C 50 3454 24.4 (80) 76.2 (250) 36.6 (120) 106.9 (350) 213.4 (700) 274.3 (900) 1321-3R80-C 50 690

5 75 2 30.5 (100) 106.9 (350) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R100-C 50 3454 30.5 (100) 76.2 (250) 36.6 (120) 106.9 (350) 213.4 (700) 274.3 (900) 1321-3R100-C 50 690

90 2 30.5 (100) 106.9 (350) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R130-C 50 3754 30.5 (100) 76.2 (250) 36.6 (120) 106.9 (350) 182.9 (600) 274.3 (900) 1321-3R130-C 50 750

6 110 2 30.5 (100) 106.9 (350) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R160-C 50 3754 30.5 (100) 76.2 (250) 36.6 (120) 99.1 (325) 152.4 (500) 274.3 (900) 1321-3R160-C 50 750

132 2 30.5 (100) 106.9 (350) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R200-C 50 3754 30.5 (100) 76.2 (250) 36.6 (120) 83.8 (275) 152.4 (500) 274.3 (900) 1321-3R200-C 50 750



PowerFlex 700H

Table A.N PowerFlex 700H, 400V Shielded/Unshielded Cable – Meters (Feet)

Drive No Solution Reactor OnlyReactor + Damping Resistor or 1321-RWR


Frame kW kHz 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V Cat. No. Ohms Watts TFA1

TFB2

RWR2

RWC

9 132 2 24.4 (80)

48.8 (160)

76.2 (250)

137.2 (450)

24.4 (80)

48.8 (160)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR320-DP ●

160 2 24.4 (80)

48.8 (160)

76.2 (250)

137.2 (450)

24.4 (80)

48.8 (160)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR320-DP ●

10 200 2 24.4 (80)

48.8 (160)

76.2 (250)

121.9 (400)

24.4 (80)

48.8 (160)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B 20 495(3)

(3) Resistor specification is based on two cables per phase.

●

250 2 24.4 (80)

48.8 (160)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

24.4 (80)

48.8 (160)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B 20 495(3) ●

11 315 2 18.3 (60)

42.7 (140)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

18.3 (60)

42.7 (140)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B 20 495(3) ●

355 2 18.3 (60)

42.7 (140)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

18.3 (60)

42.7 (140)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B 20 495(3) ●

400 2 18.3 (60)

42.7 (140)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

18.3 (60)

42.7 (140)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B 20 735(4)

(4) Resistor specification is based on three cables per phase.

●

12 (1)

(1) Frame 12 drives have dual inverters and require two output reactors. The resistor ratings are per phase values for each reactor.

450 2 18.3 (60)

42.7 (140)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

18.3 (60)

42.7 (140)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x 1321-3RB400-B

40 375(4) ●

500 2 12.2 (40)

42.7 (140)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

18.3 (60)

42.7 (140)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x 1321-3R500-B

40 375(4) ●

560 2 12.2 (40)

42.7 (140)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

18.3 (60)

42.7 (140)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R500-B

20 525(5)

(5) Resistor specification is based on four cables per phase.

13 630(2)

(2) Some Frame 13 drives require two output reactors to match drive amp rating. The resistor ratings are per phase values for each reactor.

2 12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

198.1 (650)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R600-B

20 525(5)

710(2) 2 12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

198.1 (650)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R750-B

20 525(5)

800(2) 2 12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

198.1 (650)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R750-B

20 525(5)



Table A.O PowerFlex 700H, 480V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Table A.P PowerFlex 700H, 600V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)


Reactor/RWR(see page A-30) Resistor

Available Options

Frame HP kHz 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V 1000V 1200V 1488V 1600V Cat. No. Ohms Watts TFA1

TFB2

RWR2

RWC

9 200 2 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

42.7 (140)

76.2 (250)

12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

106.9 (350)

152.4 (500)

61.0 (200)

167.6 (550)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR320-DP ●

250 2 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

42.7 (140)

76.2 (250)

12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR320-DP ●

10 300 2 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

42.7 (140)

76.2 (250)

12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

76.2 (250)

91.4 (300)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB400-B 20 495(3)


●

350 2 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

42.7 (140)

76.2 (250)

12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

76.2 (250)

91.4 (300)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B 20 495(3) ●

450 2 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

36.6 (120)

61.0 (200)

12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

61.0 (200)

91.4 (300)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B 20 495(3) ●

11 500 2 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

36.6 (120)

61.0 (200)

12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

61.0 (200)

91.4 (300)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B 20 495(3) ●

600 2 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

36.6 (120)

61.0 (200)

12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

91.4 (300)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B 20 735(4)


●

12 (1)


700 2 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

36.6 (120)

61.0 (200)

12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

91.4 (300)

45.7 (150)

106.9 (350)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3RB400-B

40 375(4) ●

800 2 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

36.6 (120)

61.0 (200)

12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

91.4 (300)

45.7 (150)

106.9 (350)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R500-B

40 375(4) ●

900 2 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

36.6 (120)

61.0 (200)

12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

91.4 (300)

45.7 (150)

106.9 (350)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R500-B

20 525(5)


13 1000(2)


2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R600-B

20 525(5)

1200(2) 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R750-B

20 525(5)

1250(2) 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R750-B

20 525(5)



Frame HP kHz 1488V 1850V 1488V 1850V 1488V 1850V Cat. No. Ohms Watts TFA1

TFB2

RWR2

RWC

9 150 2 30.5 (100) 54.9 (180) 36.6 (120) 152.4 (500) 213.4 (700) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR200-EP ●

200 2 30.5 (100) 54.9 (180) 36.6 (120) 121.9 (400) 182.9 (600) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR250-EP ●

10 250 2 30.5 (100) 54.9 (180) 36.6 (120) 91.4 (300) 182.9 (600) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3RB250-B 50 315 ●

350 2 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 30.5 (100) 76.2 (250) 167.6 (550) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3RB320-B 20 585(3)


●

400 2 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 30.5 (100) 61.0 (200) 167.6 (550) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3RB400-B 20 585(3) ●

450 2 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 30.5 (100) 61.0 (200) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R500-B 20 585(3) ●

11 500 2 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R500-B 20 585(3) ●

600 2 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R600-B 20 585(3) ●

12 (1)


700 2 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 2 x 1321-3RB320-B 40 300(3) ●

800 2 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 137.2 (450) 365.8 (1200) 2 x 1321-3RB400-C 40 480(4)


●

900 2 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 121.9 (400) 365.8 (1200) 2 x 1321-3R400-B 40 480(4)

13 1000 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R1000-C 20 960(4)

1100 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R1000-B 10 1440(5)


1300(2)


2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 2 x 1321-3R600-B 20 720(5)



Table A.Q PowerFlex 700H, 690V Shielded/Unshielded Cable – Meters (Feet)



TFB2

RWR2

RWC

9 160 2 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3RB250-C 50 480200 2 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3RB250-C 50 480

10 250 2 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3RB320-C 50 480315 2 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 213.4 (700) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3RB400-C 20 945(3)


355 2 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 213.4 (700) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3R500-C 20 945(3)

400 2 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 213.4 (700) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3R500-C 20 945(3)

11 450 2 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 213.4 (700) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3R600-C 20 945(3)

500 2 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 213.4 (700) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3R600-C 20 945(3)

560 2 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 182.9 (600) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3R750-C 20 945(3)

12 (1)


630 2 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 182.9 (600) 304.8 (1000) 2 x1321-3RB400-C 40 480(3)

710 2 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 182.9 (600) 304.8 (1000) 2 x1321-3R500-C 40 645(4)


800 2 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 15.2 (50) 30.5 (100) 182.9 (600) 304.8 (1000) 2 x1321-3R500-C 40 645(4)

13 900(2)


2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 61.0 (200) 91.4 (300) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 2 x1321-3R600-C 40 645(4)

1000(2) 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 48.8 (160) 91.4 (300) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 2 x1321-3R600-C 20 840(5)


1100(2) 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 48.8 (160) 91.4 (300) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 2 x1321-3R750-C 20 840(5)



PowerFlex 700L

Table A.R PowerFlex 700L w/700VC Control, 400V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Table A.S PowerFlex 700L w/700VC Control, 480V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Table A.T PowerFlex 700L w/700VC Control, 600V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Drive No Solution Reactor Only Reactor + Damping Resistor Reactor(see page A-30) Resistor Available Options


TFB2

RWR2

RWC

2 200 2 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

30.5 (100)

76.2 (250)

228.6 (750)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R400-B(1)

(1) Requires two parallel cables.

20 495 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

152.4 (500)

18.3 (60)

76.2 (250)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

76.2 (250)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R400-B(1) 20 990

3A 370 2 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

30.5 (100)

76.2 (250)

228.6 (750)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(1) 20 735 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

152.4 (500)

18.3 (60)

76.2 (250)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

76.2 (250)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(1) 20 1470

3B 715 2 24.4 (80)

76.2 (250)

129.5 (425)

160.0 (525)

91.4 (80)

76.2 (250)

152.4 (500)

228.6 (750)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x 1321-3R600-B(2)

(2) Requires four parallel cables.

20 525

4 18.3 (60)

76.2 (250)

121.9 (400)

152.4 (500)

18.3 (60)

76.2 (250)

121.9 (400)

152.4 (500)

76.2 (250)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

2 x 1321-3R600-B(2)

20 1050



TFB2

RWR2

RWC

2 300 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

36.6 (120)

99.1 (325)

137.2 (450)

61.0 (200)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R400-B(1)


20 495 ●

4 7.6 (25)

24.4 (80)

83.8 (275)

114.3 (375)

7.6 (25)

24.4 (80)

83.8 (275)

114.3 (375)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

1321-3R400-B(1) 20 990

3A 600 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

36.6 (120)

99.1 (325)

137.2 (450)

61.0 (200)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(1) 20 735 ●

4 7.6 (25)

24.4 (80)

83.8 (275)

114.3 (375)

7.6 (25)

24.4 (80)

83.8 (275)

114.3 (375)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

1321-3R750-B(1) 20 1470

3B 1150 2 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

83.8 (275)

114.3 (375)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

61.0 (200)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

2 x 1321-3R600-B(2)


20 525

4 7.6 (25)

24.4 (80)

83.8 (275)

114.3 (375)

7.6 (25)

24.4 (80)

83.8 (275)

114.3 (375)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

2 x 1321-3R600-B(2)

20 1050

Drive No Solution Reactor OnlyReactor + Damping Resistor

Reactor(see page A-30) Resistor Available Options


TFB2

RWR2

RWC

3A 465 2 24.4 (80)

106.7 (350)

24.4 (80)

365.8 (350)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B(1)


20 585 ●

4 18.3 (60)

61.0 (200)

18.3 (60)

61.0 (200)

76.2 (250)

190.5 (625)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 1170

3B 870 2 18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

1321-3R850-B(2)

(2) Requires three parallel cables.

20 960

4 18.3 (60)

61.0 (200)

18.3 (60)

61.0 (200)

53.3 (175)

137.2 (450)

1321-3R850-B(2) 20 1920

3B 1275 2 18.3 (60)

83.8 (275)

18.3 (60)

83.8 (275)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

2 x 1321-3R600-B(3)


20 720



Table A.U PowerFlex 700L w/700VC Control, 690V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Table A.V PowerFlex 700L w/700S Control, 400V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Table A.W PowerFlex 700L w/700S Control, 480V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)




TFB2

RWR2

RWC

3A 355 2 24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

228.6 (750)

304.8 (1000)

1321-3R500-C(1)


20 960 ●

4 24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

121.9 (400)

1321-3R500-C(1) 20 1920

3B 657 2 24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

182.9 (600)

228.6(750)

1321-3R850-C(2)


20 1290

4 24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

121.9 (400)

1321-3R850-C(2) 20 2580

3B 980 2 24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

182.9 (600)

228.6(750)

2 x 1321-3R600-C(3)


20 840



TFB2

RWR2

RWC

2 200 2 18.3 (60)

68.6 (225)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

68.6 (225)

274.3 (900)

335.3 (1100)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R400-B(1)


20 495 ●

4 18.3 (60)

68.6 (225)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

68.6 (225)

274.3 (900)

335.3 (1100)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R400-B(1) 20 990

3A 370 2 18.3 (60)

68.6 (225)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

68.6 (225)

274.3 (900)

335.3 (1100)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(1) 20 735 ●

4 18.3 (60)

68.6 (225)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

68.6 (225)

274.3 (900)

335.3 (1100)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(1) 20 1470

3B 715 2 12.2 (40)

68.6 (225)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

68.6 (225)

274.3 (900)

335.3 (1100)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x 1321-3R600-B(2)


20 525

4 12.2 (40)

68.6 (225)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

68.6 (225)

274.3 (900)

335.3 (1100)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x 1321-3R600-B(2)

20 1050



TFB2

RWR2

RWC

2 300 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R400-B(1)


20 495 ●

4 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R400-B(1) 20 990

3A 600 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(1) 20 735 ●

4 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(1) 20 1470

3B 1150 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

2 x 1321-3R600-B(2)


20 525

4 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

2 x 1321-3R600-B(2)

20 1050



Table A.X PowerFlex 700L w/700S Control, 600V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Table A.Y PowerFlex 700L w/700S Control, 690V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

PowerFlex 700S

Table A.Z PowerFlex 700S, 400V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)




TFB2

RWR2

RWC

3A 465 2 18.3 (60)

76.2 (250)

18.3 (60)

76.2 (250)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

1321-3R500-B(1)


20 585 ●

4 18.3 (60)

76.2 (250)

18.3 (60)

76.2 (250)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 1170

3B 870 2 18.3 (60)

61.0 (200)

18.3 (60)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

228.6 (750)

1321-3R850-B(2)


20 960

4 18.3 (60)

61.0 (200)

18.3 (60)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

228.6 (750)

1321-3R850-B(2) 20 1920

3B 1275 2 12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

228.6 (750)

2 x 1321-3R600-B(3)


20 720




TFB2

RWR2

RWC

3A 355 2 24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

228.6 (750)

304.8 (1000)

1321-3R500-C(1)


20 960 ●

4 24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

182.9 (600)

228.6(750)

1321-3R500-C(1) 20 1920

3B 657 2 24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

182.9 (600)

228.6(750)

1321-3R850-C(2)


20 1290

4 24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

182.9 (600)

228.6(750)

1321-3R850-C(2) 20 2580

3B 980 2 24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

24.4 (80)

45.7 (150)

182.9 (600)

228.6(750)

2 x 1321-3R600-C(3)


20 840




TFB2

RWR2

RWC

1 0.75 2/4 7.6 (25)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ●

1.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

106.9 (350)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ● ● ●

2.2 2/4 7.6 (25)

106.9 (350)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ● ● ●

4 2/4 7.6 (25)

106.9 (350)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ●

5.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

106.9 (350)

274.3 (900)

304.8 (1000)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ●

7.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

106.9 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

11 2/4 7.6 (25)

106.9 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●



2 15 2/4 7.6 (25)

106.9 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●

18.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

106.9 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP ●

3 22 2/4 7.6 (25)

106.9 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP ●

30 2/4 7.6 (25)

106.9 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR55-DP ●

37 2/4 12.2 (40)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

76.2 (250)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

4 45 2/4 12.2 (40)

106.9 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

76.2 (250)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

5 55 2/4 12.2 (40)

106.9 (350)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

61.0 (200)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP ●

75 2/4 18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

45.7 (150)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR130-DP ●

6 90 2/4 18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

45.7 (150)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR160-DP ●

110 2/4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

213.4 (700)

274.3 (900)

45.7 (150)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR200-DP ●

132 2/4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

243.8 (800)

45.7 (150)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR250-DP ●

9 132 2 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

243.8 (800)

45.7 (150)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR320-DP ●

160 2 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR320-DP ●

10 200 2 24.4 (80)

76.2 (250)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B 20 495(3) ●

250 2 24.4 (80)

76.2 (250)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

76.2 (250)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

335.3 (1100)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B 20 495(3) ●

11 315 2 18.3 (60)

68.6 (225)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

68.6 (225)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

335.3 (1100)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B 20 495(3) ●

355 2 18.3 (60)

68.6 (225)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

68.6 (225)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B 20 495(3) ●

400 2 18.3 (60)

68.6 (225)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

68.6 (225)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B 20 735(4) ●

12 (1) 450 2 18.3 (60)

68.6 (225)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

68.6 (225)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3RB400-B

40 375(4) ●

500 2 12.2 (40)

68.6 (225)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

68.6 (225)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

198.1 (650)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R500-B

40 375(4) ●

560 2 12.2 (40)

68.6 (225)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

68.6 (225)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

198.1 (650)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R500-B

20 525(5)

13 630(2) 2 12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

198.1 (650)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R600-B

20 525(5)

710(2) 2 12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

198.1 (650)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R750-B

20 525(5)

800(2) 2 12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

99.1 (325)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

198.1 (650)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R750-B

20 525(5)

(1) Frame 12 drives have dual inverters and require two output reactors. The resistor ratings are per phase values for each reactor.(2) Some Frame 13 drives require two output reactors to match drive amp rating. The resistor ratings are per phase values for each reactor.(3) Resistor specification is based on two cables per phase.(4) Resistor specification is based on three cables per phase.(5) Resistor specification is based on four cables per phase.




TFB2

RWR2

RWC



Table A.AA PowerFlex 700S, 480V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)




TFB2

RWR2

RWC

1 1 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

152.4 (500)

● ● ●

2 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

83.8 (275)

83.8 (275)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ● ● ●

3 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

106.9 (350)

152.4 (500)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

● ● ● ●

5 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

106.9 (350)

152.4 (500)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

152.4 (500)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

243.8 (800)

1321-RWR8-DP ● ● ● ●

7.5 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

106.9 (350)

152.4 (500)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR12-DP ● ●

10 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

106.9 (350)

152.4 (500)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

15 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

106.9 (350)

152.4 (500)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●

2 20 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

106.9 (350)

152.4 (500)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●

25 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

106.9 (350)

152.4 (500)

7.6 (25)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP ●

3 30 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

106.9 (350)

152.4 (500)

7.6 (25)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP ●

40 2/4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

106.9 (350)

152.4 (500)

7.6 (25)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR55-DP ●

50 2/4 12.2 (40)

18.3 (60)

106.9 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

4 60 2/4 12.2 (40)

18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

5 75 2/4 12.2 (40)

18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP ●

100 2/4 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

137.2 (450)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR130-DP ●

6 125 2/4 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

137.2 (450)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

76.2 (250)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR160-DP ●

150 2/4 12.2 (40)

24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

137.2 (450)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

304.8 (1000)

76.2 (250)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR200-DP ●

200 2/4 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

137.2 (450)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

304.8 (1000)

61.0 (200)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR250-DP ●

9 200 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

152.4 (500)

228.6 (750)

61.0 (200)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR320-DP ●

250 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR320-DP ●

10 300 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB400-B 20 495(3)


●

350 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B 20 495(3) ●

450 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B 20 495(3) ●

11 500 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B 20 495(3) ●

600 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B 20 735(4)


●

12 (1)


700 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

2 x 1321-3RB400-B

40 375(4) ●

800 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

2 x 1321-3R500-B

40 375(4) ●

900 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

2 x 1321-3R500-B

20 525(5)


13 1000(2)


2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R600-B

20 525(5)

1200(2)

2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R750-B

20 525(5)

1250(2)

2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

2 x1321-3R750-B

20 525(5)



Table A.AB PowerFlex 700S, 600V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)




TFB2

RWR2

RWC

1 1 2/4 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400) ● ● ●

2 2/4 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) ● ● ● ●

3 2/4 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) ● ● ● ●

5 2/4 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 243.8 (800) 243.8 (800) 243.8 (800) 1321-RWR8-EP ● ● ● ●

7.5 2/4 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 304.8 (1000) 304.8 (1000) 304.8 (1000) 1321-RWR8-EP ● ●

10 2/4 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR12-EP ● ●

15 2/4 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR18-EP ●

2 20 2/4 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR25-EP ●

25 2/4 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR25-EP ●

3 30 2/4 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR35-EP ●

40 2/4 30.5 (100) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR45-EP ●

50 2/4 36.6 (120) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR55-EP ●

4 60 2/4 36.6 (120) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR80-EP ●

5 75 2/4 36.6 (120) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR80-EP ●

100 2/4 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR100-EP ●

6 125 2/4 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR130-EP ●

150 2/4 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR160-EP ●

9 150 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR200-EP ●

200 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-RWR250-EP ●

10 250 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3RB250-B 50 315 ●

350 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3RB350-B 20 585(3)


●

400 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3RB400-B 20 585(3) ●

450 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R500-B 20 585(3) ●

11 500 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R500-B 20 585(3) ●

600 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R600-B 20 585(3) ●

12 (1)


700 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 2 X 1321-3RB320-B 40 300(3) ●

800 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 2 X 1321-3RB400-C 40 480(4)


●

900 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 2 X 1321-3R400-B 40 480(4)

13 1000 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R1000-C 20 960(4)

1100 2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R1000-B 10 1440(5)


1300(2)


2 42.7 (140) 152.4 (500) 61.0 (200) 304.8 (1000) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 2 X 1321-3R600-B 20 720(5)



Table A.AC PowerFlex 700S, 690V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)



TFB2

RWR2

RWC

5 45 2/4 30.5 (100) 76.2 (250) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R80-C 50 345/69055 2/4 30.5 (100) 76.2 (250) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R80-C 50 345/69075 2/4 30.5 (100) 76.2 (250) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R100-C 50 345/69090 2/4 30.5 (100) 76.2 (250) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R130-C 50 375/750

6 110 2/4 30.5 (100) 76.2 (250) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R160-C 50 375/750132 2/4 30.5 (100) 76.2 (250) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 365.8 (1200) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R200-C 50 375/750

9 160 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 274.3 (900) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3RB250-C 50 480200 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 274.3 (900) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3RB250-C 50 480

10 250 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 76.2 (250) 121.9 (400) 274.3 (900) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3RB320-C 50 480315 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 76.2 (250) 121.9 (400) 274.3 (900) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3RB400-C 20 945(3)


355 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 76.2 (250) 121.9 (400) 274.3 (900) 365.8 (1200) 1321-3R500-C 20 945(3)

400 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 76.2 (250) 121.9 (400) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3R500-C 20 945(3)

11 450 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 76.2 (250) 121.9 (400) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3R600-C 20 945(3)

500 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 76.2 (250) 121.9 (400) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3R600-C 20 945(3)

560 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 61.0 (200) 91.4 (300) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 1321-3R750-C 20 945(3)

12 (1)


630 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 61.0 (200) 91.4 (300) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 2 X 1321-3RB400-C 40 480(3)

710 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 61.0 (200) 91.4 (300) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 2 X 1321-3R500-C 40 645(4)


800 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 61.0 (200) 91.4 (300) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 2 X 1321-3R500-C 40 645(4)

13 900(2)


2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 61.0 (200) 91.4 (300) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 2 X 1321-3R600-C 40 645(4)

1000(2) 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 48.8 (160) 91.4 (300) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 2 X 1321-3R600-C 20 840(5)


1100(2) 2 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 48.8 (160) 91.4 (300) 243.8 (800) 304.8 (1000) 2 X 1321-3R750-C 20 840(5)



PowerFlex 753 & 755 Drives

Table A.AD PowerFlex 753 & 755, 400V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

Drive Rating No Solution Reactor OnlyReactor + Damping Resistor or 1321-RWR



TFB2

RWR2

RWC

2 7.5 2 7.6 (25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ●

11 2 7.6(25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP

3 15 2 7.6(25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP

18.5 2 7.6(25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP

22 2 7.6(25)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP

4 30 2 7.6(25)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR55-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR55-DP

37 2 12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

4 12.2 (40)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP

5 45 2 12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

4 12.2 (40)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP

55 2 12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP ●

4 12.2 (40)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP

6 75 2 18.3 (60)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR130-DP ●

4 18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR130-DP

90 2 18.3 (60)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR160-DP ●

4 18.3 (60)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR160-DP

110 2 24.4 (80)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

76.2 (250)

198.1 (650)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR200-DP ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR200-DP

7 132 2 24.4 (80)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR250-DP ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR250-DP

160 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB320-B 50 225 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

274.3 (900)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB320-B 50 450

200 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB400-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

228.6 (750)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB400-B(1) 20 990



Table A.AE PowerFlex 753 & 755, 480V Shielded/Unshielded Cable - Meters (Feet)

7(cont.)

250 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

213.4 (700)

304.8 (1000)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

167.6 (550)

213.4 (700)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 990 ●

315 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

213.4 (700)

259.1 (850)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

167.6 (550)

213.4 (700)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 990 ●

8 250 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

213.4 (700)

304.8(1000)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4(500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

167.6 (550)

213.4 (700)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 990 ●

315 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

213.4 (700)

259.1 (850)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

167.6 (550)

213.4 (700)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 990 ●

355 2 24.4 (80)

121.9 (400)

213.4 (700)

259.1 (850)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

228.6 (750)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B (1) 20 495 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

167.6 (550)

213.4 (700)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(1) 20 990 ●

400 2 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

198.1 (650)

274.3 (900)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R850-B(2) 20 735 ●

4 24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

137.2 (450)

167.6 (550)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

182.9 (600)

76.2 (250)

137.2 (450)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R850-B(2) 20 1470 ●





TFB2

RWR2

RWC

2 10 2 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ● ●

4 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR18-DP ●

15 2 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR25-DP

3 20 2 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

91.4 (300)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP

25 2 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

274.3 (900)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR35-DP

30 2 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

12.2(40)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

152.4 (500)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR45-DP

4 40 2 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

7.6(25)

76.2 (250)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR55-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

7.6(25)

12.2(40)

106.7 (350)

228.6 (750)

121.9 (400)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR55-DP

50 2 12.2 (40)

18.3(60)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

152.4 (500)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

18.3(60)

106.7 (350)

228.6 (750)

91.4 (300)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP




TFB2

RWR2

RWC



5 60 2 12.2 (40)

18.3(60)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

228.6 (750)

76.2 (250)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR80-DP

75 2 12.2 (40)

18.3(60)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

12.2(40)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

76.2 (250)

182.9 (600)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR100-DP

6 100 2 12.2 (40)

24.4(80)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

137.2 (450)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR130-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

61.0 (200)

137.2 (450)

304.8 (1000)

304.8 (1000)

1321-RWR130-DP

125 2 12.2 (40)

24.4(80)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

121.9 (400)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR160-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

18.3(60)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

61.0 (200)

106.7 (350)

243.8 (800)

274.3 (900)

1321-RWR160-DP

150 2 12.2 (40)

24.4(80)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

304.8 (1000)

91.4 (300)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR200-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

152.4 (500)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

243.8 (800)

274.3 (900)

1321-RWR200-DP

7 200 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

304.8 (1000)

76.2 (250)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-RWR250-DP ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

36.6 (120)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

213.4 (700)

274.3 (900)

1321-RWR250-DP

250 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

137.2 (450)

167.6 (550)

12.2 (40)

61.0 (200)

198.1 (650)

259.1 (850)

76.2 (250)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB320-B 50 225 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

213.4 (700)

274.3 (900)

1321-3RB320-B 50 450

300 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

137.2 (450)

198.1 (650)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3RB400-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

213.4 (700)

274.3 (900)

1321-3RB400-B(1) 20 990

350 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

137.2 (450)

198.1 (650)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R400-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

167.6 (550)

259.1 (850)

1321-3RB400-B(1) 20 990

400 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 7.6(25)

24.4(80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

167.6 (550)

259.1 (850)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 990

8 350 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

137.2 (450)

198.1 (650)

61.0 (200)

243.8 (800)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 7.6 (25)

24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

167.6 (550)

259.1 (800)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 990 ●

400 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 7.6 (25)

24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

167.6 (550)

259.1 (850)

1321-3R500-B(1) 20 990 ●

450 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

137.2 (450)

182.9 (600)

61.0 (200)

213.4 (700)

365.8 (1200)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 7.6 (25)

24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

167.6 (550)

259.1 (850)

1321-3R600-B(1) 20 990 ●

500 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

106.7 (350)

152.4 (500)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

121.9 (400)

152.4 (500)

61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

304.8 (1000)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(1) 20 495 ●

4 7.6 (25)

24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

76.2 (250)

167.6 (550)

243.8 (800)

1321-3R750-B(1) 20 990 ●

600 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

106.7 (350)

137.2 (450)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R750-B(2) 20 735 ●

4 7.6 (25)

24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

1321-3R750-B(2) 20 1470 ●

650 2 12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

45.7 (150)

106.7 (350)

137.2 (450)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

274.3 (900)

365.8 (1200)

1321-3R850-B(2) 20 735 ●

4 7.6 (25)

24.4 (80)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

121.9 (400)

45.7 (150)

61.0 (200)

152.4 (500)

213.4 (700)

1321-3R850-B(2) 20 1470 ●





TFB2

RWR2

RWC



1336 PLUS II and IMPACT To increase the distance between the drive and the motor, some device (RWR or Terminator) needs to be added to the system. Shaded distances are restricted by cable capacitance charging current.

Table A.AF 1336 PLUS II/IMPACT Drive, 380-480V - Meters (Feet)

Drive Frame

Drive kW (HP)

Motor kW (HP)

No External Devices(1)

(1) Values shown are for nominal input voltage, drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz or as shown and surrounding air temperature at the motor of 40o C. Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz. Multiply values by 0.85 for high line conditions. For input voltages of 380, 400 or 415V AC, multiply the table values by 1.25, 1.20 or 1.15, respectively.

w/1204-TFB2 Term.(1) w/1204-TFA1 Terminator(1) Reactor at Drive (1)(4)

(4) A 3% reactor reduces motor and cable stress but may cause a degradation of motor waveform quality. Reactors must have a turn-turn insulation rating of 2100 Volts or higher.

Motor Motor Motor MotorA B 1329 1329R/L (1600V) A or B 1329 A B 1329 A B or 1329

Any Cable

Any Cable

Any Cable

AnyCable(2)

(2) These distance restrictions are due to charging of cable capacitance and may vary from application to application.

Cable Type Any Cable

Cable Type Cable Type Any Cable

Any Cable

AnyCableShld(3)

(3) Includes wire in conduit.

Unshld Shld.(3) Unshld Shld.(3) UnshldA1 0.37 (0.5) 0.37 (0.5) 12.2

(40)33.5 (110)

91.4(300)

91.4(300)

Use 1204-TFA1

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

91.4(300)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

0.75 (1) 0.75 (1) 12.2 (40)

33.5 (110)

91.4(300)

91.4(300)

30.5 (100)

30.5 (100)

30.5 (100)

30.5 (100)

91.4(300)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

0.37 (0.5) 12.2 (40)

33.5 (110)

91.4(300)

91.4(300)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

91.4(300)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

1.2 (1.5) 1.2 (1.5) 12.2 (40)

33.5 (110)

91.4(300)

91.4(300)

30.5 (100)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

61.0 (200)

91.4(300)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

0.75 (1) 12.2 (40)

33.5 (110)

91.4(300)

91.4(300)

30.5 (100)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

61.0 (200)

91.4(300)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

0.37 (0.5) 12.2 (40)

33.5 (110)

114.3 (375)

121.9(400)

30.5 (100)

30.5 (100)

61.0 (200)

61.0 (200)

121.9(400)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

A2 1.5 (2) 1.5 (2) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

91.4(300)

91.4(300)

91.4(300)

91.4(300)

91.4(300)

30.5 (100)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

61.0 (200)

91.4(300)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

1.2 (1.5) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

91.4(300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

30.5 (100)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

0.75 (1) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

30.5 (100)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

0.37 (0.5) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

30.5 (100)

30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

2.2 (3) 2.2 (3) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

91.4(300)

91.4(300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

Use 1204-TFB2

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

1.5 (2) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

0.75 (1) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

0.37 (0.5) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

A3 3.7 (5) 3.7 (5) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

2.2 (3) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

1.5 (2) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

0.75 (1) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

0.37 (0.5) 7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

22.9 (75)

182.9 (600)

A4 5.5-15 (7.5-20)

5.5-15 (7.5-20)

7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

24.4 (80)

182.9 (600)

B 11-22(15-30)

11-22 (15-30)

7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

24.4 (80)

182.9 (600)

C 30-45 (X40-X60)

30-45 (40-60)

7.6 (25)

12.2 (40)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

76.2 (250)

182.9 (600)

D 45-112 (60-X150)

45-112 (60-150)

12.2 (40)

30.5 (100)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

61.0 (200)

91.4(300)

E 112-187 (150-250)

112-187 (150-250)

12.2 (40)

53.3 (175)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

F 187-336 (250-450)

187-336 (250-450)

18.3 (60)

53.3 (175)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

G 187-448 (X250-600)

187-448 (250-600)

18.3 (60)

53.3 (175)

114.3 (375)

182.9(600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)



Table A.AG 1336 PLUS II/IMPACT Drive, 600V - Meters (Feet)

NR = Not RecommendedNA = Not Available at time of printing

Drive Frame

Drive kW (HP)

Motor kW (HP)

No External Devices(1)

(1) Values shown are for nominal input voltage and drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz. Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz.

w/1204-TFB2 Terminator(1) w/1204-TFA1 Terminator(1) Reactor at Drive (1) (3)

(3) A 3% reactor reduces motor and cable stress but may cause a degradation of motor waveform quality. Reactors must have a turn-turn insulation rating of 2100 Volts or higher.

Motor Motor Motor MotorA B 1329R/L(2)

(2) When used on 600V systems, 1329R/L motors have a corona inception voltage rating of approximately 1850V.

A B 1329R/L(2) A B 1329R/L(2) A B 1329R/L(2)

Any Cable

Any Cable

AnyCable

AnyCable

AnyCable

AnyCable

AnyCable

AnyCable

AnyCable

Any Cable

Any Cable

AnyCable

A4 0.75 (1) 0.75 (1) NR NR NA NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

NotRecommended

0.37 (0.5) NR NR NA NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

1.5 (2) 1.5 (2) NR NR NA NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

1.2 (1.5) NR NR NA NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

0.75 (1) NR NR 182.9 (600) NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

0.37 (0.5) NR NR 182.9 (600) NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

2.2 (3) 2.2 (3) NR NR NA NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

1.5 (2) NR NR NA NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

0.75 (1) NR NR 182.9 (600) NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

0.37 (0.5) NR NR 182.9 (600) NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

3.7 (5) 3.7 (5) NR NR NA NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

2.2 (3) NR NR NA NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

1.5 (2) NR NR 182.9 (600) NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

0.75 (1) NR NR 182.9 (600) NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

0.37 (0.5) NR NR 182.9 (600) NR 182.9 (600)

335.3 (1100)

NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600)

5.5-15(7.5-20)

5.5-15(7.5-20)

NR 9.1(30)

182.9 (600) 91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600) NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600) 30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

C 18.5-45 (25-60)

18.5-45 (25-60)

NR 9.1(30)

182.9 (600) 91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600) NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600) 30.5 (100)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

D 56-93(75-125)

56-93(75-125)

NR 9.1(30)

182.9 (600) 91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600) NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600) 61.0 (200)

91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

E 112-224 (150-X300)

112-224 (150-X300)

NR 9.1(30)

182.9 (600) 91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600) NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600) 182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

F 261-298 (350-400)

261-298 (350-400)

NR 9.1(30)

182.9 (600) 91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600) NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600) 182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

G 224-448 (300-600)

224-448 (300-600)

NR 9.1(30)

182.9 (600) 91.4 (300)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600) NR 61.0 (200)

182.9 (600) 182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)

182.9 (600)



1305 Table A.AH 1305 Drive, 480V, No External Devices at Motor - Meters (Feet)

Table A.AI 1305 Drive, 480V with Devices at Motor - Meters (Feet)

NR = Not Recommended

Drive HP(480V)

Motor HP(480V)

(480V) Using a Motor with Insulation VP-PType A Type B 1329R/L Any Cable Any Cable Shielded Cable Unshielded Cable

Maximum Carrier Frequency 4 kHz 4 kHz 2 kHz 2 kHzHigh-Line Derate Multiplier 0.85 0.85 0.55 0.555 5 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400)

3 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400)2 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400)1 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400)0.5 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400)

3 3 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 91.4 (300) 121.9 (400)2 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400)1 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400)0.5 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400)

2 2 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 76.2 (250) 121.9 (400)1 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400)0.5 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400)

1 1 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 68.6 (225) 121.9 (400)0.5 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400)

0.5 0.5 9.1 (30) 30.5 (100) 45.7 (150) 106.7 (350)

Drive HP (460V) Motor HP (460V)

Reactor at the Drive(1)

(1) IMPORTANT: A 3% reactor reduces motor stress but may cause a degradation of motor waveform quality. Reactors must have a turn-to-turn insulating rating of 2100 volts or higher. Reactors are not recommended for lightly loaded applications because over voltage trips may result at low output frequencies.

With 1204-TFB2 Terminator With 1204-TFA1 TerminatorUsing a Motor with Insulation VP-P Using a Motor with Insulation VP-P Using a Motor with Insulation VP-P Type A Type B or 1329R/L Type A or Type B Type A Type B Any Cable Shielded Unshielded Shielded Unshielded Shielded Unshielded Shielded Unshielded

Maximum Carrier Frequency 2 kHz 2 kHz 2 kHz 2 kHz 2 kHz 2 kHz 2 kHz 2 kHz 2 kHzHigh-Line Derating Multiplier 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.855 5 15.2 (50) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) NR NR 91.4 (300) 61.0 (200) 91.4 (300) 121.9 (400)

3 15.2 (50) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 91.4 (300) 121.9 (400) 99.1 (325) 61.0 (200) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400)2 15.2 (50) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400) 182.9 (600) 99.1 (325) 61.0 (200) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400)1 15.2 (50) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400) 182.9 (600) 99.1 (325) 61.0 (200) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400)0.5 15.2 (50) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 99.1 (325) 61.0 (200) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400)

3 3 15.2 (50) 91.4 (300) 182.9 (600) NR NR 91.4 (300) 61.0 (200) 91.4 (300) 121.9 (400)2 15.2 (50) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 91.4 (300) 121.9 (400) 99.1 (325) 61.0 (200) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400)1 15.2 (50) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 91.4 (300) 182.9 (600) 99.1 (325) 61.0 (200) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400)0.5 15.2 (50) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400) 182.9 (600) 99.1 (325) 61.0 (200) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400)

2 2 15.2 (50) 76.2 (250) 167.6 (550) NR NR 91.4 (300) 61.0 (200) 91.4 (300) 121.9 (400)1 15.2 (50) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 61.0 (200) 61.0 (200) 99.1 (325) 61.0 (200) 121.9 (400) 121.9 (400)0.5 15.2 (50) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) 91.4 (300) 121.9 (400) 99.1 (325) 61.0 (200) 152.4 (500) 121.9 (400)

1 1 15.2 (50) 68.6 (225) 152.4 (500) NR NR 45.7 (150) 61.0 (200) 45.7 (150) 76.2 (250)0.5 15.2 (50) 182.9 (600) 182.9 (600) NR NR 76.2 (250) 61.0 (200) 76.2 (250) 121.9 (400)

0.5 0.5 15.2 (50) 45.7 (150) 106.7 (350) NR NR NR NR NR NR



160Table A.AJ 160 Drive, 480V - Meters (Feet)

Table A.AK 160 Drive, 240 & 480V - Cable Charging Current - Meters (Feet)

NR = Not Recommended

380-460V Ratings

Motor Insulation Rating - VoltsP-P

Motor Cable Only RWR at Drive Reactor at MotorShielded Unshielded Shielded Unshielded Shielded Unshielded

4.0 kW(5 HP)

1000 13.7 (45) 6.1 (20) 160.0 (525) 182.9 (600) 99.1 (325) 91.4 (300)1200 27.4 (90) 12.2 (40) 160.0 (525) 182.9 (600) 160.0 (525) 129.5 (425)1600 160.0 (525) 144.8 (475) 160.0 (525) 182.9 (600) 160.0 (525) 182.9 (600)

2.2 kW (3 HP)

1000 12.2 (40) 12.2 (40) 160.0 (525) 182.9 (600) 68.6 (225) 76.2 (250)1200 27.4 (90) 18.3 (60) 160.0 (525) 182.9 (600) 99.1 (325) 129.5 (425)1600 160.0 (525) 152.4 (500) 160.0 (525) 182.9 (600) 160.0 (525) 182.9 (600)

1.5 kW (2 HP)

1000 12.2 (40) 12.2 (40) 129.5 (425) 182.9 (600) 99.1 (325) 91.4 (300)1200 27.4 (90) 18.3 (60) 129.5 (425) 182.9 (600) 129.5 (425) 137.2 (450)1600 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) 129.5 (425) 182.9 (600) 164.6 (540) 182.9 (600)

0.75 kW (1 HP)

1000 16.8 (55) 12.2 (40) 99.1 (325) 182.9 (600) 99.1 (325) 106.7 (350)1200 38.1 (125) 18.3 (60) 99.1 (325) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 137.2 (450)1600 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) 99.1 (325) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 182.9 (600)

0.55 kW(0.75 HP)

1000 13.7 (45) 12.2 (40) 91.4 (300) 182.9 (600) 91.4 (300) 91.4 (300)1200 38.1 (125) 18.3 (60) 91.4 (300) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500)1600 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) 91.4 (300) 182.9 (600) 152.4 (500) 182.9 (600)

0.37 kW (0.5 HP)

1000 13.7 (45) 27.4 (90) 91.4 (300) 129.5 (425) 91.4 (300) 129.5 (425)1200 38.1 (125) 54.9 (180) 91.4 (300) 129.5 (425) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500)1600 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500) 91.4 (300) 129.5 (425) 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500)

480V Ratings kHz

Motor Cable Only RWR at Drive Reactor at MotorShielded (1)

(1) When using shielded cable at lightly loaded conditions, cable length recommendations for drives rated 0.75 kW (1 HP) and below are 61 meters (200 feet).

Unshielded Shielded (1) Unshielded Shielded (1) Unshielded4.0 kW(5 HP)

2 106.7 (350) 182.9 (600) 91.4 (300) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400) 182.9 (600)4 129.5 (425) 182.9 (600) 106.7 (350) 182.9 (600) 137.2 (450) 182.9 (600)8 144.8 (475) 152.4 (500) NR NR 137.2 (450) 152.4 (500)

2.2 kW (3 HP)

2 109.7 (360) 182.9 (600) 85.3 (280) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400) 182.9 (600)4 114.3 (375) 182.9 (600) 83.8 (275) 182.9 (600) 121.9 (400) 182.9 (600)8 121.9 (400) 152.4 (500) NR NR 121.9 (400) 152.4 (500)

1.5 kW (2 HP)

2 91.4 (300) 167.6 (550) 83.8 (275) 182.9 (600) 91.4 (300) 182.9 (600)4 91.4 (300) 167.6 (550) 83.8 (275) 182.9 (600) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500)8 99.1 (325) 152.4 (500) NR NR 106.7 (350) 152.4 (500)

0.75 kW (1 HP)

2 61.0 (200) 114.3 (375) 61.0 (200) 129.5 (425) 68.6 (225) 121.9 (400)4 68.6 (225) 114.3 (375) 61.0 (200) 129.5 (425) 68.6 (225) 114.3 (375)8 76.2 (250) 114.3 (375) NR NR 68.6 (225) 121.9 (400)

0.55 kW(0.75 HP)

2 54.9 (180) 106.7 (350) 54.9 (180) 114.3 (375) 54.9 (180) 106.7 (350)4 54.9 (180) 106.7 (350) 54.9 (180) 114.3 (375) 54.9 (180) 106.7 (350)8 54.9 (180) 106.7 (350) NR NR 54.9 (180) 106.7 (350)

0.37 kW (0.5 HP)

2 30.5 (100) 99.1 (325) 30.5 (100) 106.7 (350) 30.5 (100) 91.4 (300)4 30.5 (100) 99.1 (325) 30.5 (100) 106.7 (350) 30.5 (100) 106.7 (350)8 30.5 (100) 99.1 (325) NR 30.5 (100) 106.7 (350)

240V Ratings No Reactor RWR at Drive Reactor at Motor0.37 to 4.0 kW(0.5 to 5 HP)2 through 8 kHz

Shielded (1) Unshielded Shielded (1) Unshielded Shielded (1) Unshielded

160.0 (525) 182.9 (600) NR NR 160.0 (525) 182.9 (600)



1321-RWR Guidelines • Figure A.1 shows wiring for single inverter drives (PowerFlex 70 Frames A-E, PowerFlex 700 Frames 0-6, PowerFlex 700H Frames 9-11 and PowerFlex 700S Frames 1-11 & 13).

Figure A.2 describes dual inverter drives (PowerFlex 700H/700S Frame 12).

Figure A.3 is for single inverter drives that require parallel reactors because the drive amp rating exceeds the rating of the largest available reactor (PowerFlex 700S Frame 13).

• Configurations shown in Figure A.1 and Figure A.3 can be used for single inverter drives with single or parallel cables, and single-motor or multi-motor applications.

• The configuration shown in Figure A.2 is used with dual inverter drives with single or parallel cables, and single-motor or multi-motor applications.

• Filter (RWR or L-R) must be connected at drive output terminals, less than 7.6 meters (25 feet) from the drive.

• See the lead length tables for output reactor and resistor selection. The resistor specification is based on the number of parallel cables used.

• For PowerFlex 700H & 700S Frame 12 drives and some PowerFlex 700S Frame 13 drives, two reactors are required. In this case, the resistor ohms and watts ratings are values per phase for each reactor (see lead length tables for output reactor selection).

• Resistor must be connected to reactor using 150 degree C wire. Select wire gauge based on rated resistor power from the lead length tables.

• Recommended cables include; XLPE, EPR and Hypalon.

• Maximum total cable distance for resistor wires is 6.1 meters (20 feet) or 3 meters (10 feet) per side.

Figure A.1 Filter Wiring for Single Inverter Drive

AC Drive

R

Output Reactor

Damping Resistor

1321-RWR

MotorCable

U

V

W



Figure A.2 Filter Wiring for Dual Inverter Frame 12 Drive

AC Drive

R

R

Output Reactor

Damping Resistor

L-R Filter

Output Reactor

Damping Resistor

L-R Filter

U1

V1

W1

U2

V2

W2

MotorCable



Figure A.3 Filter Wiring for Single Inverter Frame 13 Drive w/ Parallel Reactors

R

R

Output Reactor

Damping Resistor

L-R Filter

Output Reactor

Damping Resistor

L-R Filter

MotorCable

AC Drive

U

V

W


Glossary

Ambient AirAir around any equipment cabinet. See surrounding air for more detail.

ArmoredA fixed geometry cable that has a protective “sheath” of continuous metal

Capacitive CouplingCurrent or voltage that is induced on one circuit by another because of their close physical proximity. For drive installations it is generally seen in two areas:

1. Coupling between motor leads of two drives, such that the operating drive induces voltage onto the motor leads (and thus the motor) of a non-operating drive.

2. Coupling between the conductors /or shields of motor leads that creates a requirement for more current than the motor itself would demand.

CIV (Corona Inception Voltage)The amplitude of voltage on a motor or other electrical winding that produces corona (ionization of air to ozone). CIV is increased by adding phase paper, placing windings in the proper pattern and reducing or eliminating air bubbles (voids) in the varnish applied.

Common Mode CoreA ferrite bead or core that can be used to pass control, communications or motor leads through to attenuate high frequency noise. Catalog Number/Part Number 1321-Mxxx

Common Mode NoiseElectrical noise, typically high frequency, that is imposed on the ground grid, carriers in an electrical system

ConduitConductive ferrous electrical metal tubing used to contain and protect individual wires

DampWet locations per U.S. NEC or local code

DiscreteIndividual, hard-wired inputs or outputs, typically used for control of the drive (Start, Stop, etc.)


Glossary-2

Dry Dry locations per Per NEC Article 100 or local code

dv/dtThe rate of change of voltage over time

Fill RatesThe maximum number of conductors allowed in a conduit, as determined by local, state or national electrical code.

Fixed GeometryCable whose construction fixes the physical position of each conductor within the overall coating, usually with filler material that prevents individual conductors from moving.

IGBTInsulated Gate Bi-Polar Transistor. The typical power semi conductor device used in most PWM AC drives today

mil0.001 inches

MOVMetal Oxide Varistor

NECUnited States National Electric Code NFPA70

Peak Cable Charging CurrentThe current required to charge capacitance in motor cable. This capacitance has various components:

– conductor to shield or conduit– conductor to conductor– motor stator to motor frame

PVC Polyvinyl Chloride (typically thermoplastic)

RWR Reflected Waver Reducer, an RL network mounted at or near the drive, used to reduce the amplitude and rise time of the reflected wave pulses. Cat No 1204-RWR2-09-B or 1204-RWR2-09-C


Glossary-3

ShieldedCable containing a foil or braided metal shield surrounding the conductors. Usually found in multi-conductor cable. Shield coverage should be at least 75%.

SignalIndividual hard wired analog inputs or outputs, typically used to issue reference commands or process information to or from the drive.

Surrounding Air TemperatureThe temperature of the air around the drive. If the drive is free standing or wall mounted, the surrounding air temperature is room temperature. If the drive is mounted inside another cabinet, the surrounding air temperature is the interior temperature of that cabinet

Terminator An RC network mounted at or near the motor, used to reduce the amplitude and rise time of the reflected wave pulses. Catalog Number 1204-TFxx

THHN/THWNU.S. designations for individual conductor wire, typically 75 °C or 90 °C rated and with PVC insulation and nylon coating.

UnshieldedCable containing no braided or foil sheath surrounding the conductors. Can be multi-conductor cable or individual conductors.

WetLocations with moisture present - see Damp

XLPE Cross Linked Polyethylene

ULUnderwriters Laboratories


Glossary-4

Notes:


Index

Numerics1305 Drive, A-281305 Drive, AC Line Impedance, 2-71336 Drive, AC Line Impedance, 2-131336 Plus II/Impact Drive, A-261336 PLUS II/Impact Drive, 600V, A-27160 Drive, Cable Charging Current, A-294, PowerFlex, AC Line Impedance, 2-840, PowerFlex, AC Line Impedance, 2-8400, PowerFlex, AC Line Impedance, 2-970, PowerFlex, AC Line Impedance, 2-9700, PowerFlex, AC Line Impedance, 2-11

AAC Line, 2-5Analog Signal Cable, 1-12Armored Cable, 1-8

Containing Common Mode Noise, 6-2

BBearing Current, 6-6Brake Solenoid, Noise, 6-3

CCable

Analog Signal, 1-12Armored, 1-8Connectors, 4-5Containing Common Mode Noise, 6-2Discrete Drive I/O, 1-11Encoder, 1-12European Style, 1-9Exterior Cover, 1-2Length, 1-11Material, 1-2Recommended, 1-5Shielded, 1-6Shields, 3-7Trays, 4-14Types, 1-1, 1-8Unshielded, 1-5Unshielded Definition, A-1

Cable Length Restrictions, A-1Cable, Input Power, 1-10, 3-7Capacitive Current Cable Length

Recommendations, A-29

Capacitors, Common Mode, 2-17Clamp, Shield Termination, 4-15Common Mode Capacitors, 2-17Common Mode Chokes, 6-2Common Mode Noise

Armored Cable, 6-2Causes, 6-1Conduit, 6-2Containing, 6-2Motor Cable Length, 6-2Shielded Cable, 6-2

Communications, 1-12ControlNet, 1-13Data Highway, 1-14DeviceNet, 1-12Ethernet, 1-13Remote I/O, 1-14RS232/485, 1-14Serial, 1-14

Concentricity, Insulation, 1-4Conductor, Termination, 4-18Conductors, 1-3Conduit, 4-13

Cable Connectors, 4-5Common Mode Noise, 6-2Entry, 4-4Entry Plates, 4-4

Connections, Ground, 4-6Contacts, 6-3Control Terminal, 4-18Control Wire, 1-11ControlNet, 1-13Conventions, P-2

DData Highway, 1-14DC Bus Wiring Guidelines, 2-18Delta/Delta with Grounded Leg, 2-2Delta/Wye with Grounded Wye, 2-1DeviceNet, 1-12DH+, 1-14Diode, 6-4Discrete Drive I/O, Cable, 1-11Distribution

Delta/Delta with Grounded Leg, 2-2Delta/Wye with Grounded Wye, 2-1High Resistance Ground, 2-3TN-S Five-Wire System, 2-4


Index-2

Ungrounded Secondary, 2-3Documentation, P-1Drive

1305, A-281305 Drive with Line Device, A-281305,AC Line Impedance, 2-71336 PLUS II/Impact, A-261336 PLUS II/Impact, 600V, A-271336,AC Line Impedance, 2-13160, Cable Charging Current, A-29160, Voltage Peak, A-29160,AC Line Impedance, 2-7PowerFlex 4, AC Line Impedance, 2-8PowerFlex 40, AC Line Impedance, 2-8PowerFlex 400, AC Line Impedance, 2-9PowerFlex 70, AC Line Impedance, 2-9PowerFlex 700, AC Line Impedance,

2-11

EElectromagnetic Interference (EMI)

Causes, 6-3Mitigating, 6-3Preventing, 6-3

EMC, Installation, 4-2Encoder Cable, 1-12Encompass Partners, P-2Ethernet, 1-13European Style Cable, 1-9

FFilter, RFI, 3-2

GGauge, 1-3Geometry, 1-4Glands, 4-5Grounded

Delta/Delta, 2-2Delta/Wye, 2-1

Grounding, 3-1Acceptable Practices, 3-5Building Steel, 3-1Connections, 4-6Effective Practices, 3-6Fully Grounded System, 3-5High Resistance System, 3-4Motors, 3-2

Optimal Practices, 3-6PE, 3-2Practices, 3-5, 4-1RFI Filter, 3-2Safety, 3-1TN-S Five-Wire, 3-2Ungrounded, 3-4

Grounding Practices, 3-6Grounds, Noise Related, 3-3

II/O Cable, Discrete Drive, 1-11Impedance, 2-5

Multiple Drives, 2-15Reactor, 2-5

Inductive Loads, Noise, 6-3Input Power Cables, 1-10Inputs, Isolated, 3-7Installation

EMC Specific, 4-2Layout, 4-2Practices, 4-1

Insulation, 1-1, 1-2, 1-4, 1-9, 1-10, 1-12, 4-13, 4-18, 5-1

LLayout, Installation, 4-2Length

Common Mode Noise, 6-2Motor Cable, 1-11Restrictions, 5-2

Length Restrictions, A-1Lighting, Noise, 6-6Line Impedance

AC Line Impedance, 2-5Multiple Drives, 2-15

MManual Conventions, P-2Manual Usage, P-1Material, Cable, 1-2Mode Capacitors, Common, 2-17Moisture, 1-2, 4-19, 5-2Motor

1329R/L, A-11488V, A-1Brake Solenoid Noise, 6-3


Index-3

Grounding, 3-2Type A, A-1Type B, A-1

Motor Brake Solenoid, Noise, 6-3Motor Cable Length, 1-11Motor Cable Length Restrictions, A-1Motor Starters, Noise, 6-3Motors, Noise, 6-3Mounting, 4-1MOV Surge Protection, 2-17Multiple Drives

Line Impedance, 2-15Reactor, 2-15

NNoise

Brake, 6-3Common Mode, 6-1Contacts, 6-3Enclosure Lighting, 6-6Inductive Loads, 6-3Lighting, 6-6Mitigating, 6-3Motor Brake, 6-3Motor Starters, 6-3Motors, 6-3Preventing, 6-3Related Grounds, 3-3Relays, 6-3Solenoids, 6-3Switch Contacts, 6-3Transient Interference, 6-3

PPower

Wire, 1-10, 1-11, 1-12, 3-7, 4-14, 4-18, 6-2

Power Cables, Input, 1-10Power Distribution, 2-1

Delta/Delta with Grounded Leg, 2-2Delta/Wye with Grounded Wye, 2-1High Resistance Ground, 2-3TN-S Five-Wire System, 2-4Ungrounded Secondary, 2-3

Power Terminals, 4-18PowerFlex 4, 2-8PowerFlex 40, 2-8PowerFlex 400, 2-9

PowerFlex 70, 2-9PowerFlex 700, 2-11Practices, Grounding, 4-1Precautions, P-2Protection

MOV Surge, 2-17

RRC Networks, 6-4Reactor, Multiple Drives, 2-15Recommended Cable Design, 1-5Recommended Documentation, P-1Reflected Wave, 5-1

Effects on Wire Types, 5-1Length Restrictions, 5-2Motor Protection, 5-2

Relays, Noise, 6-3Remote I/O, 1-14Resistance, Ground, 2-3RFI Filter Grounding, 3-2Routing, 4-9

SSafety Grounds

Building Steel, 3-1Grounding PE or Ground, 3-2

Safety Grounds, Grounding, 3-1Secondary, Ungrounded, 2-3Serial (RS232/485), 1-14Shields

Cable, 1-6, 3-7Termination, 4-15

SignalAnalog Cable, 1-12Terminals, 4-18Wire, 1-12

Solenoids, Noise, 6-3Spacing, 4-10

Wiring, 4-9, 4-10Standard Installation, 4-1Suppression, Noise

Contracts, 6-3Inductive Loads, 6-3Motor Starters, 6-3Motors, 6-3Relays, 6-3Solenoids, 6-3

Suppressor, 2-17, 6-4


Index-4

Surge ProtectionMOV, 2-17

Switch ContactsNoise, 6-3

System ConfigurationDelta/Delta with Grounded Leg, 2-2Delta/Wye with Grounded Wye, 2-1High Resistance Ground, 2-3TN-S Five-Wire System, 2-4Ungrounded Secondary, 2-3

TTB (Terminal Block)

Control, 4-18Power, 4-18Signal, 4-18

Temperature, 1-3Termination

Conductor, 4-18Control Terminal, 4-18Power Terminals, 4-18Shield, 4-15Shield via Pigtail (Lead), 4-5Signal Terminals, 4-18Via Cable Clamp, 4-17Via Circular Clamp, 4-15Via Pigtail (Lead), 4-16

TN-S Five-Wire Systems, 2-4, 3-2Transient Interference

Causes, 6-3Suppression, 6-3

UUngrounded Secondary, 2-3Ungrounded System Example, 3-4Unshielded Cable, 1-5

VVaristors, 2-17, 6-4

WWire

Control, 1-11Insulation, 1-1, 1-2, 1-4, 1-9, 1-10, 1-12,

4-13, 4-18, 5-1Power, 1-10, 1-11, 1-12, 3-7, 4-14, 4-18,

6-2

Signal, 1-12Wire Routing

Antennas, 4-12Loops, 4-12Noise, 4-12Within a Cabinet, 4-11Within Conduit, 4-12

Wire/Cable Types, 1-1Armored Cable, 1-8Conductors, 1-3European Style Cable, 1-9Exterior Cover, 1-2Gauge, 1-3Geometry, 1-4Insulation Thickness, 1-4Material, 1-2Reflected Wave Effects, 5-1Shielded Cable, 1-6Temperature Rating, 1-3Unshielded Cable, 1-5

WiringCategory Definitions, 4-9Routing, 4-9Spacing, 4-9Spacing Notes, 4-10

ZZero Cross Switching, 6-3

www.rockwellautomation.com

Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444

Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation, Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846

Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication DRIVES-IN001K-EN-P – May 2010 Supersedes Publication DRIVES-IN001J-EN-P – April 2009 Copyright © 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.

U.S. Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support - Tel: (1) 262.512.8176, Fax: (1) 262.512.2222, Email: [email protected], Online: www.ab.com/support/abdrives

WStone

Text Box

Equipment Descriptions

WStone

Ellipse

WStone

Ellipse

WStone

Ellipse

WStone

Ellipse

WStone

Ellipse

WStone

Ellipse

WStone

Arrow

WStone

Arrow

WStone

Arrow

WStone

Text Box

WIRE NUMBERS SHOULD BE DIFFERENT

WStone

Text Box

KEI REVIEW 2013-06-19 EXTRACTED PAGES FROM SUBMITTAL

WStone

Rectangle

WStone

Callout

REMOVE GROUND TIE TO THE NEUTRAL

WStone

Text Box

KEI REVIEW 2013-06-19 EXTRACTED PAGES FROM SUBMITTAL

Appendix B

Instrument List

Inputs/Outputs List

Appendix BInstrument List

Monterery Peninsula Water Management DistrictElectrical Equipment Installation Project

Revision 0August 2013

Page 1 of 2

Equi

pmen

t Id

entif

icat

ion

Num

ber

Equi

pmen

t Su

ffix

Service Furnished by Equi

p. T

ype

M

=Mec

h,

E=El

ec,

V=

Val

ve,

I= In

stru

men

t

Equipment Description or Manufacturer / Model Number En

gine

er

P&ID

Dia

gram

Spec. Section Volta

ge

HP

or K

W

Ran

ge

Initi

al S

etpo

int

PLC I/O Type

Comments

FE- 301 Well #3 Flow Sensor Existing I Sparling Tigermag EP I-1 - Purchased by District

FE- 303 Well #3 Lube Flow Sensor I I-1 Purchased by District

FE- 305 Well #3 Backflush Flow Sensor Existing I Sparling Tigermag EP I-1 - Purchased by District

FE- 401 Well #4 Flow Sensor Existing I Sparling Tigermag EP I-1 - - Purchased by District

FE- 403 Well #4 Lube Flow Sensor I I-1 Purchased by District

FE- 405 Well #4 Flow Sensor Existing I Sparling Tigermag EP I-1 - - Purchased by District

FQIT- 301 Well #3 Flow Transmitter Existing I Sparling Tigermag EP I-1 - Analog Discrete

Flow, Flow Direction, Flow Totalization Purchased by District

FIT- 303 Well #3 Lube Flow Transmitter I I-1 Purchased by District

FQIT- 305 Well #3 Flow Backflush FlowTransmitter Existing I Sparling Tigermag EP I-1 - Analog

DiscreteFlow, Flow Direction, Flow Totalization Purchased by District

FQIT- 401 Well #4 Flow Transmitter Existing I Sparling Tigermag EP I-1 - - Analog Discrete


FIT- 403 Well #4 Lube Flow Transmitter I I-1 Purchased by District

FQIT- 405 Well #4 Flow Transmitter Existing I Sparling Tigermag EP I-1 - - Analog Discrete


HS- 300 A Well #3 Stop Switch VFD I Allen Bradley I-1 - Located in VFD VFD purchased by District

HS- 300 B Well #3 Start Switch VFD I Allen Bradley I-1 - Located in VFD VFD purchased by District

HS- 300 Well #3 Local/Remote Switch VFD I Allen Bradley I-1 - Located in VFD VFD purchased by District

HS- 301 Pump P-300 HOA Switch Contractor I I-1 Dwg. E-18A Discrete Switch located in Well #1 Control Station

HS- 302 PRV-302 HOA Switch Contractor I I-1 Dwg. E-18A Discrete Switch located in Well #1 Control Station

HS- 305 PSV-305 HOA Switch Contractor I I-1 Dwg. E-18A Discrete Switch located in Well #1 Control Station

HS- 400 A Well #4 Stop Switch VFD I I-1 - Located in VFD VFD purchased by District

HS- 400 B Well #4 Start Switch VFD I I-1 - Located in VFD VFD purchased by District

HS- 400 Well #4 Local/Remote Switch VFD I I-1 - Located in VFD VFD purchased by District

HS- 401 Pump P-400 HOA Switch Contractor I I-1 Dwg. E-18A - Discrete Switch located in Well #2 Control Station

HS- 402 PRV-402 HOA Switch Contractor I I-1 Dwg. E-18A - Discrete Switch located in Well #2 Control Station

Appendix BInstrument List



Page 2 of 2

Equi

pmen

t Id

entif

icat

ion

Num

ber

Equi

pmen

t Su

ffix

Service Furnished by Equi

p. T

ype

M

=Mec

h,

E=El

ec,

V=

Val

ve,

I= In

stru

men

t

Equipment Description or Manufacturer / Model Number En

gine

er

P&ID

Dia

gram

Spec. Section Volta

ge

HP

or K

W

Ran

ge

Initi

al S

etpo

int

PLC I/O Type

Comments

HS- 405 PSV-405 HOA Switch Contractor I I-1 Dwg. E-18A - Discrete Switch located in Well #2 Control Station

LT- 301 Well #3 Level Transmitter Contractor I Druck PTX 1230 I-1 17420 24vdc Analog Druck STE110 Termination Box with Desiccant

LT- 401 Well #4 Level Transmitter Contractor I Druck PTX 1230 I-1 17420 24vdc Analog Druck STE110 Termination Box with Desiccant

PI 300 Well #3 Pressure Gauge Contractor I Ashcroft or Equal I-1 17510 0-100 psi

PI- 303 Well #3 Injection Pressure Gauge Contractor I Ashcroft or Equal I-1 17510 0-100 psi

PI- 305 Well #3 Backflush Pressure Gauge Contractor I Ashcroft or Equal I-1 17510 0-100 psi

PI- 400 Well #4 Pressure Gauge Contractor I Ashcroft or Equal I-1 17510 0-100 psi

PI- 403 Well #4 Injection Pressure Gauge Contractor I Ashcroft or Equal I-1 17510 - 0-100 psi

PI- 405 Well #4 Backflush Pressure Gauge Contractor I Ashcroft or Equal I-1 17510 0-100 psi

PIT- 300 Well #3 Pressure Transmitter Existing I Rosemount 3051TG3A2B21AB4M5 I-1 17510 24vdc 0-100 psi Analog Supply with new O'Brien box w/ heat trace

PIT- 400 Well #4 Pressure Transmitter Contractor i Rosemount 3051TG3A2B21AB4M5 I-1 17510 24vdc 0-100 psi Analog Supply with new O'Brien box w/ heat trace

SC- 300 Well #3 Local Speed Control Switch VFD I Allen Bradley I-1 - - Located in VFD

VFD purchased by District

SC- 400 Well #4 Local Speed Control Switch VFD I Allen Bradley I-1 - - Located in VFD

VFD purchased by District

Appendix BPLC Inputs / Outputs List



1 of 1

Inpu

t/Out

put

Iden

tific

atio

n

Num

ber

Equi

pmen

t Su

ffix OIT

SCADAEquipment Description or Manufacturer/Model Number P&

ID D

iagr

am

Spec. Section Voltage Range Se

tpoi

nt

PLC Input/Output

TypeLocation Comments

XI- 300 A VFD #3 in Local I-1 24 VDC DI VFD #3XI- 300 B VFD #3 Running I-1 24 VDC DI VFD #3

SC- 300 VFD #3 Speed Control Command I-1 4-20 mA AO VFD #3SI- 300 VFD #3 Speed Indication I-1 4-20 mA AI VFD #3

XA- 300 VFD #3 Fault I-1 24 VDC DI VFD #3XY- 300 VFD #3 Run Command I-1 24 VDC DO VFD #3XI- 301 A Well Pump #3 HOA in Hand I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #3XI- 301 B Well Pump #3 HOA in Auto I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #3

FDI- 301 Well #3 Flow Direction I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #3FI- 301 Well #3 Flow I-1 4-20 mA 0-4,000 GPM AI Well Site #3

FQ- 301 Well #3 Flow Total I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #3LI- 301 Well ASR-3 Level I-1 4-20 mA 0-450' H20 AI Well ASR-3PI 300 Well #3 Discharge/Injection/Backflush Pressure I-1 4-20 mA AI Well Site 3

XI- 302 A PRV-302 HOA in Hand I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #3XI- 302 B PRV-302 HOA in Auto I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #3

XY- 302 PRV-302 Open Command I-1 120 VAC DO Well Site #3FI- 303 Well Pump #3 Water Lube Flow I-1 24 VDC AI Well Site #3XI- 305 A PSV-305 HOA in Hand I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #3XI- 305 B PSV-305 HOA in Auto I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #3

XY- 305 PSV-305 Open Command I-1 120 VAC DO Well Site #3XI- 400 A VFD #4 in Local I-1 24 VDC DI VFD #4XI- 400 B VFD #4 Running I-1 24 VDC DI VFD #4PI 400 Well #4 Discharge/Injection/Backflush Pressure I-1 4-20 mA AI Well Site #4

SC- 400 VFD #4 Speed Control Command I-1 4-20 mA AO VFD #4SI- 400 VFD #4 Speed Indication I-1 4-20 mA AI VFD #4

XA- 400 VFD #4 Fault I-1 24 VDC DI VFD #4XY- 400 VFD #4 Run Command I-1 24 VDC DO VFD #4XI- 401 A Well Pump #4 HOA in Hand I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #4XI- 401 B Well Pump #4 HOA in Auto I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #4

FDI- 401 Well #4 Flow Direction I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #4FI- 401 Well #4 Flow I-1 4-20 mA 0-4,000 GPM AI Well Site #4

FQ- 401 Well #4 Flow Total I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #4LI- 401 Well ASR-2 Level I-1 4-20 mA 0-450' H20 AI Well ASR-1XI- 402 A PRV-402 HOA in Hand I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #4XI- 402 B PRV-402 HOA in Auto I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #4

XY- 402 PRV-402 Open Command I-1 120 VAC DO Well Site #4FI- 403 Well Pump #4 Water Lube Flow I-1 24 VDC AI Well Site #4XI- 405 A PSV-405 HOA in Hand I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #4XI- 405 B PSV-405 HOA in Auto I-1 24 VDC DI Well Site #4

XY- 405 PSV-405 Open Command I-1 120 VAC DO Well Site #4XA- 920 PLC Failure I-1 24 VDC DI Control Panel

XA- 921 Power Failure I-1 24 VDC DI Control Panel via internal relay

XA- 922 Intruder Alarm I-1 24 VDC DI 4 doors & Hatch in building

NOTES:1. 120 VAC power from PLC required for potentiometer control. See Well Control Station drawings

Appendix C

Arc Flash Labels – Pending

Circuit Breaker Settings - Pending

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Documents

Transcript of GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS